..... 
~ I CONVENTIONAL INSTRUMENT PANEL 
14 
35'00313 t 32 
34 -A!J i 
1 31 
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT PANEL & 
WARNING LIGHTS 
1A 
~- . [II(~ 11 -~~-J 
7 I I J -,- 't 
3 6 7 9 11 14 
37 
t 
III 
T"" 
•
INSTRUMENTATION 
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER 
16 
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER 
5POSITIONS 
LOCK POSITION-Steering wheel is locked lor theft protection. 
The key can be remo•ed only in this position. The column mounted 
shift selector must be engaged in P (PARK) before the key can be 
placed In the LOCK position. 
OFF POSITION-Steering wheel unlocked. After the engine is 
started, the OFF position can be used to shut the engine down 
without locking the steering wheel. 
LOCK ~1aiF ON 
( (( t~} START 
ACCESSORY 
ACC (ACCESSORY) 
POSITION-Vehicle 
electrical syatem 
operates without 
Ignition. 
START POSITION­Used 
to start the 
engine. The engine 
will crank until you 
release the key. The 
key will return to 
ON position. 
ON POSITION­Warning 
lights 
can be checked 
before the engine 
Is started. Normal 
running position 
after englna Ia 
started. 
WARNING- Before leaving the driver's seat 
you should always make sure the gear selector 
lever is engaged in P (PARK). Set the parking 
brake fully AND shut off the ignition. Unex­pected 
and possibly sudden vehicle movement 
may occur if these precautions are not taken. 
Never leave children or animals unattended in 
the vehicle. 
INSTRUMENTATION 
If difficulty is encountered in turning the key from the 
LOCK position, move the steering wheel left or right 
until the key turns freely. 
INDICATOR LIGHTS -INSTRUMENT PANEL 
Electronic Instrument Panel (Optional) 
FASTEN !..i CHECK 
BELTS '<"r' OIL 
UNLEADED 
BRAKE 
FUEL ONLY 
CHECK 
ALARM ENGINE 
Conventional Instrument Panel 
FASTEN 
BELTS4t. 
BRAKE DOOR 
OIL CHECK 
ALARM 
~ ENGINE 
AMP CHECK 
WASHER 0 OIL 
ALARM (Anti-Theft Lamp) - This light will blink on 
and off when the ignition switch is OFF and any door 
is opened. This indicates a standby condition of the 
anti-theft system. Once the doors are locked, the light 
will remain lit for approximately 30 seconds. 
BRAKE SYSTEM AND PARKING BRAKE WARNING 
LIGHT - This light (BRAKE) should glow when the 
ignition lock cylinder is in the ON or START position 
and the engine is not running. 
17
INSTRUMENTATION 
Your vehicle has a dual braking system. In case of a 
loss of hydraulic pressure in either brake system, the 
other will provide reduced braking capability. In this 
case the BRAKE warning light on the instrument pan­el 
will light when the brakes are applied, and remain 
lit with the ignition key in the ON position. 
WARNING - Any indicated maHunction in the 
hydraulic braking system should receive imme­diate 
attention, to avoid the possibility of loss 
of braking and personal injury. 
CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT - This light 
(AMP) will glow with the ignitton switch in the ON or 
START position until the engine is started and the al­ternator 
begins charging. If the light glows with the 
engine running, have the electrical system checked. 
CHECK OIL- This light will glow momentarily when 
the ignition switch is turned to START. If the light 
glows steadily while the engine is running, the en­gine 
oil level should be checked. Check actual level 
using the oil dipstick while the vehicle is on level 
ground. Add oil if required. In some instances the 
CHECK OIL light may also glow if the vehicle is start­ed 
on a steep grade, even though the oil level is 
sufficient. 
Always check level before adding oil by using the oil 
dipstick and with the vehicle on level ground. 
DOOR WARNING LIGHT- This light will glow if the 
ignition switch is in the ON position and any door is 
not completely closed. 
HEAD LAMPS ON CHIME - This chime will sound 
when opening the driver's door with the head lamps 
on, until the door is closed or the head lamps are 
turned off. 
IGNITION KEY CHIME - A chime will sound if the 
driver's door is opened while the key is fully in the 
ignition. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the 
18 
INSTRUMENTATION 
key in the ignition. Always lock your vehicle when 
leaving it unattended. 
LOW FUEL WARNING LIGHT - This light will glow 
briefly with the ignition switch in the ON position. 
When the fuel level is approximately 1/8 of a tank, 
this light will glow steadily. 
OIL WARNING LIGHT- This light will glow with the 
ignition switch in the ON or START posit~on u~til the 
engine is started. If the light glows steadily while the 
engine is running, there is a loss of oil pressure. ~f 
this occurs, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possi­ble, 
shut off the engine and check the oil level. Add 
oil if necessary. 
CAUTION - H the engine is not stopped as soon as 
safely possible, severe engine damage could result. 
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND CHIME - This 
warning light glows for four to eight seconds after 
the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START 
position. The seat belt chime will also sound for a 
few seconds if the driver's belt is not used. 
WASHER FLUID LOW WARNING LIGHT- This light 
will glow with the ignition switch ON and when the 
fluid level reaches approximately the 1/4 level. 
Electronic Message Center Warnings 
ELECTRONIC INStRUMENT PANEL WITH MESSAGE CENTER 
FUEL GAUGE SPEEDOMETER MESSAGE CENTER 
1 00 
®OOJOD 
AM JAN 1 MON 
( fo~N<:) : II ) 
19
INSTRUMENTATION 
The following warning displays will appear on your 
Message Center only when a warning is required for 
the particular system. 
• Brake Pressure 
• Charge System 
• Engine Oil Pressure 
• Engine Coolant Temp. 
• Door Ajar 
• Trunk Ajar 
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low 
• Head Lamp Out 
• Tail Lamp Out 
• Brake Lamp Out 
WARNING - Be sure to heed the warning in­formation 
displayed on the display and take 
corrective action. 
The warnings will replace the clock display or other 
messages when applicable. The warnings appear 
one at a time, and appear in sequence if there is 
more than one. A computer automatically and con­stantly 
checks the systems when the ignition key is in 
ACC or ON position, even if the engine is not run­ning. 
The sensors for lamps function only when 
these items are in use. Each initial warning begins 
with an audible tone, to attract attention, and flashes 
for four seconds. Some warnings will keep reappear­ing 
until the condition is serviced. In ACC positionr 
there is one audible tone, and the flashing is less fre­quent 
than in ,the ON position. 
Hookup of additional lights may result in false warn­ing 
or no warning in the Lamp Outage message. 
20 
INSTRUMENTATION 
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM 
The system provides both an aud.io and a visual 
alarm signal by intermittently soundmg ~he horn and 
flashing head lamps, tail lamps and parkmg. lan:'ps on 
and off. In addition, further vehicle protect1on IS pro­vided 
by disabling the vehicle starter circuit to pre­vent 
vehicle starts until the system has been 
disarmed. 
Arming the System 
The system will be armed when the following input 
sequence is followed: 
• The ignition key is removed. 
• Any door is open (alarm indicator lamp will blink 
on and off reminding you to arm the system). 
NOTE-The door can be closed at this time without 
arming the alarm. 
• The doors are locked by using either the power 
lock switch or by using the last two buttons (7/8, 
9/0) of the keyless entry keyboard (if so equi~ped.). 
This step must be performed while the door 1s st1ll 
open. The alarm indicator lamp will now glow 
steadily. 
NOTE - At this point, the arming procedure can be 
cancelled by unlocking the doors with the power 
door lock switch. System will then return to standby 
condition (blinking light). 
• All doors are closed (indicator lamp will remain lit 
for approximately thirty seconds). 
21
INSTRUMENTATION 
SYSTEM IS ARMED - INDICATOR lAMP IS OFF 
Disarming the System 
Unlock eithe~ front door with the door key, rotating 
~he key fully m the unlock direction until it stops turn­rng 
or unlock the vehicle using the keyless entry door 
unlock sequence. If the key is not fully rotated to the 
end of travel, the system may not necessarily disarm. 
(See Shutting Off the Alarm.) 
If the system is armed while the operator is in the 
ve~icle, it can be disarmed by turning the ignition 
swrtch to " run " or "accessory" ppsition. However 
this will not disarm the system once it has bee~ 
activated. 
Activating the Alarm 
The alarm system will be activated if any of the fol­lowing 
actions occur after the system has been 
armed: 
1. Any door is opened without using a door key or 
keyless entry code (if so equipped). 
2. The trunk lock cylinder is removed. (NOTE- the 
trunk can be opened with a key without activating 
the alarm.) · 
Shutting Off the Alarm 
The alarm is shut off by three methods. One method 
is by unlocking a front vehicle door with a door key. 
Another is by using the keyless entry door unlock se­quence 
(if so equipped). The third method is a func­tion 
of the control module which will turn the alarm 
off automatically within two to four minutes -after the 
alarm has been activated. When the alarm is shut off 
automatically, the system returns to an armed state 
and the alarm will activate if another intrusio~ 
occurs. 
22 
INSTRUMENTATION 
The starter interrupt circuit is activated at the time of 
the initial intrusion and will remain activated until de­activated 
by disarming the system with the door key 
or keyless entry code. 
GAUGES 
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT PANEL 
FUEL GAUGE SPEEDOMETER MESSAGE CENTER 
·: - .-. ..... 1 00 
;~. , 
@"ii~ 
AM JAN 1 MON 
a ::§ [!HIIol0 111 I 
Conventional Fuel Gauge 
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi­tion, 
this gauge indicates approximate fuel level. The 
reading may fluctuate during cornering and 
stopping. 
Electronic Fuel Gauge 
To operate, turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC 
position. The display will flash on then off for a few 
seconds. The fuel level will be indicated by the 
number of bars illuminated. The reading may fluctu­ate 
during cornering and stopping. 
LOW FUEL ALERT - A low fuel alert, indicated by a 
continuously flashing fuel pump symbol, will be dis­played 
when two bars or Jess remain lit. 
Empty is indicated when the last bar turns off. 
NOTE - One bar does not indicate one gallon or 
liter. 
23
INSTRUMENTATION 
SERVICE ALERTS - If the fuel gauge shows one of 
the following service alerts, it indicates a circuit prob­lem 
and should be checked by your Dealership Ser­vice 
Department. 
• The E, F, and (1/2 tank) symbols flash on and off 
continuously and bars are not fit. 
• All fuel bars flash on and off continuously. 
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine 
coolant when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON 
position. 
The pointer will move to the NORMAL band as the 
engine warms. It is acceptable under certain driving 
conditions, such as heavy traffic or stop-and-go driv­ing 
in hot weather, for the pointer to read at the very 
top of the normal band. 
If the pointer moves out of the normal band towards 
the H (hot) position, the engine is overheating and 
engine damage may result. Safely pull off the road, 
turn off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant 
level following the instructions under Engine Cooling 
System. 
CAUTION - If the engine is not stopped as soon as 
safely possible, severe engine damage could result. 
If the engine continues to overheat, have the cooling 
system checked and repaired. 
CLOCKS 
Electronic 
Refer to the Electronic Message Center for operating 
procedures. 
24 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Conventional Quartz Electric Sweephand Clock 
No timekeeping accuracy adjustment is requ ~ red. To 
set the time, pull out the set knob and turn It ~lock­wise 
to advance the time, or turn counterclockwise to 
set back the time. 
SPEEDOMETERS 
Conventional 
This speedometer indicates the forward speed of the 
vehicle. 
Electronic Digital 
This speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles 
per hour (MPH) or kilometers per hour (kn:' /.h). Turn 
the ignition switch to the ON or ACC P?Sitlon. The 
numerals 188 initially light up for approximately two 
seconds then turn off for approximately ~o ~econds 
indicating the display segments are fun~tlonmg cor­rectly. 
The vehicle speed will then be displayed. 
To select kilometers per hour on the speedometer, 
press the "km/h-MPH" on the message center key­board 
and release. To select the MPH mode, press 
the "km/h-MPH" button again. The speedometer has 
a maximum reading of 85 mph (137 km/h). 
ODOMETERS 
The odometer indicates the total distanc~ the _vehicle 
has been driven. The odometer reads m mile~ for 
U.S. vehicles and kilometers for Canadian vehicles. 
Trip Odometer 
The trip odometer is in the conventional instrument 
cluster. A reset knob returns the numbers to zero. 
when pulled. 
25
INSTRUMENTATION 
ELECTRONIC MESSAGE CENTER 
T~~ Electr?nic Message Center display provides you 
wrt a varrety of features including: 
• Distance to Empty 
• Vehicle Condition Check Out 
• Clock 
• Average/Instantaneous Fuel Economy 
• Traveled Distance 
• Elapsed Time 
• Average Speed 
• Distance to Destination 
• Estimated Time of Arrival 
KEYBOARD 
TRIP LOG 
. I 
§... "~'G~l~ nrr~.1 I ,~...~., rQ.--[~ ;;IQJQJEJ 
These features are con!rolled by the 12 keyboard 
~ushbu~ons. The operatron of the individual button 
rs descrrbed below. s 
26 
r:=1 
~ 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Converts units of measurement displayed from Met­ric 
to English and back with each press. Controls 
speedometer and Message Center. 
Displays distance to travel, based on driving condi­tions, 
before fuel tank is empty. Unless ignition is 
turned off during refueling, display will not reflect the 
addition of fuel for a few miles. If battery is discon­nected 
temporarily, the DTE display will reference 
the factory pre-set fuel economy number until a new 
average distance per gallon can be determined. The 
DTE measurement is designed so the vehicle will not 
run out of gas before the DTE reads 0 miles. 
Checks out the following eleven conditions and indi­cates 
any problems: Door Ajar, Trunk Ajar, Charge 
System, Oil Pressure, Engine Temp., Miles to Empty, 
Washer Fluid, Brake Pressure, Head Lamps, Tail 
Lamps, and Brake Lamps. 
27
f- 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Displays the clock, if not already displayed. 
Clock Set Procedure 
• Press RESET button 
• Press CLOCK button. Hours will flash 
• Press ADV button to advance to correct hour and 
AM or PM indication 
• Press CLOCK button to select minutes portion. 
Minutes will flash 
• Press ADV button to advance to correct minute 
Follow the same procedure using the CLOCK button 
to select day, month, and date portions and use the 
ADV button to advance the portions to the desired 
setting. To complete the setting of the clock, press 
the RESET button. 
Resetting the clock will be needed if vehicle battery 
power is disconnected or if clock "memory" is dis­rupted 
by electrical disturbances such as from jump 
starting, lightning, or exposure to high power radio 
transmitters. 
28 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Once a function of the clock is selected by the RESET 
and clock buttons, the ADV button is pressed to ad­vance 
the clock function to the correct reading. 
I 
Displays the vehicle fuel economy in miles per gallon 
(or liters per 100 kilometers). 
Average fuel economy is displayed first for five sec­onds 
and then instantaneous fuel economy is 
displayed. To reset, press RESET once, then F/ECON 
once. 
NOTE - The average fuel economy you calculate­dividing 
miles traveled by gallons used - may differ 
from the Average Fuel Economy displayed because: 
• Your vehicle not being perfectly level during fill-up 
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the 
gasoline pumps at service stations 
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to 
another 
The Message Center calculations are not affected by 
any variations in fuel fill-up. Therefore, the Average 
Fuel Economy displayed may not precisely agree 
with your calculations. 
29
INSTRUMENTATION 
Displays the distance traveled since it was last reset, 
thus functioning as trip odometer. Max reading is 
9999.9. To reset to zero at the beginning of a trip, 
press RESET once and then DIST once. 
Displays elapsed time in hours, minutes and seconds 
since last reset. To reset elapsed time to zero, press 
RESET once, then press EffiME once. The elapsed 
time will continue to count even though the engine is 
off. 
Displays average speed based on distance traveled 
and the time to travel that distance, including time 
when vehicle is stopped or engine is turned off. To 
reset average speed, press RESET once and then AV 
SPD once. The display will then show the present 
speed. The average speed feature is not affected by 
the individual resetting of elapsed time or elapsed 
distance. 
30 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Displays miles (kilometers) remaining to a preset 
destination. To enter the distance you plan on travel­ing, 
press RESET once and then DEST. Display will 
read 0. With the numbered buttons on the keyboard, 
enter the distance to your destination, reading from 
left to right. Press RESET again and "DEST SET" will 
appear. Press DEST at any time during your trip to 
see the remaining distance to your destination. 
Displays the current time-of-day and the time-of-day 
you'll arrive at the destination you previously entered 
with the OEST button, assuming you travel at the re­cent 
vehicle speed and that the clock is correctly set. 
31
INSTRUMENTATION 
If your ETA is greater than 24 hours from the present 
time, or you are past your destination, dashes will 
appear in the display. 
If your average speed is less than 25 mph (40km/ h) 
ETA is based on average speed or actual vehicle 
speed, whichever is greater. If your average speed is 
greater than 25 mph, ETA will be based on vehicle 
speed or 25 mph, whichever is greater. An asterisk 
(*) is displayed whenever the ETA is NOT based on 
vehicle speed. 
I RESET I 
Used to reset keys 3/CLOCK, 5/F/ECON, 6/DIST, 7/E/ 
TIME, 8/AV SPD, and 9/DEST. To reset an individual 
function, press RESET and then the desired key. To 
reset the entire trip log (buttons numbered 5-9) si­multaneously, 
press RESET twice and then set DEST 
as described above. 
32 
INSTRUMENTATION 
LIGHT CONTROLS 
Headlamps/Dome/lnstrument/Parking Lamps 
Manual Operation 
HEADLAMP SWITCH-MANUAL OPERATION 
BRIGHTNESS OF INSTRUMENT PANEL LAMPS IS CONTROLLED 
BY ROTATING KNOB AS SHOWN. DOME LAMP AND OTHER 
INTERIOR LAMPS ARE TURNED ON BY ROTATING FULLY 
COUNTERCLOCKWISE 
INTE:~~:H' _ ~.- . -' DIM 
LAMPS ON  ."'9:r·---..:=::::::~ 
/<~:~ LAMPS 
./-- .::'( OFF } I PULL KNOB OUT TO THIS POSITION 
TO TURN ON PARKING, SIDE MARKER 
AND INSTRUMENT PANEL LAMP 
PULL KNOB OUT TO THIS POSITION 
TO TURN ON THE HEADLAMPS, PARKING, 
SIDE MARKER, AND INSTRUMENT PANEL 
LAMPS 
33
INSTRUMENTATION 
Headlamp Convenience System 
r~;:;.D LIGHTS ~-= 
OF{jF~IN 
AUTO OIM 
DELAY RANGE 
MAX MAX 
The .Headlamp Convenience Group contains an auto­matic 
headlamp dimmer and Autolamp ON/OFF 
delay system. 
AUTOM~TIC DIMMER OPERATION- To use your 
automatic headlamp dimmer, turn your h.eadlamps 
on and move the flag dial away from MIN and into 
DIM ~ANGE area, then pull part way towards you on 
the d1mmer/turn signal lever. If the high beam 
(.brig~t lights) come on and the high b'eam indicate~ 
fight IS on, the unit is in the automatic position and 
you can release the dimmer/turn signal lever. 
If the high be~ms do not come on, pull all the way 
?ack on the d1mmer/turn signal lever to put the unit 
rn the automatic position. 
~nee you have turned on your automatic headlamp 
d1mmer, your headlamps will switch to low beam at 
the proper dist~nce from an approaching vehicle. 
The h~adlamp d1mmer will restrict your lights to low 
b~am 1n adequately lighted areas, but will switch to 
h1gh beam whenever driving conditions necessitate. 
34 
INSTRUMENTATION 
To temporarily switch to high beams for signaling 
oncoming traffic, pull back part way on the turn sig­nal 
lever. The high beams will stay on as long as you 
hold the turn signal lever part way back. 
Use the automatic dimmer range control, which is I concentric with the main light switch, to set the dis­tance 
at which your headlamps go from high to low 
beam. For normal driving conditions, set the control 
with its pointer at the midpoint of the adjustment 
range. 
If you prefer your lights to dim at a farther distance 
from oncoming vehicles, turn the control clockwise. 
If you want your lights to dim when oncoming vehi­cles 
are nearer to you, turn the control 
counterclockwise. 
There are two ways you can turn your automatic 
headlamp dimmer off. If you pull all the way back on 
the turn signal lever then release it, you will lock in 
the low beam lights, thus turning off the headlamp 
dimmer. You can also rotate the auto dimmer control 
to the MIN position to turn the headlamp dimmer off. 
To keep your automatic headlamp dimmer operating 
properly, clea.n the sensor lens periodically with a 
soft cloth. The lens is located under the hood behind 
the grille on the driver's side. Raise the flexible lip of 
the plastic sensor chamber to gain access to the sen­sor 
lens. 
AUTOLAMP OPERATION- This system allows you 
to set the headlamps to automatically: 
• Turn ON during darkness, OFF during daylight 
• Stay on up to approximately three minutes after 
leaving the vehicle with the ignition OFF 
The system operates with the manual light switch 
OFF and the ignition switch ON. 
35
INSTRUMENTATION 
To turn the system on, move the flag dial, located 
behind the headlamp switch knob, from OFF into the 
DELAY range. The farther you turn the dial in the DE­LAY 
range, the longer the head lamps will stay on 
after you have left the vehicle. 
Once in the DELAY range, the headlamps are con­trolled 
by a photocell located in the top left-hand side 
of the instrument panel. Do not place any items in 
this area which would block light to the photocell or 
your lights may operate in the daytime if the system 
is turned on. 
You can override the automatic ON/OFF operation by 
pulling the manual headlamp switch to the ON posi­tion. 
•To turn off both operations, turn the flag dial 
back to the· OFF position. If you forget to turn off the 
headlamp switch, a warning chime will sound.when 
you· open the driver's door. 
Coach Lamp 
A coach lamp is mounted on the exterior of the cen­ter 
pillar. The lamp comes on when the head lamps 
and marker lamps are turned on. 
Illuminated Entry System 
This system will provide illumination of both front 
door lock cylinders and the vehicle's interior courtesy 
lights, when either outside front door handle is 
pulled or when any· button of the optional Keyless 
Entry System is pushed. The system will automatical­ly 
turn off after approximately 25 seconds, or when 
the ignition lock cylinder is turned to ON or ACC 
position. 
NOTE- The illuminated entry timer will not turn off 
the courtesy lamp if that lamp has been turned on 
manually ·or by the door switch. 
36 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Occasionally, it will be necessary to clean the lens of 
the door lock assembly. Use Ford Multi-Purpose 
Cleaner Concentrate, a mild soap, or household am­monia 
and water solution. Apply with a soft cloth or 
cotton swab, followed by a clear water rinse. 
High Mount Stoplamp 
A third stoplamp is mounted on the rear window 
ledge at the center line of the rear window. This high 
mount stoplamp is activated when the brakes are ap­plied. 
For cleaning and bulb replacement ~rocedur~s 
refer to the Servicing Your Vehicle sect1on of th1s 
guide. 
Should the lens become contaminated with oil or 
grease, clean with Ford Tar and Road Oil Remover or 
equivalent. Apply solvent sparingly. Do not use abra­sive 
cleaning preparations and other solvents such 
as benzene, gasoline, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, 
or denatured alcohol. 
37 
I
INSTRUMENTATION 
Hazard Warning Flasher System 
INSTRUMENT PANEL 
-Pull to turn on 
-Push to turn off 
The hazard warning flasher system serves as a warn­ing 
to other drivers to exercise extreme caution in 
approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle. 
The flashers will operate with the brake pedal 
pressed. 
The flashers can be used with the ignition switch in 
any position. The lights will flash continuously for 
two hours (battery fully charged and in good condi­tion) 
without discharging the battery excessively. 
Map Lights and Reading Lights 
MAP LIGHT MAP LIGHT 
38 
INSTRUMENTATION 
These map lights, located on each side of the dome 
lamp, can be turned on by a switch located between 
the dome lamp and the map light. 
Your vehicle is also equipped with two reading lights 
in the rear pillar. The switches for these lights are 
above the rear armrests. The ignition switch must be 
in the ON or ACC position for switches to operate. 
Checking and Cleaning Lights 
It's a good safety practice to check your headlamps, 
taillamps, brake stoplamps, turn signals, side mark­ers, 
license plate lamp, and hazard flasher system 
each day. 
Dirty lights reduce night vision distances and oncom­ing 
drivers can't see your vehicle as soon. Keep all 
your lamps clean at all times. 
Check the headlamp alignment if oncoming 
motorists frequently signal when you are already 
using your low beams, if the high beams are pointed 
substantially away from the straight ahead position, 
or if the headlamp illumination seems inadequate. 
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS 
Dimmer/Flash-To-Pass/Turn Signal Switch 
LEFT 
TURN 
SIGNAL 
DIMMER/ 
FLASH·TO·PASS 
~ 
39
INSTRUMENTATION 
DIMMER SWITCH - To change your headlamps 
from low to high beam or high to low beam pull the 
lever all the way towards you, until it latches, and 
release. An indicator light in the instrument panel 
will glow when the headlamps are operating on high 
beam. 
FLASH-TO-PASS SWITCH- Momentarily turns on 
the headlamp high beams when moved and held to­ward 
driver. (Activates with headlamp switch on or 
off.) The high beam indicator light on the instrument 
panel will also illuminate. 
TURN SIGNALS -To signal for a left turn, pull the 
lever down until it is held in position. To signal for a 
right turn, push the lever up. When you signal for a 
turn, the front turn signal lamp, the rear brake light 
and the indicator light on the instrument panel will 
flash on and off, indicating the direction of your turn. 
If the indicator continues to flash after making a turn, 
manually return the lever to center position. 
When you want to change lanes, you can flash your 
turn indicators without putting the lever in the "hold" 
position by moving the lever either up or down until 
the indicator flashes. When you release the lever it 
will return to the center position. 
If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does 
not illuminate or remains on continuously, rather 
than flashing, when you signal a turn, the signaling 
system is malfunctioning. Have this condition cor­rected 
as soon as possible, making sure in the mean­time 
that you use the accepted hand signals. 
CORNERING LAMPS- Your vehicle is equipped 
with cornering lamps that illuminate when either turn 
signal is activated, depending on the direction you 
are turning. 
HORN - Your vehicle is equipped with the horn on 
the steering wheel center pad; push pad to sound 
horn. Check the horn regularly for proper operation. 
40 
INSTRUMENTATION 
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 
Interval System 
Ftrst position upward 
INTERVAL, second posttion 
upward LOW, third position 
HIGH. 
IgnitiOn ON or ACC. 
To operate the interval wiper and washer system, the 
ignition key must be in the ON or ACC position. The 
wiper and washer controls are located on a lever 
mounted to the left side of the steering column. 
Washer Operation 
The washers will operate when the lever is in any 
position. When the lever is in the OFF or INTERVAL 
position, the wipers will cycle two or three times at 
low speed after the lever has been released, then re­turn 
to the OFF or INTERVAL mode. 
WARNING- Do not use the washers in freez­ing 
weather without first warming the 
windshield with the defrosters, otherwise the 
washer solution may freeze on the windshield 
and obscure your vision. 
41 
I
INSTRUMENTATION 
CAUTION - Do not operate the windshield washer 
when the fluid level is empty to prevent possible 
damage to the washer system. 
Windshield Wiper Blade Maintenance 
CAUTION - Commercial hot waxes applied by auto­matic 
car washes have been known to affect the 
ability of the wipers to clean the windshield. 
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper 
blades with foreign matter can reduce the effective­ness 
of the windshield wi pers. Common sources of 
contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax 
treatments used by some commercial car washes. If 
the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the 
windshield and the blade rubber with undiluted Ford 
Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate, an 
equivalent cleaner, or mild detergent and rinse thor­oughly 
with clear water. Repeat if necessary. 
CAUTION-To prevent damage to wiper blades, .do 
not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other 
solvents on or near the wiper blades. 
To access the blades easily, place the wiper switch in 
the "Low" speed position and the ignition switch in 
the "Accessory" position. When the wiper blades are 
approximately vertical on the windshield, turn the ig­nition 
switch to "OFF." 
CAUTION - To prevent damage to the wiper arms 
or other components, do not attempt to move the 
wipers manually. 
42 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Refilling Windshield Washer Reservoir 
WASHER 
RESERVOIR 
TOFRONT " 
OF VEHICLE 
TYPICAL COMBINED COOLANT 
RECOVERY/WINDSHIELD WASHER 
FLUID RESERVOIR 
Periodically, or when the optional warning light indi­cates 
low fluid, check the fluid level in the reservoir 
located in the engine compartment. When it is low, 
fill the reservoir with a solution of water ahd Ford 
Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate or equiv­alent. 
In addition to removing grime, most wind­shield 
washer solvents contain additives to reduce 
the freezing point of the solution, when used accord­ing 
to directions. 
For vehicles equipped with Electronic Instrument 
Cluster, the low washer warning light will flash for 4 
seconds only. The light will remain off after the first 
warning until the ignition is turned OFF and then 
back ON. 
43 
I
I 
INSTRUMENTATION 
WARNING - Do not use radiator coolant or 
antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. 
Radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer 
reservoir can severely affect visibility when 
sprayed on the windshield. 
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS 
TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER 
(Regulates temperature inside vehicle) 
I 
REAR WINDOW 
OEFROER 
FUNCT;O~ONTROL LEVER 
FAN SWITCH 
(Selects where air •s directed through-Floor 
ducts, defroster ducts, registers, or a 
combinatio.n of these.) 
(Selects fan speed 
or auto mode) 
For best performance, remove any snow, ice or 
leaves from the air intake below the windshield on 
the outside of the vehicle. Do not place articles under 
the front seats that will obstruct air. flow to the rear 
seats. 
44 
INSTRUMENTATION 
Automatic Climate Control (ACC) System 
To operate the ACC system, position the temperature 
control at the desired numerical temperature setting 
and place the function control in the position desired 
(usually PANEL, HI-LO, FLOOR or MIX). The system I will then automatically regulate discharge air tem­perature 
to maintain the selected temperature inside 
your vehicle. It is not necessary, nor advised, to 
move the temperature selector to the extreme posi-tions 
(65 or 85) to achieve comfort. Optimum per­formance 
will be achieved in the 72 to 77 range with 
only slight changes due to seasonal or other weather 
conditions (sun, load, humidity). 
The air conditioning compressor will operate in all 
positions except OFF, VENT, and FLOOR, if the out­side 
temperature is warmer than approximately 
40-45 degrees F (4-6 degrees C). 
The fan speed is ·controlled automatically in the 
AUTO position or may be set manually ·for more or 
less air if· desired. 
HEATING- Move the function control to FLOOR. Air 
will be directed through the floor ducts, with a small 
amount going through the defrosters. In FLOOR, the 
automatic climate control system blower fan will 
start when the engine warms enough to provide 
heat. At freezing temperature this can take more than 
four minutes. In all other functions except OFF, the 
system blower fan will start immediately, regardless 
of engine temperature. 
In HI-LO, the system operates for heating but is not 
as economical because the air conditioning com­pressor 
operates in this function when required. 
In the MIX position, air is directed through the de­froster 
nozzle and floor ducts to assist in keeping the 
windshield and side windows clear and also provide 
heat to the floor. 
45
INSTRUMENTATION 
DEFROSTING-To defrost the windshield, move the 
function control to DEFROST. For maximum effect, 
set the fan to HI. Air will be directed to the defroster 
outlets with a small amount directed through the 
floor ducts. 
NOTE- To maintain heating at the floor level while 
providing windshield defrosting or defogging during 
extreme cold or humidity conditions, move the func­tion 
control to MIX. This provides approximately 
equal airflow to the windshield and floor outlets. 
To help prevent fog from forming on the windshield 
and side windows in humid weather, place the sys­tem 
in the defrost position prior to starting the en­gine. 
Avoid driving with the system in the OFF 
position to prevent humidity build up inside the 
vehicle. 
DEFOGGING SIDE WINDOWS- Set the function 
control lever to PANEL, MIX, or HI-LO. Direct the side 
registers toward the windows and close the center 
registers. 
COOLING - Move the function control lever to PAN­EL. 
Adjust the direction of airflow by tilting the 
registers or moving the louvers. 
In HI-LO position the system operates for cooling as 
it does in PANEL position except the airflow is split 
between the panel registers and floor ducts. Use the 
PANEL position for maximum cooling and initial 
cooling of a hot vehicle interior. 
The VENT position brings outside air through the 
registers and is more economical than using A/C 
positions. 
If your vehicle has been parked with the windows 
clossd during hot weather, drive for a few minutes 
with the windows open and the air conditioner on. 
This forces most of the warm air out of the vehicle. 
46 
INSTRUMENTATION 
When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in 
hot weather, latch the gearshift selector in P (PARK) 
to increase the engine idle speed. This aids in engine 
cooling and air conditioner efficiency. If the engine 
overheats, move the function control to VENT to stop 
the compressor and increase the engine speed for a ·1 short time. 
During some air conditioning operating conditions, 
slight engine surging may be rroticed. This should be 
considered normal, as the system is designed to cy­cle 
the compressor on and off to maintain desired 
cooling. The reduced compressor operation should 
benefit fuel economy. 
Since the air conditioner removes considerable 
moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if 
water drips on the pavement under the air condi­tioner 
drain after you have stopped the vehicle. 
Defroster Group 
CONTROL SWITCH- Push up and release 
to turn on. Push down and release to turn off. 
INDICATOR LIGHT -Glows when rear defroster Is on 
47
INSTRUMENTATION 
The defroster group includes an electric rear window 
defroster and heated outside rear view mirrors. The 
control switch for the defroster is located on the in­strument 
panel, to the right of the A/C control. Start 
the engine before operating defroster. If there is a 
heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, 
brush it off. The defroster timer automatically turns 
off the defroster after approximately 10 minutes of 
operation. If more defrost is required, the defroster 
can be reactivated for another 10 minutes by pushing 
the control switch to ON. 
To prevent damage to the conductors, which are 
bonded to the interior surface of the rear window, 
never use sharp instruments or window cleaners 
containing abrasives to clean the interior surface of 
your rear window. 
48 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Occupant Restraint Systems ............ .. 50 
Front-Lap Shoulder Belts .. . . . .. . . .. ...... 50 
Center Front and Center Rear Lap Belts . . . . 53 
Rear Lap Belts with Retractors .... ........ 53 
Seat Belt Extension Assembly . .. .... . . . . .. 54 
Seat Belt Maintenance . .. ... .. . ...... . .. . 54 
Infant and Child Restraints .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . 55 I 
Seats and Controls ....... . . .. .... . .. . . . . . 62 
Manual Passenger Seat . . . ... . ..... .. ... . 6 2 
Power Seat .... .. . . . . . .. . . . ... ...... ... . 6 2 
Reclining Front Seats . .. . . . .... . .. . . .. ... 63 
Mirrors .. . ..................... . .... . ..... 63 
Rear View ........... . . ..... .. .......... 63 
Outside Mirrors .... .. ...... .. ... .. . ...... 66 
Convex . . ........ . .. . .......... .. ... .... 67 
Illuminated Visor ...... . .... .. .... .... .. . . 6 7 
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 
Tilt Steering Wheel ..................... .. 68 
Power . . ................. .. ....... . ..... . 69 
Brakes . ... ..................... . .. . ...... 69 
Stopping Distance ............... . ..... .. 69 
Foot Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 0 
Parking .. ......... . ............ .. .... . .. 71 
Automatic Parking Brake Release . . . . . . . . . . 7 2 
Automatic Load Leveling Suspension 
System . . ............... ... ............. 73 
49
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 
WARNING - Be sure to LOCK ALL DOORS be­fore 
driving away. Locking the doors, along 
with using the safety belts provided, will mini­mize 
the risk of injury or ejection in an 
accident. 
Ford Motor Company recommends that you always 
"buckle up". In some areas restraint system use is 
required by law. 
WARNING - All vehicle occupants should 
wear their seat belts for maximum protection 
in the event of a collision. 
According to accident statistics, properly re­strained 
children are safer in the rear seat than 
in the front seat. 
For young children; infant and child restraints 
should be obtained and used in accordance 
with the instructions provided by the manufac­turer 
of the infant and child restraint. See In­fant 
and Child Restraints. In some areas, child 
restraint use is required by law. 
Front Lap-Shoulder Belts 
The belt system allows freedom of movement, lock­ing 
tight only on hard braking or impacts of 
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The system 
cannot be made to lock by jerking on the belt. 
After entering your vehicle, close the door and adjust 
the front seat to obtain the best position for your 
driving comfort, access to controls, and visibility. 
Then pull the lap-shoulder belt from the retractor so 
the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoul­der 
and chest and insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. 
50 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten 
the lap portion to a snug fit. Be sure the belt is as 
low on your hip~ as possible. If the shoulder belt is 
uncomfortably tight, a comfort regulator is provided 
in the shoulder belt retractor to reduce belt pressure 
against your chest. The shoulder belt can be ad­justed 
much like a window shade to maintain a small 
amount of slack in the belt. The adjacent door must 
be closed to use this comfort regulator feature. 
Adjustment Procedure 
To set the comfort regulator, the shoulder belt ini­tially 
should be positioned snugly against the chest. 
If the belt is not positioned snugly, the comfort reg­ulator 
may already be engaged. Disengagement is 
accomplished by the following procedure: 
Figure A - Pull the shoulder belt outward 4 or 5 
inches (10 to 13 em), then release it and allow belt to 
fully retract. Repeat procedure if belt is not snug to 
the chest. 
Figure B- Now the belt tension may be adjusted by 
pulling down slightly on the shoulder belt and re­leasing. 
The least amount of slack needed to re lieve 
tension, but not more than 1 1/2 inches (3.8 em), 
should be pulled out when using the comfort reg­ulator 
system. 
51 
I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
• If the desired setting is not achieved or excess 
slack develops as you change seat position, repeat 
the above procedure. 
• When the door is opened, the comfort regulator 
will release automatically, permitting the lap­shoulder 
belt to retract. After unbuckling the belt it 
is recommended that you guide the tongue during 
retraction to prevent it from striking you or the 
vehicle. 
52 
WARNING - Never allow more than 1-1/2 
inches (3.8 em) of slack to be introduced into 
your seat belt system because the belt locks 
upon impact where it is positioned. Wearing 
the belt too loose will negate any real safety 
protection. Use the shoulder belt on the 
outside shoulder only. Never wear the 
shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it 
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 
Never use a single belt for more than one per­son. 
Be sure the lap portion of the belt is fit­ted 
snugly and as low as possible around the 
hips, not on the waist. Failure to follow these 
precautions could increase the chance and/or 
severity of injury in an accident. 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Center Front and Center Rear Lap Belts 
Because the center lap belts do not have retractors, 
they should be shortened and fastened when not in 
use. To lengthen the belt, tip the tongue at a right 
angle to the belt, and pull the belt over your lap until 
the tongue reaches the buckle. 
To fasten the belt, insert the tongue into the open 
end of the proper buckle until you hear a snap and I feel the latch engage. Then pull on the loose end of 
the webbing to snug the belt. The belt should be 
snug and as low as possible around the hips, never 
around the waist. 
Rear Lap Belts with Retractors 
Pull the belt out of the retractor with a steady motion 
and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a 
snap and feel the latch engage. 
WARNING - Be sure the lap belt is fitted 
snugly and as low as possible around the hips, 
not around the waist. Failure to do so may in­crease 
the chance of injury in the event of a 
collision. 
If you should jam the lap belt retractor by allowing 
the belt to retract when it is twisted, you can free the 
webbing with this procedure: 
• Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten it on the 
retractor spool. 
• Feed the belt back into the retractor until it is com­pletely 
retracted. Repeat previous step if 
necessary. 
• Pull the belt out of the retractor as far as it will go. 
Remove any foreign matter or untwist the belt as 
necessary and let the belt retract. 
• Extend and retract the belt about five times to 
make sure the belt retractor operates properly. 
53
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Unfastening Seat Belts 
Push the release button in the buckle and allow the 
belts to unlatch. 
Seat Belt Extension Assembly 
A seat belt assembly that is too short even when fully 
extended can be lengthened approximately eight 
inches (20 em.) with a seat belt extension assembly 
(54611C22) available from your dealer. 
WARNING - To ensure that the seat belt ex­tension 
assembly will hold in the event of a 
collision, only seat belt extensions manufac­tured 
by the same supplier as the seat belt 
should be used. 
Seat Belt Maintenance 
Seat belt assemblies should be periodically inspected 
to assure that they have not become damaged and 
that they remain in proper operating condition, par­ticularly 
if they have been subjected to severe stress. 
54 
WARNING -All seat belt assemblies including 
retractors and attaching hardware should be 
inspected after any collision. Ford recom­mends 
that all seat belt assemblies in use dur­ing 
a collision be replaced unless the collision 
was minor and the belts show no damage and 
continue to operate properly. Seat belt assem­blies 
not in use during a collision should also 
be inspected and replaced if either damage or 
improper operation is noted. 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Infant and Child Restraints 
WARNING - For maximum protection in the 
event of a collision or sudden stop, always 
protect the infant and child occupants of your 
vehicle with an infant or child safety seat de­signed 
especially for them and which con­forms 
to applicable motor vehicle safety 
standards. Do not permit children to sit where 
they cannot be properly restrained. 
If infant and child safety seats are not installed 
and used correctly, they may not provide the 
protection they were designed to provide. Be 
sure to read and follow carefully all of the 
installation and use instructions, and obey all 
warnings supplied with the infant and child 
safety seats. 
The following test should be performed after 
properly installing an infant or child safety 
seat in a front or rear center seating position 
equipped with a manually adjustable lap belt. 
Before placing the child in the infant or child 
seat. tighten lap belt, forcibly tilt the infant or 
child seat from side to side, and also tug it 
forward, to see if the lap belt holds it securely 
in place. If belt slippage occurs, the infant or 
child seat should be properly installed in a dif­ferent 
seating position. If the new position is 
another center seating position, the test pro­cedure 
should be repeated. 
Do not use the type of infant or child seat that 
attaches to a seatback, because the seatback 
may not support the load in the event of a 
collision. 
Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. 
55 
I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
SEATING POSITIONS WITH 
LAP-SHOULDER SEAT BELTS 
-FRONT OF VEHICLE- - FRONT OF VEHICLE__.,. 
FORD INFANT CARRIER FORD TOT -GUARD 
56 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
SEATING POSITIONS WITH 
LAP SEAT BELTS ONLY 
.,._FRONT OF VEHICL£- - FRONT OF VEHICLE-FORO 
INFANT CARRIER FORD TOT ·GUARD 
57 
I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
A child should never be allowed to ride 
unrestrained. The Ford Infant Carrier and Ford Tot­Guard 
are available from your dealer and may be 
ordered directly from Ford Motor Company. Both 
accessory units are secured by vehicle lap belts or 
lap-shoulder belts and do not rely on the seatback 
for their support. These child safety seats are for 
use only in forward facing vehicle seats equipped 
with a seat belt. 
The Ford Infant Carrier is for infants up to 20 pounds 
(9 kg) in weight - until approximately one year of 
age. It faces rearward for best protection. 
The Tot-Guard is designed for use by children who 
weigh between 20 and 50 pounds (9 and 23 kg), 
whose seating height is between 19 and 28 inches 
(48 and 71 em). To order the Infant Carrier and/or 
Tot-Guard see the order form in the back of this 
guide. (The Tot-Guard is not available in Canada.) 
When the Ford Tot-Guard or Ford Infant Carrier is 
used in the front right seat with a lap-shoulder belt 
system, the lap and shoulder belt should be posi­tioned 
as shown in the illustration. These 
instructions apply ONLY to the Ford Tot-Guard and 
Ford Infant Carrier. Other infant or child restraint 
systems may require different belt placements or 
procedures. 
58 
WARNING - When using any infant or child 
restraint system it is important that you fol­low 
the instructions and warnings provided by 
the manufacturer concerning its installation 
and use. Failure to follow each of the restraint 
manufacturer's instructions could increase the 
chance or severity of an injury in the event of a 
collision or sudden stop. 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Should difficulty be experienced in buckling up the 
Infant Carrier or the Tot-Guard because the vehicle 
seat belt is too short even when fully extended, a 
seat belt extension assembly (54611C22) can be ob­tained 
from your dealer at no charge to provide ex­tra 
length. Do not use other extension assemblies. 
WARNING - To ensure that the seat belt 
extension assembly will hold in the event of a 
collision, only seat belt extensions manufac­tured 
by the same supplier as the seat belt 
should be used. 
For children having a seating height greater than 28 
inches (71 em), the maximum for use of the Tot­Guard, 
the lap belts in the rear seat of all models or 
in the center front seat of vehicles with center belts 
and without center console can be used. 
WARNING - Children should not be seated in 
the right front seat with or without an infant 
or child restraint unless they can be positioned 
so that the shoulder strap does not contact or 
remain in front of the face, chin, neck or 
throat. Failure to follow this precaution can 
Increase the risk or severity of injury in the 
event of a collision. 
Tether Attachment Locations for Installation 
Some child safety seats provide a tether strap which 
goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches 
to an anchorage in the floor or panel behind the 
rear seat. (The Ford Infant Carrier and the Ford Tot­Guard 
do not require a top tether strap.) Attachment 
holes or weld nuts (on each side) have been 
provided in your vehicle to attach the anchor hard­ware 
supplied with the safety seat, if required. 
59
I 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Instructions for Locating Tether Attachment(s) 
1. From inside the luggage compartment looking 
underneath the metal panel structure behind the 
rear seat, locate one of the two existing .35 inch 
(9mm) holes identified by the letter "T". Each 
hole is located approximately 13.0 inches (33cm) 
outboard from the centerline of the vehicle and 
along a line 2.25 inches (5.7cm) rearward from 
the center of the rear seat speaker. 
2. Pierce a small .35 inch (9.0mm) hole upwards 
through the flat area of the trim panel behind the 
rear seat. Exercise caution to prevent hitting the 
rear window glass as it could shatter. 
WARNING - An assistant must be inside the 
vehicle holding the .flat rear seat trim panel 
down to prevent it from being dislodged. 
They must also avoid holding it down in the 
area that the hole is being pierced to avoid 
hand or arm injury. 
EXISTING .35 1NCH (9 mm) TETHER HOLE IN METAL PANEL 
STRUCTURE (BEHIND THE REAR SEAn MARKED BY THE 
LETTER "T" STAMPED IN PANEL NEXT TO HOLE 
NOTE. VIEW FROM INSIDE 
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT. 
PASSENGER SIDE SHOWN­DRIVER 
SIDE TYPICAL 
60 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
3. From inside the vehicle enlarge the hole in the 
trim panel until the anchor bolt supplied by the 
restraint manufacturer fits. 
4. Install the top tether anchor hardware in accor­dance 
with the restraint manufacturer's instruc­tions. 
It is important that the anchor bolt be 
securely tightened. 
Head Restraints 
WARNING - Adjust the head restraints so 
that it is just behind your head and never be­hind 
your neck to reduce the chance of injury 
in the event of a collision. 
Pivoting Head Restraints 
60" ROTATION 
POSSIBLE FROM 
NORMAL POSITION 
FULLY ROTATED 
POSITION 
VERTICAL 
ADJUSTMENT 
1 INCH (25 mm) 
/ 
SEATBACK 
61 
.I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
SEATS AND CONTROLS 
WARNING - Never adjust the driver's seat or 
the seatback while the vehicle is in motion to 
avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control 
and of personal injury. 
Manual Passenger Seat 
The seat adjustment lever is located at the front 
lower left part of the seat. Push the lever to the left 
to unlock the seat. Move the seat to the desired posi· 
tion and then release the lever to lock the seat in its 
new position. 
Power Seats 
~FRONT 
~OF 
SEAT 
The controls to operate the power seats are located 
on the front door armrests. The SEAT switch moves 
the seat forward, backward, up or down. The FRONT 
TILT switch moves the front of the seat up or down. 
The REAR TILT switch moves the rear of the seat up 
or down. 
62 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Reclining Front Seats 
RECLINER RELEASE HANDLE 
'-...,~ 
LIFT TO 
OPERATE 
Lift up and hold the recliner releas·e handle. Lean 
against the seatback to tilt it backwards or lean for­ward 
to bring it upright. When you have reached 
desired position release the handle. 
WARNING - To minimize risk of personal 
injury in the event of a collision or a sudden 
stop, both the driver's and the passenger's re­clining 
seatbacks must always be in a fairly 
upright position while the vehicle is in motion. 
The protection provided by the seat and 
shoulder belts may be significantly reduced 
when the seatback is reclined much beyond 
this position. 
MIRRORS 
Rear View Mirror 
Your inside rear view mirror has a day and a night 
position. The night position reduces glare from the 
headlights of vehicles behind you. Move the tab at 
the bottom of the mirror away from you for the day 
position and toward you for the night position. 
63 
I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Special double swivel mounting bracket allows 
movement to position mirror up or down and 
side to side. 
C .. ) TAB 
DAy -.._; NIGHT 
Grip mirror in center when 
making adjustment s. 
WARNING - Do not put objects on the flat 
area behind the rear seat, as they may obscure 
vision and could become dangerous projectiles 
in the event of a sudden stop or collision. 
Automatic Dimming Inside Rear View Mirror 
LED (GREEN) 
64 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
This mirror is equipped w ith two light sensors (pho­tocells) 
and will automaticall y change from the 
normal pqsition to the non-glare position when glare 
reaches the mirror. The sensor that detects rear 
glare is located on the lower right half of the mirror 
control panel. When glare reaches the mirror, the 
mirror will make a slight sound as it changes from 
the normal position to the non-glare position and a 
small green indicator will light. When the glare sub­sides, 
the mirror will return to the normal position 
after a short delay. 
For automatic operation, move the OFF/AUTO switch 
to the AUTO position. Then adjust the level of sen­sitivity 
of the mirror by turn ing the DISTANCE dial to 
any position between NEAR and FAR. FAR will be 
the most sensitive setting and bright headlights far 
away will cause the mirror to automatically switch. 
At the NEAR setting, bright headlights will have to be 
closer to you to switch the mirror. To f ind the most 
comfortable position, start at any position and turn 
the dial only one position in the desired direction. 
Then drive a while before adjusting it again. Large 
changes in the dial may be confusing until you be­come 
familiar with this mirror. 
The second light sensor, located on the front of the 
mirror case, measures the brightness of the light in 
front of your car. It automatically makes a correction 
in the glare trip level which you've selected on the 
dial. On a bright city street it will take a greater 
amount of glare to flip the mirror than on a dark 
country road. Try different settings until the most 
comfortable setting is reached. During the day you 
will not have to do anything to the mirror. It will 
automatically monitor for glare at night. 
The mirror may be turned off at any time (either in 
normal glare or non-glare position) and can be ad­justed 
by hand by slightly tipping the mirror up or 
down to change reflective surfaces. 
65
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
NOTE - When in the AUTO position, the mirror au­tomatically 
locks in the normal glare position 
whenever the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. This as­sures 
a bright, clear view in the mirror when backing 
up. 
Left and Right-Hand Electric Side View Mirrors 
Your vehicle is equipped with electric remote outside 
rear view mirrors. The switch for controlling their 
adjustment is located in the driver's left hand 
armrest. The same "joy stick" controls both LH and 
RH mirrors. To operate, first select the mirror to be 
adjusted by rotating th_, joy stick to the L or R posi­tion 
and then adjust the selected mirror with the joy 
stick. 
Mirror Thermometer 
The left hand (driver's) outside rear view mirror 
houses a dual scale (Fahrenheit/Celsius) ther­mometer. 
The thermometer becomes illuminated 
whenever the head lamp control knob is pulled. The 
thermometer lamp is also dimmed or brightened as 
the instrument panel lamp intensity is adjusted. 
Heated Mirror Feature 
Both mirrors become heated whenever the Electric 
Rear Window Defroster control is activated. Do not 
attempt to remove ice with a scraper as damage to 
the mirror may result. 
66 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Convex Mirror (Right Side) 
The right-hand side view mirror on your vehicle is 
convex. A convex mirror has a curved surface and 
will show a wider view of the lane next to and be­hind 
your vehicle. 
WARNING - All right hand mirrors are convex 
as noted on face of mirror. Objects seen in 
mirror are closer than they appear. The mirror 
should not be used to estimate relative dis­tances 
of following vehicles when changing 
lanes. 
Use your inside mirror (or glance rearward) to deter­mine 
the actual size and distance of objects that you 
view in the convex mirror. 
Dual Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors 
VANITY MIRROR 
VANITY MIRROR 
LIGHTS 
DRIVER'S VISOR 
To illuminate the visor vanity mirrors, pull down the 
visor and lift the mirror cover. To adjust the amount 
of light move the slide switch to the left to dim and 
to the right to brighten. 
67
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Cleaning Mirrors 
Do not clean your mirrors with a dry cloth or abra· 
sive materials. Use a soft cloth and mild detergent 
and water, or. Ford Glass Cleaner. Be careful when 
removing ice from outside mirrors because you may 
damage the reflective surface. 
CAUTION - Do not clean the plastic housing of the 
electric inside mirror with gasoline or other pe­troleum- 
based cleaning products. 
STEERING 
Tilt Steering Wheel 
PULL TO 
RELEASE 
To change the position of your steering wheel pull 
the tilt wheel release lever towards you. The 'lever 
will move with the wheel as you select the desired 
position. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 
Do not adjust while the vehicle is in motion. 
68 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Power Steering 
Power steering uses energy from your engine to as­sist 
you in steering the vehicle. When the engine is 
off, or if the power system becomes inoperative, the 
vehicle may still be steered manually, but requires 
increased driver effort. 
Should you notice any change in the effort required 
to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the 
power steering system checked. 
CAUTION - Never hold the steering wheel against 
the stops (extreme right or left turn) for more than 
five seconds. If you hold the wheel against the stops 
longer than five seconds, the power steering pump 
could be damaged. 
BRAKES 
Stopping Distance 
This information is furnished in accordance with the 
requirements of the Consumer Information Regula­tions 
of the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin­istration, 
United States Department of 
Transportation. 
The following figure indicates braking performance 
that can be met or exceeded by the vehicles to which 
it applies under different conditions of loading and 
with partial failures of the braking system. The infor­mation 
presented represents results obtainable by 
skilled drivers under controlled road and vehicle con­ditions, 
and the information may not be correct un­der 
other conditions. 
69
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Stopping Distances• 
Braking System 
(In feet (meters) from 60 mph 
(100Km/h) 
0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 
(0) (30) (61) (91) (122) (152) (183) 
Full Operational Service 
Brake 
{ 
Light ••• 194 (59) 
Load 
Maximum ~:::2~0;4~(6~2~) • 
Emergency Service Brakes ~ 456 (139) 
(With partial service brake 
system failure.) 
Brake Power Unit Failure 
Maximum Load 
(Appl icable only to vehicles 
•1111!1••••• 456 (139) 
equipped with power brakes.) 
'This table applies to all Ford Motor Company passenger vehicles. 
Foot Service Brakes 
Your vehicle has power front disc brakes and rear 
drum brakes. They adjust automatically through nor· 
mal usage. 
An occasional or intermittent brake squeal will not 
affect braking effectiveness. If squeal occurs continu· 
ously with every application, the brakes should be 
checked. 
After driving through water, gently apply the brakes 
several times as the vehicle is moving slowly in order 
to dry the brakes. 
70 
WARNING - Do not drive with your foot rest­ing 
on the brake pedal. This will result in 
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive 
lining wear and increased stopping distances. 
When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a 
lower gear and avoid continuous application of 
the brakes. Continuous application will cause 
the brakes to overheat, resulting in a tempo­rary 
loss of braking. 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Parking Brake 
WARNING - Do not use the gearshift selector 
in place of the parking brake. Always set the 
parking brake fully AND make sure the 
gearshift selector is securely latched in P 
(PARK). 
Turn off the ignition when you leave the vehi­cle, 
even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle 
unattended while the engine is running. 
Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle 
movement may occur if these precautions are 
not taken. 
The parking brake pedal is suspended above the toe­board 
at the extreme left of the foot service brake 
pedal. To set the parking brake, apply the foot service 
brake with your right foot and hold it while you apply 
the parking brake firmly and fully with your left foot. 
Always check the brake warning light each time you 
start the engine. This light will glow with the word 
BRAKE when the engine is running and your parking 
brake is set. 
WARNING - If the parking brake is released 
and the BRAKE light remains on, this is an indi­cation 
of a malfunction in the brake system. 
Immediate attention is necessary. 
CAUTION - Driving with the parking brake set will 
result in poor fuel economy and rapid rear brake 
wear. 
71 
I
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
AUTOMATIC PARKING BRAKE RELEASE 
UrrmglJgHJ [fRAKE RELEASE) MANUAL RELEASE 
LEVER-PULL TO 
RELEASE 
NOTE: AUTOMATIC 'ELEASE OPERATES 
ONLY IN @ (OVERDRIVE), D (DRIVE) 
AND 1 (LOW) POSITIONS. 
THE PARKING BRAKE WILL AUTOMATICALLY UN· 
LOCK WHEN THE GEARSHIFT SELECTOR IS MOVED 
TO ANY FORWARD GEAR WITH THE ENGINE 
RUNNING. 
The parking brake will not automatically release 
when the vehicle is shifted to the R (REVERSE) posi· 
tion. The parking brake can be released manually by 
pulling the handle located beneath the instrument 
panel. (See illustration.) 
72 
WARNING - To avoid personal injury when 
manually releasing the parking brake, make 
sure the gearshift selector is securely latched 
in P (PARK) and do not release the parking 
brake while outside the vehicle. 
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
Automatic load leveling Suspension System 
This system maintains the vehicle height at a con­stant 
level for most passenger, fuel, and trunk 
loading conditions. The system offsets changes in 
the vehicle load by automatically adding air to or re­leasing 
air from the load leveling rear shock absorb­ers. 
A small electric air compressor supplies air 
when required. The compressor is located in the en­gine 
compartment on the left-hand fender apron. 
NOTE - Normal vehicle operation does not require 
any action by the driver. 
Please refer to the trailer towing information section 
of this guide for special instructions regarding trailer 
towing with load leveling equipped vehicles. 
load leveling System - Manual Fill Procedure 
The automatic load leveling system will maintain the 
right vehicle attitude for all loaded and unloaded 
conditions up to Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). If 
your vehicle does not automatically level, the system 
can be filled manually by disconnecting the wire har­ness 
from the control module. Attach an air hose to 
the air valve on the compressor and inflate until the 
rear of the vehicle is level. 
The control module is located in the luggage com­partment 
behind the right-hand trim panel. 
CAUTION - If the manual fill does not raise the rear 
of the vehicle to a level condition within 10-15 sec­onds, 
or does not maintain a level condition after a 
manual fill, the air leveling system should receive 
immediate attention through an authorized dealer. 
Do not reconnect the wire harness to the control 
module. 
73
BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 
AND OPERATING 
MANUAL CONTROLMODULE FILL VAL/-- - 
' ............ VEHICLE 
Vehicle Break-In .. . ................ . . 76 
Economy ............................ 76 
~ •11111111 Instructions ...................... 7 8 
IIIIIIM Block Heater ...................... 80 ••at Fumes ........................... 80 
Vehicle Cranks But Does Not Start .. 81 
Pump Shutoff Switch ................ 81 
................................. 83 I 
Running Out of Fuel ...................... 82 
COMPRESSOR 
74 75
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN 
Your new vehicle does not need an extensive bra 
in. Try not to drive continuously at the same speed, 
as parts tend to adjust themselves better to 
parts if various speeds are used during the first 1001 
miles (1600 km). Approximately 100 miles (160 km)ol 
city driving or 1000 miles (1600 km) of highway dJiv. 
ing is required to break in a new set of brake linings 
fully. Repeated heavy stops should be avoided dur· 
ing this period. New vehicles should be driven 500 
miles (800 km) before towing a trailer. 
Don't add anti-friction compounds or special break-in 
oils during the first few thousand miles of operation 
since these additives may prevent piston ring seat· 
ing. See Engine Oil for information on oil usage. 
FUEL ECONOMY 
Accurate fuel economy normally cannot be deter· 
mined until a vehicle has been driven at least 1,000 
miles (1600 km) because fuel consumption is higher 
during the new vehicle "break-in" period. Therefore 
wait until a vehicle has consumed at least five fuN 
tanks of gasoline before calculating its fuel economy. 
To calculate fuel economy, divide the number of 
miles by the number of gallons of fuel used. In met· 
ric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 and d~ 
vide the answer by the number of kilometers 
traveled. This will give you the number of liters used 
per 100 kilometers, which is the normal method used 
to compare fuel economy in metric units. Do this for 
several tankfuls to obtain an average. 
Comparison with EPA Fuel Economy Estimates 
EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from labora· 
tory tests under simulated road conditions and thus 
are estimates which may not reflect the actual condi· 
tions you experience. The tests also do not exactly 
duplicate your personal style of driving, including all 
your stops, starts and lane changes. 
76 
n addition to your individual driving habits, opt!on~l 
equipment such as air conditioning can have a Slgntf­teant 
effect on fuel economy. Other factor~ th~t aff~ct 
fuel economy include vehicle load and tire mflatlon 
pressure. 
Improving Fuel Economy 
There are two important factors you can co~t.rol to 
Improve fuel economy: the n:'ec~anical condition of 
your vehicle and how you dnve lt. 
A well tuned, properly maintained vehicle ~ill deliver 
better fuel economy than a neglected v_ehlcle. T? _be 
sure that your vehicle is in top operatmg _condition 
for maximum fuel economy, follow the mamtenance 
schedule provided in the Maintenance Schedule and 
Record Log booklet. 
Your driving habits will have a si-gnifica~t influe~ce 
on the amount of fuel you use. By co~sclously thmk­mg 
about fuel economy and followmg these sug­gestions 
when you drive, you should be able to 
stretch your mileage: 
• Avoid changes in speed as much as possible. 
• Look ahead and anticipate changing traffic condi-tions. 
Sudden stops waste fuel. 
• Avoid long periods of idling. 
• Avoid fast acceleration. 
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake 
pedal. 
• Keep loads light. Avoid carrying unneeded items. 
• Keep tires inflated to the recommended pressures. 
I 
77
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
STARTING THE ENGINE 
Climate conditions and other factors play a large part 
in deciding how you should go about starting your 
vehicle. Read all the starting instructions carefully, so 
you'll be aware of these factors when you start your 
vehicle. 
WARNING - Before turning the key, make 
sure the parking brake has been set fully. Place 
the gearshift selector in P (PARK). 
After the engine starts, allow to idle for a few sec­onds. 
Hold foot on service brake, engage the 
transmission, and release parking brake. Gradually 
release the service brake and drive away in a normal 
manner. 
Elevated engine speeds (fast idle) are normal when 
the engine is started to allow for smooth engine op­eration 
during warm-up. These elevated engine 
speeds will cause the vehicle to move slightly faster 
when engaged in a drive gear than when the engine 
is at its normal warm engine idle speed. 
Cold Engine 
1. Be sure your headlights are off. This will reduce 
the electrical load on your battery and allow all 
the power to go to the starter motor. 
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 
3. Turn the key to start until engine starts. Release 
key as soon as engine begins to run - Do Not 
hold key in start position AFTER engine starts. Do 
Not depress accelerator pedal until engine is 
running. 
4. At temperatures below 32°F (0°C)-if engine fails 
to start in 10 seconds, turn key off, wait three or 
four seconds, then repeat procedure. 
78 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
5. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C)- if engine fails 
to start in four seconds, turn key off, wait th ree or 
four seconds, then repeat procedure. 
6. In subzero temperatures, the engine may require 
extended cranking times and several attempts to 
start. (Under continuous extreme cold overnight 
conditions, use of an engine block heater or 
garage is recommended.) 
CAUTION - Do not crank the starter continuously 
for more than 30 seconds at a time. Starter overheat 
and damage could result. If the engine fails to start 
or falters in starting, wait three or four seconds be­fore 
re-engaging the starter. If the engine is flooded, 
or fires intermittently, and fails to start during a 30· 
second cranking period, turn ignition key to OFF 
position, and wait two minutes before attempting to 
start the engine again. 
As soon as engine starts, release key from START 
position to avoid starter damage. 
CAUTION - Avoid extended or unnecessary idling. 
Extended idling of the engine (ten minutes or more), 
particularly at "high" engine speeds could produce 
excessive system temperatures that can damage 
your vehicle. 
Warm Engine 
1. Turn key to "start" until engine starts. Release 
key as soon as engine begins to run - Do Not 
hold key in start position after engine starts. Do 
Not depress accelerator pedal until engine is 
running. 
2. If the engine fails to start in four seconds, turn 
key off, wait three or four seconds, then repeat 
procedure. 
79
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
If Engine Fails to Start Using Preceding Instructions 
1. Press the pedal all the way to the floor and hold. 
2. Turn key to the START position. 
3. When engine starts, release key then release ped­al 
gradually as engine speeds up. 
Engine Block Heater 
The engine block heater is used to warm the engine 
coolant which improves starting, provides for faster 
engine warm-up, and results in quicker response 
from heater-defroster system. It is recommended for 
use whenever the outside temperature is 0°F or be­low 
( - 18°C or below). The heater is plugged into a 
grounded 110 volt outlet (household system) and 
each heater unit consumes between 400 and 600 
watts of power. For best results the heater should be 
plugged in at least three hours prior to starting. The 
use of the heater for longer periods of time will not 
cause the engine to exceed the thermostat setting. 
• Do not use with ungrounded electrical systems. 
• Do not use with two pronged (cheater) adapters. 
Exhaust Fumes 
WARNING - Never idle engine in closed areas. 
Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any 
extended amount of time with the engine run­ning. 
Exhaust gases, particularly carbon mon­oxide, 
may build up. These gases are harmful 
and potentially lethal. 
Carbon monoxide is colorless and odorless, but 
can be present with all other exhaust fumes. 
Therefore, if you ever smell exhaust fumes of 
any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected 
immediately by your dealer and have the con­dition 
corrected. Do not drive with exhaust 
fumes present. 
80 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
In order to guard against the possible entry of carbon 
monoxide into your vehicle, the exhaust system and 
body ventilation system should be properly i n­spected 
by a competent technician as follows: 
• Each time the vehicle is raised for service; 
• Whenever you detect a change in sounds from the 
exhaust system; 
• Whenever the vehicle has been damaged by im­pact 
with another vehicle, object and/or road 
obstruction. 
In order to afford proper ventilation, all air inlet vents I should be kept clean of snow, leaves, and other 
debris. 
If you run the engine while stopped (idle) in an un­confined 
area, open the windows at least one inch 
and adjust the heating or air conditioning to draw 
outside air into vehicle as follows: 
Set fan speed on medium or high with function con­trol 
lever in HEAT or DEFROST position and the 
temperature control lever at any desired position. 
IF YOUR VEHICLE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START 
Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch (EFI Engines Only) 
~our vehicle is equipped with an electronic fuel injec­tron 
system. It is also equipped with a switch that 
shuts off the electric fuel pump and fuel flow to the 
engine in the event of a major collision. The switch is 
located on the left-hand side of the luggage compart­ment 
mounted on the outboard side of the deck lid 
hinge support. Once the switch is triggered (i.e. white 
reset button is in the up position - electric fuel 
pump is shut off), to restart the vehicle the switch 
must be manually reset. 
81
' 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
WHITE 
RESET 
BUTTON 
Reset Instructions 
• Turn ignition switch to OFF. 
• Check for leaking fuel. 
DECKLID 
HINGE 
WARNING - If you see or smell gasoline do 
not reset the switch. 
• If no fuel is apparent, reset the switch by pushing 
the white button. (See illustration.) 
• Turn ignition switch to ON for a few seconds, then 
to OFF. 
• Again, check for leaking fuel. 
Running Out of Fuel 
If your vehicle runs out of fuel, stop the vehicle on a 
level location away from traffic. The engine may be 
restarted by adding at least one gallon of fuel to the 
fuel tank. If the vehicle is not level, up to three gal­lons 
of fuel may be required. Prolonged engine 
cranking may be required to pump fuel from the fuel 
tank to the engine before the engine will start. Refer 
to Starting Instructions. 
82 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
WARNING - Never pour gasoline in the throt­tle 
body or attempt to start the engine with 
the air cleaner removed. These practices could 
result in fire and personal injury. 
Pushing 
Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be 
started by pushing. Follow the directions under Use 
of Jumper Cables. 
Battery 
The new original equipment Motorcraft mainte­nance- 
free battery does not require the addition of 
water during its normal service life. The vents, which 
are for venting only, are part of the cover and cannot 
be removed. Keeping the top of the battery clean and 
dry will give longer, trouble-free operation. Also, 
make certain the battery cables are tightly fastened 
to the battery cables or terminals, remove the cables 
(negative cable first) and clean the cables and termi­nals 
with a wire brush. Neutralize the acid with a so­lution 
of baking soda and water. Install the positive 
cable, then the negative cable, applying a small 
quantity of grease to the top of each battery terminal 
to help prevent corrosion. 
Battery Replacement 
When the original equipment battery requires re­placement, 
under warranty, it may in some instances 
be replaced by a Ford authorized low-maintenance 
battery. The low-maintenance battery has removable 
vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for 
water additions if necessary. 
The electrolyte level should be checked at least every · 
24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in tem­peratures 
up to 90°F (32°C) and more often in tem­peratures 
above 90°F (32°C). Keep the electrolyte 
level in ~ach cell up to the level indicator. Do not 
overfill. 
83
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
If the level gets low, you can add plain tap water to 
the battery, provided the water isn't hard or doesn't 
have a high mineral or alkali content. However, if 
possible, refill with distilled water. If the battery 
needs water quite often, have the charging system 
checked for a possible problem. 
WARNING - Batteries normally produce ex­plosive 
gases which can cause personal injury. 
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or light­ed 
tobacco to come near the battery. When 
charging or working near a battery, always 
shield your eyes. Always provide ventilation. 
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive 
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to 
spew through the vent caps, resulting in per­sonal 
injury. lift with a battery carrier or with 
your hands on opposite corners. 
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Bat­t~ 
ries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with 
skin, eyes or .clothing. Also, shield your eyes 
when working near the battery to protect 
against possible splashing of the acid solution. 
In case of ·acid contact with skin or eyes, flush 
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 
minutes and get prompt medical attention. If 
acid is swallowed, call a physician 
immediately. 
Use of Jumper Cables 
WARNING - To avoid harm to yourself or 
_damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these 
directions in order. If in doubt, call for road 
...service. 
• Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage 
a 12-volt starting motor and ignition system and 
other electrical parts beyond repair by connecting 
it to a 24-volt power supply (two 12-volt batteries in 
series, or a 24-volt motor generator set). 
84 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
• Do not disconnect the battery of the vehicle to be 
started. Disconnecting the battery could damage 
the vehicle's electrical system. 
• Make sure vehicles do not touch one another. Set 
the parking brake fully on each. Stay clear of the 
engine cooling fan. 
• Turn on the heater blower motor of the vehicle to 
be started by setting the climate control system on 
DEFROST. Turn off all other switches and lights on 
both vehicles. 
• Make jumper cable connections. (See illustrations.) 
-Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the 
positive ( +) terminal of the. dead battery and 
the other end to the positive (+)terminal of the 
booster battery. 
- Connect one end of the second jumper cable to 
the negative ( - )terminal of the booster.battery, 
and the other end to the A/C compressor 
mounting bracket (as shown in the illustration) 
or good metallic contact spot on the engine of 
the vehicle to be started. Do not connect jumper 
to fuel lines. 
WARNING - Do not attach the other end to 
the negative (-) battery terminal, because a 
spark could occur and cause explosion of gases 
normally present around the battery. 
• Make sure the jumper cables are not in the way of 
moving engine parts. 
• Start the engine of the vehicl'e with the booster 
battery. Run the engine at a moderate speed . 
• Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead 
battery. 
85
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
• Leave all switches off except heater blower motor 
and reduce engine speed to idle on both vehicles 
to prevent possible damage to the vehicles' elec­trical 
systems. 
• Remove cables in reverse order. 
- Remove the negative ( - ) end of the jumper ca­ble 
from the engine of the vehicle with the dead 
battery. 
- Remove the end of the jumper cable from the 
negative ( - ) terminal of the booster battery. 
- Remove the end of the jumper cable from the 
positive ( +) terminal of the booster battery. 
- Remove the end of the jumper cable from the 
positive ( +) terminal of the dead battery. 
86 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
MAKE SURE VEHICLES 
DO NOT TOUCH 
MAKE CONNECTIONS IN NUMERICAL ORDER 
(DISCONNECT IN REVERSE ORDER 4, 3, 2, 1) 
AIR COMPRESSOR 
MOUNTING BRACKET 
Towing Vehicles 
The transmission and rear axle must be in proper 
working order before moving the vehicle. To move a 
vehicle with an inoperative transmission or rear axle, 
you must raise the rear wheels and tow the vehicle 
from the rear. 
87
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
Release the parking brake and place the transmission 
in N (NEUTRAL). Towed vehicles should be pulled 
with the driving rear wheels off the ground. If the 
driving wheels cannot be raised off the ground, ei­ther 
place them on a dolly or disconnect the drive­shaft. 
When it is necessary to tow the vehicle with 
the driving wheels on the ground and driveshaft con­nected, 
do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) and/or a dis­tance 
of 50 miles (80 km) or transmission damage 
could result. 
Towing speed is to be limited to 50 mph (80 km/h) 
with the driving wheels off the ground and on a 
smooth surface. For wrecker towing on rough pave­ment, 
the maximum towing speed is 35 mph (56 
km/h). 
When a vehicle is pulled on its front wheels, the 
steering wheel must be clamped in the straight 
ahead position with a steering wheel clamping de­vice 
designed for towing service use, such as pro­vided 
by towing manufacturers. 
CAUTION - If the ignition key is not available to un­lock 
a steering column where applicable, place a 
dolly under the rear wheels and tow the vehicle with 
the front wheels raised. Do not use the vehicle's 
steering column lock to secure the wheels in straight 
ahead position when pulled from the rear. 
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE TRANSMISSION 
OPERATION 
When shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL to any drive 
gear, hold foot on service brake while engaging the 
transmission. Gradually release the service brake and 
drive away in a normal manner. 
88 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
The automatic overdrive transmission provides fully 
automatic operation in either the @ (OVERDRIVE) or 
D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) position. Driving With the 
shift selector in @ (OVERDRIVE) gives the best fuel 
economy for normal driving conditions. 
II p R N@ D 1 II 
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE TRANSMISSION 
SELECTOR tNDICATOR 
Automatic Overdrive Positions: 
P (PARK) - Locks the transmission and prevents the 
rear wheels from turning. Always come to a com­plete 
stop before shifting into P (PARK). To latch the 
selector lever in P (PARK), lift it toward you (see il­lustration). 
Push it completely counter-clockwise 
against the stop and then push it forward toward the 
instrument panel. Make sure the gearshift selector 
lever is all the way forward and securely latched be­fore 
releasing it. You cannot shift out of P (PARK) 
without lifting the lever toward you and rotating it 
down. Always make sure the gearshift selector lever 
is latched in P (PARK) before leaving the driver's 
seat. Never leave it in any other position. Set the 
parking brake fully, remove the key, and lock all 
doors. 
WARNING - Do not use the P (PARK) position 
in place of the parking brake. Always make 
sure the gearshift selector lever is latched in P 
(PARK) so that it cannot be moved without lift­ing 
the lever toward you and rotating it down 
AND set the parking brake fully. 
89
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
Turn off the ignition when you leave the vehi· 
cle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle 
unattended while the engine is running. 
Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle 
movement may occur if these precautions are 
not taken. 
R (REVERSE) 
(OVERDRIVE) 
R (REVERSE) - This position allows the vehicle to 
move backward. Always come to a complete stop be­fore 
shifting into or out of R (REVERSE), except as 
explained under "Rocking the Vehicle." 
N (NEUTRAL) - If necessary, you may start the en­gine 
in this position. The wheels and transmission 
are not locked. 
90 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
@ (OVERDRIVE) - This is the NORMAL DRIVING 
POSITION. As the vehicle picks up speed, automatic 
upshifts from first to second and third gear will oc­cur. 
The upshift to fourth gear does not occur until 
the vehicle approaches the desired higher cruising 
speed and the driver eases up on the accelerator 
pedal. The transmission automatically downshifts as 
speed decreases. 
The overdrive gear is specifically geared for econo­my 
and is not appropriate for certain hilly terrain, or 
towing large trailers. If the transmission shifts back 
and forth excessively between overdrive gear and 
third gear or overdrive gear fails to provide adequate I hill climbing performance (especially when on speed 
control), shift to D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT). The shift 
lever can be moved from @ to D or D to @ at any 
vehicle speed. 
D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT)- The transmission oper­ates 
as in @ except that it will not shift into 
overdrive gear. This position is useful to eliminate 
any excessive shifting between overdrive and third 
gears and also provides more engine braking than 
@ position. The shift lever can be moved from D to 
@ or @ to D at any vehicle speed. 
1 (LOW) - This position can be used when max­imum 
engine braking is desired. To help brake the 
vehicle on hilly roads where D (OVERDRIVE LOCK· 
OUT) does not provide enough braking, shift the se­lector 
lever to 1 (LOW). At vehicle speeds above 
approximately 25 mph (40 km/ h), the transmission 
will shift to second gear and remain in second gear. 
When vehicle speed drops below approximately 25 
mph (40 km/ h), the transmission will downshift to 
first gear and remain in first gear. Upshifts from 1 
(LOW) can be made by manually shifting to @ 
(OVERDRIVE) or D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT). When 1 
(LOW) is used for starting up, the transmission starts 
in first gear and stays in first gear. 
91
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
FORCED DOWNSHIFTS - To gain extra acceleration 
as in passing, push the accelerator to the floor. At 
speeds above approximately 55 mph (89 km/h) in @, 
the transmission will downshift from overdrive to 
third gear. At speeds from approximately 55 mph (89 
km/h) to 25 mph (40 km/h) in @ or D, the transmis­sion 
will downshift to second gear. At lower speeds 
the transmission will downshift to first gear in either 
position. 
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS 
Consumption of Alcoholic Beverages 
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SUPPORTS THE RECOM­MENDATIONS 
OF THE PRESIDENTIAL COMMISSION 
ON DRUNK DRIVING. 
Exercise your good judgement and encourage others 
to do the same. Know your legal limits and do not 
exceed them. Also know your personal limits (which 
may be lower than the legal limits). Should you ever 
exceed your limits, find alternative transportation - 
call a cab, ask a friend to drive you. home, or call a 
family member to come get you. 
THE PRESENCE OF ALCOHOL IN SIGNIFICANT LEV­ELS 
IN THE BLOOD INCREASES THE PROBABILITY 
THE DRIVER WILL BE INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT. 
Slippery Surfaces 
On slippery surfaces, avoid quick movements of the 
steering wheel. Decrease your speed and allow for 
extra stopping distance required by these conditions. 
Apply the brakes by pumping the pedal steadily and 
evenly to avoid wheel lockup and loss of vehicle 
control. 
92 
WARNING - To avoid skidding on slippery 
roads do not downshift into 1 (LOW) at speeds 
above 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not use fingertip 
speed control on slippery roads. 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
Wheel Spin 
If the wheels spin, move forward slowly and evenly. 
If this does not work, try rocking the vehicle. 
Rocking the Vehicle 
"Rocking" the vehicle is moving it forward and back­ward 
in a steady rhythm to gain enough momentum 
to move it off a particularly slippery spot. Shift, in a 
steady rhythm, between forward and reverse gears 
while pressing gently on the accelerator. 
If you are still stuck after a minute or two of rocking, 
have the vehicle pulled out. 
CAUTION - Prolonged rocking, even at low speeds, 
may cause engine overheating, transmission and 
axle damage or failure, or tire damage. 
WARNING - Do not overspeed the engine 
and/or spin the wheels in ~xcess of an indi­cated 
35 mph (56 km/h). Speeds above 35 mph 
are capable of disintegrating a tire with ex­plosive 
force which could result in injury to a 
bystander or occupant. 
Flooded Areas 
Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are 
sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the 
wheel rims. Drive through slowly. Allow adequate 
stopping distance since wet brakes do not grip well. 
After driving through water, gently apply the brakes 
several times to dry the brakes. 
Tips for Safe Driving 
As with any new vehicle your's may drive and handle 
differently from your previous vehicle, and particular 
care should be exercised until you become ac­customed 
to its various features and driving 
characteristics. 
93
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
Safe operation of any vehicle requires that it be oper­ated 
within reasonable limits. Abrupt changes in 
acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations 
of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave 
differently than anticipated, especially when road 
conditions vary. For example: 
• Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to 
spin, perhaps leading to moving of the rear of the 
vehicle from side to side- "fish-tailing." 
• Extreme braking can cause wheels to lock and 
slide, making it difficult to control the direction of 
the vehicle. Use a "squeeze" technique- push on 
the brake pedal with steadily increasing force 
which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to 
roll so that you may steer in the direction you want 
to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake 
pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. 
• Abruptly releasing the accelerator or braking hard 
when your vehicle is in a severe curve and at a 
speed which is high in relationship to the severity 
of the curve (and to such other factors as the road, 
weather, and tire conditions) may cause the vehi­cle 
to change its direction of travel. If this occurs 
turn the steering wheel smoothly to the extent nec­essary 
to correct the vehicle's direction of travel. If 
possible, avoid application of the brakes. However, 
if braking is necessary, it should be done by gently 
employing the "squeeze" technique described 
above. 
FINGERTIP SPEED CONTROL 
Speed control allows you to automatically control the 
speed of your vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h). The 
switches used to set the speed control are on the 
steering wheel. 
94 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
WARNING- To avoid loss of vehicle control, 
do not use the automatic speed control in 
heavy traffic or on winding, slippery or un­paved 
roads. 
CAUTION - Do not shift to N (NEUTRAL) when 
using the speed control. This will cause the engine 
to overspeed. 
To Set Speed 
Press the ON switch momentarily. Manually acceler­ate 
to the desired speed. Press the SET/ACCEL switch 
momentarily: Do not keep the SET/ACCEL switch 
pressed down or your speed will continue to in­crease. 
Release the accelerator pedal and the set 
speed-will be maintained. 
With the speed control on, you may increase your 
speed for passing as you normally would, by de­pressing 
the accelerator. When the accelerator is re­leased, 
the speed control will return your vehicle to 
the set speed. 
When going up or down steep hills, the vehicle may 
lose or gain speed even though the speed control is 
on. 
95
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 
NOTE- In hilly terrain, at higher elevations or when 
pulling a trailer, it may be preferable to drive in D 
(OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) to improve speed control 
performance. 
CAUTION - Use only properly installed FCC ap­proved 
radio transmitting equipment. Use of other 
transmitting equipment may cause the speed con­trol 
to malfunction. 
To Change Set Speed 
To reset to a lower speed, press and hold the COAST 
switch. When the vehicle has slowed to the desired 
speed, release the switch. 
To reset for an increase in speed, use either of the 
following methods: 
• Accelerate to the desired speed and press the SET/ 
ACCEL switch momentarily. When the switch is re­leased, 
the new speed will be maintained. 
• Press and hold the SET/ACCEL switch until your 
vehicle reaches the desired speed. Release the 
switch and the new speed will be maintained. 
To Cancel Speed Control 
Use either of the following procedures. 
• Slightly depress the brake pedal. This cancels the 
automatic control until you press the SET/ACCEL 
or RESUME switch. 
• Press the OFF switch. The automatic control will 
remain off until you press the ON switch and reset 
the speed. 
The speed control is also cancelled each time the ig­nition 
switch is turned off or the hazard warning 
lights are turned on. 
96 
STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICL 
To Resume at Previously Set Speed 
If the system is shut off by depressing the ~rake ped­al, 
the vehicle can be returned to the prev1ously. set 
speed by pressing the left side of the R~SUM~ sw1tch 
(hold for one or two seconds). The veh1cle Will accel­erate 
gradually to the previously set speed an~ then 
maintain that speed. Resume must be activated 
above 30 mph (48 km/ h). 
97
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Door Handles/Locks . . ................... 1 00 
Outside Door Locks ...... . .............. 1 00 
Inside Door Locks ....................... 1 00 
Power Locks ........................... 1 0 1 
Keyless Entry System ................... 1 01 
Windows and Controls .................. . 105 
Power .....•... . ....................... 105 
Power Moonroof Glass ...... , ............ 1 06 
Radios ..... . .............. : . .. ~ ......... 1 07 
Travelers Information ... ~ ................ 1 08 
Radio Controls ................•......... 1 08 
Tape Player Controls ....... , ..... • ....... 11 0 
Tape Care and Operation .•......•....... 11 2 
Premium Sound System ................. 11 4 
Compact Disc Player ... ; . ...... ! •••••• , .. 11 4 
Power Antenna .... ' .. , . ................. 11 5 
· ~shtrays and Lighters .. . ........ ; . .. ~ , , .. 116 
Tractlon-Lok Axle ....... . ................ 11 6 
Tires and Tire Care ..... . ~ ... ·> .......... 116 
Inflation Pressure ... . .. . ... ·. ; ........ . .. 11 7 
Load Limits ... . ........... . ............ 11 7 
Spare Tire .. , , ........ . .... ; ; .......... 1 21 
Changing a Tire ....... . ... .. ........ . .. 1 2 2 
Tire Replacement ...... .. ............... 124 
Tire Rotation .............. •• .. ~ ........ 125 
Use of Snow Tires and Tire Chains ....... 126 
99
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
DOOR HANDlES/lOCKS 
Outside Door locks 
ib ;:==:==::::::::;~ LOCK._. (/ 
LPITEFONT ~)1 IDJI ~~~~~~~;KEY LOCK 
O 
,_ -~ To Open-insert square 
DOOR HANDLE key-turn to front of vehicle 
....... FRONT OF VEHICLE 
Inside Door locks 
DRIVER'S DOOR 
To Lock-insert square 
key-turn to rear of vehicle 
FRONT DOOR LOCK 
/ 
/ 
/ 
/I 
·z J/-_ 
FRONT. 
- 
The inside door handles are located on the side door 
trim panels. To operate the handles, pull inward to­ward 
you. Pulling the inside door handles will auto­matically 
release only the front door locks. 
100 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Power Door locks 
...... --LOCK 
__ ,.,...,. UNLOCK 
FRONT--1)1111.. . 
The switches which control the power door locks are I located in the front seat armrests. To lock all doors, 
pull either door lock switch rearward. To unlock all 
doors, push either door lock switch forward. If you 
close the doors with power door locks engaged, the 
doors will remain locked. The manual door locks will 
override the power controls in case the power mech­anism 
should ever fail. 
Keyless Entry System 
This system is designed to allow locking or unlocking 
of the vehicle's doors and trunk lid without using a 
key. 
When the vehicle doors are fully closed, the ignition 
lock cylinder is in the ON position, the driver's seat is 
occupied or a heavy object is placed.on the driver's 
seat, and the transmission is shifted through (R) RE­VERSE, 
all of the doors will lock. 
101
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
KEYLESS ENTRY BUTIONS 
To unlock the driver's door, punch the five-digit code 
that appears on the warranty card or the owner's 
code card into the calculator-style switch group lo­cated 
on the driver's door. 
CAUTION - Do not punch the switch with a car key, 
ball point pen, pencil, etc. Hard objects may damage 
the pushbuttons. Each button should be pressed on 
the vertical line between the numbers because there 
is only one switch under each button. 
If more than five seconds elapse between button 
pushes, the system will time out, requiring that you 
start over. When the last button of the sequence is 
pushed, the driver's door will unlock. To unlock the 
passenger doors, button 3/4 must be pushed within 
five seconds of the driver's door unlocking. 
Pushing button 5/6 within five seconds of unlocking 
either the driver or passenger doors, will unlock the 
trunk lid. Depressing buttons 7/8 and 9/0 at the same 
time will lock all of the doors. 
In addition to unlocking by using the code appearing 
on your owner's code card or the warranty card, you 
may also program in a second code of your choice. 
To program this second code, you first have to enter 
the code from your code card. Then, within five sec­onds, 
depress the 1/2 button. Then, within five sec­onds 
of each other, depress five buttons in any 
sequence you desire. This button sequence will be 
retained by the system as the second code. To erase 
this second code, simply enter the warranty card 
code, depress button 1/2, and wait six seconds. 
102 
( 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Depressing any one of the five buttons will illuminate 
the switch group and turn on the illuminated entry 
system. 
It has been demonstrated that persons idly depres.s­ing 
the switch buttons frequently follow certam 
sequences. Therefore, it is recommended that tem­porary 
codes 1/2-3/4-5/6-7/8-9/0, or 9/0-7/8-5/6-3/4-1/2, 
or any that use just one button not be used. 
NOTE_ Should the keyless entry system become in­operative 
the regular key-operated system can be 
used to lock and unlock the doors. 
A record of the permanent computer code for the 
keyless entry system can be found in four places: 
• A sticker with the printed number c~de. will. be 
taped to the computer module on the ms1de nght 
hand cowl trim panel. 
• A second sticker with the code will be taped on the 
lower L.H. corner on the front of the Owner War­ranty 
Card. This card is located inside the glove 
box. 
• A third sticker with the code will be taped on the 
underside of the deck lid. 
• An owner's wallet card will have the number 
printed on it. 
Glove Compartment Latch 
SQUEEZE 
TO 
OPEN 
GLOVE 
COMPARTMENT 
LATCH 
 
 
.LJ1tilM. 
USE ROUND OR 
OVAL HEADED KEY 
TO LOCK/UNLOCK 
103
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Remote Control Trunk Release 
LOCATED INSIDE GLOVE BOX 
PRESS BUTTON TO 
~~-OPEN TRUNK LID 
IGNITION IN ON OR ACC 
Deck Lid (Trunk) 
The lock cylinder cover must be rotated to the left to 
insert the key. Turn the key to the right to unlatch 
the trunk. Close the lock cylinder cover by lifting the 
cover over the stop or by pushing the top left-hand 
corner of the cover. 
104 
USE OVAL 
HEADED KEY 
TURN RIGHT 
TO OPEN 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Power Decklid (Trunk) Pulldown Latch System 
This system eliminates the need of having to "slam" 
the decklid down in order to close it securely. To 
operate, simply push down on top of the decklid with 
enough pressure to allow the latch to engage. The 
power mechanism will then automatically complete 
the pulldown and securely latch the decklid shut. A 
slight whirring sound will be heard when the power 
pulldown is operating. 
WARNING- To prevent the possibility of p~r­sonal 
injury, always keep hands and fingers 
away from all edges of the decklid when clos­ing. 
Do not attempt to stop the automatic 
pulldown or clear objects from the sealing 
edges once the initial latching has been made. 
When the sound of the power pulldown has 
stopped, the decklid can be reopened with ei­ther 
the key or the remote release. 
WINDOWS AND CONTROLS 
Power Windows 
The switches for controlling the power windows are 
located in the armrests below each window. The 
master control panel which operates all four win­dows 
is located in the driver's armrest. The switches 
on the other door armrest(s) individually control only 
the window next to them. The ignition lock cylinder 
must be in the ON or ACC position to use your power 
controls. To lower a window, push the window 
switch toward the rear of the vehicle. To raise the 
window, push the switch forward. 
WARNING - Do not allow children an oppor­tunity 
to play with power windows. They may 
accidentally injure themselves, perhaps 
seriously. 
105
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
OPEN-.----t~ CLOSE FRONT~ 
LOCK UNLOCK 
Power Vent Windows 
The vent windows are controlled by the power win­dow 
switches. The vent window opens first and 
closes last when you use the power controls. If you 
want to open the vent without lowering the side win­dow, 
release the switch before the side window 
starts to open. 
Window Lock Switch 
The driver of the vehicle may lock out all window 
switches except the master controls by pulling the 
window lock switch rearward. When the switch is 
pushed forward, the window(s) may be individually 
operated again. 
Power Moonroof Glass (Optional) 
WARNING - Do not allow children an oppor­tunity 
to play with the power roof. They may 
accidentally injure themselves, perhaps 
seriously. 
To operate the panel, place the ignition key in the ON 
or ACC position and use the two-way control switch 
located above the windshield between the sun vi­sors. 
Push the rear of the switch to open the panel 
and the front of the switch to close the panel. The 
Moonroof has a sliding shade which can be manually 
opened or closed, when the glass panel is closed. 
This shade will automatically open and lock when the 
Moonroof glass panel is opened. 
106 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
CONTROL 
SWITCH~ 
4~ ~t' 
0 ' 
Moving parts are permanently lubricated. The o~ ly 
normal maintenance is to periodically wipe the gUide 
rail covers with a clean cloth. 
MANUAL OPERATION - The panel can be closed 
manually as described below; however, do this only 
if absolutely necessary. 
• Open the glove box and get the hand crank tool 
from the envelope. 
• Remove the small round drive gear access plug lo­cated 
in the center of the headlining just rearward 
of the roof panel opening and over the rear seat. 
Grasp with fingers and pull downward. 
• Insert the end of crank tool into the allen fitting of 
the motor shaft. Turn handle clockwise until roof 
panel is fully closed. Replace the cover, and take 
your vehicle to your dealer for diagnosis and 
repair. 
RADIOS 
CAUTION - Use only properly installed FCC ap­proved 
radio transmitting eq~ipment. u.se of other 
transmitting equipment may mterfere with yo~r ve­hicle's 
electrical system and may cause the eng me to 
malfunction or stall. 
To aid in the enjoyment of the factory-installed 
sound system in your vehicle, Ford M~tor Company 
offers the following operating suggestions. 
107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Ford electronic radios have four station select mem­ory 
buttons and various other controls which are 
explained in the following illustrations. Additional 
instructions for radios with tape players are also 
provided. 
Traveler's Information 
Ford radios will receive very limited range Traveler's 
Information Service broadcasts (localized road con­ditions, 
specialized instructions, etc.) at the extreme 
ends of the AM broadcast band (530 and 1610 
Kilohertz). 
Electronically Tuned Radio/Cassette Player with 
Ford JBL Audio System 
A. Power is supplied when ignition switch is in the 
ON or ACC position. Depress the POWER switch 
to turn the radio ON; depress again to turn the 
radio OFF. 
108 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
B. Indicates STATION FREQUENCY. (Dims when 
lights are on.) 
C. Indicates STEREO RECEPTION when lit. 
D. Indicates AM or FM BAND SELECTION. 
E. Volume Control - Rotate clockwise to increase 
volume. 
F. Tone Controls - Your electronic radio has indi­vidual 
controls to adjust the BASS and TREBLE. 
To adjust BASS, rotate the control clockwise for 
more BASS; counterclockwise for less. To 
adjust TREBLE, rotate the control clockwise for 
more TREBLE; counterclockwise for less. 
G. Speaker Controls - Two controls adjust sound 
balance between the left and right sides of the 
vehicle (L & R) and between the front and back 
of the vehicle (F & 8). 
H. Band Select - Rotate the outer knob to select 
AM or FM band reception. 
I. Press once to SCAN up-band. Stops eight sec­onds 
on each listenable station, then continues. 
Press again to hold on station. NOTE: AM/FM 
indicator (D) flashes in scan mode. 
J . Seek - To tune up-band, hold in the "seek-up" 
button; to tune down-band, hold in the "seek­down" 
button. When released, tun ing stops on 
the next listenable station. 
K. Memory Button Tuning - Pushing any one of 
the four station select buttons causes the radio 
to tune to the station previously stored. When 
AM/FM switch is in the AM position, four AM 
stations may be selected. Four FM stations may 
be selected when the radio is in the FM mode. 
109
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
STORING A STATION IN MEMORY - Push button 
tuning is provided by storing eight of your preferred 
broadcasting stations (four FM and four AM) in the 
radio's memory. 
To set the memory button, use manual, seek or scan 
tuning to select the desired station. When the station 
is tuned, depress and hold a memory button. When 
the memory button is depressed, the station's sound 
will be interrupted for approximately two seconds. 
When the station's sound returns, the button is 
"set" and may be released. This process is repeated 
for each of the memory buttons. 
MANUAL TUNING (DOWN OR UP) - Rotate the 
inner knob (I) clockwise to tune "up"; rotate coun­terclockwise 
to tune "down". 
FAST TUNE- Rotate the inner knob (I) clockwise (or 
counterclockwise) twice quickly and hold. The radio 
will rapidly tune up (or down) the AM or FM band. 
Tape Player Controls, Electronically Tuned Radios­with 
Cassette Tape Player (Optional) 
110 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
A. Insert tape cassette, open edge to right, to PLAY 
(radio On, ignition ON or ACC). Adjust volume, 
tone and speaker balance as for radio programs. 
At the end of the tape , the cassette 
automatically reverses and plays the other side 
of the tape. At any time, the tape transport 
mechanism can be changed to play the other 
side of tape by pressing the REV button (1) . 
B. Press for playing tapes recorded using the DOL­BY 
® SYSTEM*. Press again to deactivate. 
C. Fast Tape Travel Buttons- If the direction of the 
arrows for the button pressed is the same as the 
direction of tape travel (indicator E), the tape will 
fast advance the program being played. If the 
indicator and button arrows are opposite, the 
tape will fast rewind. To resume tape play, par­tially 
depress the EJECT (H) button. This will in­terrupt 
the fast advance/rewind mode and allow 
the player to resume tape play. 
D. Indicates DOLBY® SYSTEM activated when lit. 
E. "Arrow" indicates direction of tape travel. 
F. Depress the Cr02 (Equalization) switch (F) when 
playing metal tapes. 
On the Electronically Tuned Radio with the Ford JBL 
Audio System, press for DNR (Dynamic Noise Re­duction 
System). Press again to deactivate. 
NOTE - The Ford JBL System incorporates 
automatic type equalization. The system determines 
whether metal or non-metal tape is in use and auto­matically 
adjusts for the proper equalization. 
G. Your Electronic Cassette Radio has an Automatic 
Music Search feature which allows for easily 
searching the cassette tape for the start of a 
desired program. 
111
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
The Music Search feature is activated (light on) by 
pressing the AMS (Automatic Music Search) button. 
To locate the start of the next program on the tape, 
push the fast tape travel button with the arrow direc­tion 
corresponding to the tape travel indicator (indi­cator 
E). To locate the start of the program being 
played, push the fast tape travel button with the 
arrow direction opposite to the tape travel indicator 
(indicator E). This process may be repeated until the 
desired program is located. 
NOTE - There must be a minimum of four (4) sec­onds 
"quiet" between programs for the Music 
Search feature to distinguish between the separate 
programs. 
Pressing the AMS button again will de-activate the 
Music Search feature, and the Fast Tape Travel but­tons 
will resume their normal function. 
H. Press to EJECT cassette. 
NOTE- Before turning off your radio or the ignition 
of your car, always eject any cassette being played. 
Leaving th~ tape mechanism stopped while a tape is 
engaged can result in damage to the tape, pinch roll­er, 
or capstan. 
*The DOLBY~ SYSTEM is a noise reduction system 
manufactured under license from Dolby Laborato­ries. 
DOLBY~ and the double-D (£t) symbol are 
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation. 
Hints On The Care And Operation Of Tapes 
TEMPERATURE EXTREMES: Be careful not to expose 
tape cassettes to intense sunlight or other tem­perature 
extremes. If they do become exposed to 
high or low temperatures, allow each cassette to 
reach a moderate temperature before playing them. 
During cold weather, it is advisable to take cassettes 
indoors overnight to protect them. 
112 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS: When inserting a cas­sette 
into the tape slot, it should be firmly pushed in 
to assure that it is properly seated. 
Do not leave a tape cassette engaged in the tape 
player slot when not in use. Remove it completely to 
permit the slot door to close and keep out airborne 
dirt. . . 
Take care to protect the open edge of the tape from 
damage, dirt, oil and grease. When not in use, store 
tapes in their protective cases. If a cassette is found 
with loose tape, be sure it is rewound firmly around 
the hubs before using it. 
CASSETTE IRREGULARITIES - Cassette tapes can 
vary in performance and size. If any one cassette 
gives continual trouble, discontinue using it. 
Tape Player Performance 
If weak or wavering sound is encountered, it is sug­gested 
that the player be checked by using a tape of 
known quality. If the tape cassette is ruled out as the 
cause, routine cleaning may restore normal 
operation. 
For best results, use cassette tapes with no more 
than 90 minutes of playing time. The thinness of the 
tape used in C120 and C180 cassettes makes the tape 
more likely to stretch and break. 
Periodic Cleaning of Tape Player 
Over a period of time, the playback head, capstans, 
and pinch rollers gather an oxide residue from the 
tape as it passes these components while playing. 
Depending upon the quality of tapes used, more or 
less oxide will accumulate. Oxide accumulation can 
cause weak or wavering sound and damage to the 
cassette tape and player. 
113
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
It is recommended, for best performance, that the 
player be cleaned every 10 to 12 hours of playing 
time with a Ford cassette player cleaning cartridge 
available at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 
The use of other cassette cleaning products is not 
recommended, as these could cause damage to your 
player or cassette tapes. 
Premium Sound System 
The Premium Sound system uses a separate power 
amplifier which increases the sound level and fidelity 
from the speakers. Premium sound is functioning 
whenever the radio is on. 
Compact Disc Player (Optional) 
A B c 
J H G F E 0 
A. Reset Button 
B. Locking Door- When disc is in or when there is 
no power, the door is locked. 
C. Eject Button - Push to eject the compact disc. 
D. Play/Pause/Stop Button - Press to put player 
into pause mode. To stop, press and hold for two 
(2) seconds. 
114 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
E. Automatic Music Search - Press once to go to 
top of next track. Press N times to go to the Nth 
next track (for example, press three (3) t imes to 
go to the top of the third next track). 
F. Automatic Music Search - Press once to go to 
the beginning of the same track. Press N + 1 
times to go to the top of the Nth previous track 
(for example, press four (4) times to go to the be­ginning 
of the third previous track). 
G. Fast Forward and Rewind- Press the right side 
for fast forward or the left side for rewind. The 
speed will increase ten times and the sound will 
be audible at 12DB. 
H. Return Button- Press to return to top of the first 
I. 
track. I 
Display Button - Press to change display be­tween 
track numeral and time (elapsed play 
time). 
J. Repeat Button - Press once to repeat current 
track. Press twice to repeat the entire disc. 
Power Antenna 
ANTENNA 
POWER ANTENNA SWITCH 
r (LOCATED TO THE RIGHT 
OF THE CLIMATE CONTROL 
PANEL)-Push switch down and hold to lower antenna; 
push switch up and hold 
to raise antenna. 
NOTE - Replacement antenna masts are available 
through your dealer. 
115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
ASHTRAYS AND LIGHTERS 
Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray on the in­strument 
panel, in the right front door armrest, and 
in each rear door armrest. To open the instrument 
panel ashtray, pull out on the handle of the ashtray. 
To remove any of the ashtrays, pull up on the snuffer 
and lift out the ash receptacle. 
The cigar lighter is located in the ashtray on the in­strument 
panel to the right of the steering column. 
Lighters are also included in the rear door armrests. 
To operate the lighter, push it in all the way and then 
release it. When it is ready for use, it will spring back 
to its normal position. Do not hold lighter in 
manually. 
TRACTION-LOK AXLE 
This axle provides added traction on slippery sur­faces, 
particularly when one wheel is on a poor 
traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Trac­tion- 
Lok axle functions as a standard rear axle. 
NOTE - Extended use of other than conventional 
spare tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in 
a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of 
effectiveness does not affect normal driving and 
should not be noticeable to the driver. 
WARNING - On vehicles equipped with a 
Traction-Lok axle, never run the engine with 
one wheel off the ground, such as when chang­ing 
a tire. The wheel still on the ground could 
cause the vehicle to move. 
TIRES AND TIRE CARE 
For proper performance, safety, and maximum fuel 
economy, it is essential that you always maintain rec­ommended 
inflation pressures and stay within the 
load limits and weight distribution recommended for 
your vehicle. 
116 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Inflation Pressure 
Before driving each day, glance at all your tires. If 
one looks lower than the others, have the pressure of 
all tires checked. Otherwise, check pressure every 
few weeks. Check spare tire regularly. 
Refer to the tire decal attached to the front face of the 
right door pillar, for cold inflation pressures and load 
limits of recommended size tires. 
WARNING - Over- or under-inflated tires can 
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, 
resulting in loss of vehicle control. - 
LOAD LIMITS 
When loading your vehicle, adding accessory equip­ment 
or towing a trailer, it is important for you to 
stay within the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 
and the front and rear gross axle weight ratings 
(GAWR). The GAWR and GVWR are shown on the 
Safety Compliance Certification Label attached to. the 
rear edge face of the left front door. These ratmgs 
are the design limits of the vehicle, not just of the 
tires. 
WARNING - H any of these limits are exceed· 
ed, vehicle breakdown and possible personal 
injury can result. 
High Speed Driving 
WARNING - Ford Motor Company does not 
advocate driving over posted speed limits nor 
at excessive speeds. Driving over 85 mph (137 
km/h) even for a short time may result in tire 
failure, loss of control and possible injury. 
117
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
If your vehicle must be driven at continuous speeds 
of 75 mph to 85 mph (120 km/h to 137 km/ h) in an 
area where such speeds are permitted by law, the 
cold inflation pressure shown on the decal must be 
increased by 4 psi (28 kPa). In no event, however, 
should you exceed the maximum inflation pressure 
which is molded on the outer side of the tire. 
Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts 
If you have aluminum wheels, they are equipped 
with anti-theft wheel lug nuts (one per wheel). The 
key and your registration card are attached to the lug 
wrench stowed with the spare tire. Do not lose the 
registration card. You must send it to the manufac­turer, 
not the dealer, to get a replacement key if 
yours is lost. 
To remove or install the anti-theft lug nut, insert the 
key into the slot in the lug nut. Place the lug nut 
wrench on the key and, while applying pressure on 
the key, remove or install the lug nut. Mark the anti­theft 
lug nut location on the wheel before removing 
it. 
CAUTION - Make sure the key is held square to the 
lug nut. If the key is on an angle, it may damage the 
key and the anti-theft wheel lug nut. Do not use a 
power impact wrench on the lug nut key. 
ANTI-THEFT qD •. ~u~ 
LUG NUT KEY 
118 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
An additional balance weight has been installed 180o 
± 10° opposite the anti-theft wheel lug nut. To main­tain 
proper wheel balance the anti-theft locking lug 
nut should always be reinstalled to its original wheel 
bolt hole location after service. 
Refer to instruction sheet on anti-theft lug nut usage 
attached to the inside trunk lid. 
Anti-Theft Locking Wire-Style Wheel Covers 
(Optional) 
Your vehicle may have a locking wire-style wheel 
cover feature. Each wire-style wheel cover has a lock 
bolt located behind the center hub ornament. A spe­cial 
key wrench is required for prying off the center 
hub ornament and for removing the lock bolt. The 
key wrench has been stored in the glove compart­ment. 
Do not lose the key wrench or you will have 
great difficulty in the event you need to remove a 
wheel cover. 
I 
119
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
A registration number is recorded on a card attached 
to the key wrench. Complete the registration card 
and return it to the lock manufacturer. Keep the I.D. 
card portion in a safe place for future use in ordering 
a replacement key wrench if it is necessary. 
Aluminum Wheels 
Your vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels 
which are protected with a clear coating. 
CAUTION-Do not use acid wheel cleaners, abra­sive 
cleaners, scouring pads, etc. as they will 
damage the paint. Wash the wheels in the same 
manner that you wash the car body, with a mild 
detergent such as Ford wash and wax concentrate. 
Grease and road tar should be removed with an 
automotive tar remover. 
NOTE- Automatic car wash t ire brushes may 
damage aluminum and styled road wheel protective 
coatings. Before using such a service, be sure 
abrasive type brushes are not being used. 
120 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
SPARE TIRE 
Spare Tire Location and Removal 
STOWAGE IN TRUNK 
Conventional Spare Tire 
FRONT OF 
VEHICLE 
~ 
This spare tire is like the other original equipment 
tires on your vehicle. It may be used as a spare or as 
a conventional tire. 
When in storage, be sure the spare is inflated to the 
recommended pressure at all times. 
121
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Changing a Tire 
In case of sudden tire failure, avoid heavy brake ap­plication. 
Gradually decrease speed. Hold steering 
wheel firmly and move slowly to a safe, off-road 
place. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition and 
turn on the hazard flasher system. 
When using a temporal (mini) spare tire, follow the 
usage instructions on the small wheel decal and then 
continue this procedure. 
I 
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS: 
• Make sure the gearshift selector lever is latched in 
the P (PARK) position. 
• Set the parking brake fully. Block the wheel diago­nally 
opposite the wheel being changed. 
WARNING - When one rear wheel is lifted off 
the ground, the P (PARK) position, even if prop­erly 
engaged, will not keep the vehicle from 
moving and possibly slipping off the jack. To 
prevent inadvertent vehicle movement while 
changing a tire, always set the parking brake 
fully and always block the wheel diagonally op­posite 
the wheel being changed. 
• Remove the spare tire and jack from stowage. 
• Remove wheel cover if required with tap~red end 
of wheel nut wrench by inserting and twisting han­dle 
and then prying against inner wheel cover 
flange. 
• Loosen the wheel lug nuts one-half turn each but 
do not remove them until the tire is raised off the 
ground. Pulling up on handle rather than pushing 
is recommended to develop maximum force to 
loosen wheel lug nuts. (See section on anti-theft 
wheel lug nuts if your vehicle is so equipped.) 
122 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
JACK 
HANDLE 
BUMPER SLOT 
(LOCATED ON 
UNDERSIDE OF 
BUMPER) 
~I I I 
WHEEL NUT 
TIGHTENING 
SEQUENCE 
• Assemble the jack by inserting the bottom of the 
jack post into the base. The bottom of the po~t is 
smooth and will enter far enough to rest agamst I 
the bottom of the base. 
• Pull upward on the small lever near the jack handle 
socket. Slide the movable portion of the jack as­sembly 
up to meet the bumper. 
• Align the jack hook with the right or left slot in the 
bumper, insert the hook into slot, and check for a 
snug fit. 
• Adjust the jack position so the bottom o! the col­umn 
is slightly angled in toward the veh1cle. 
WARNING _: To minimize the risk of personal 
injury, do not put any portion of your body un­der 
the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack. 
The jack is provided for emergency wheel and 
tire changing only. H you wish to service the 
vehicle, use jack stands. Never start the en­gine 
while the vehicle is on the jack. 
• Insert the handle in the jack. Move the handle up 
and down until the tire is off the ground. Be care­ful 
that the jack position doesn't change, or the 
jack could slip. 
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
• Remove the wheel lug nuts. Mark the location of 
the anti-theft lug nut on the wheel before removing 
it. Pull the wheel off and immediately replace it 
with the spare. 
When using a temporal (mini) spare tire, follow the 
instructions on the Wheel Usage decal and then con­tinue 
this procedure. 
• Replace the wheel nuts with the beveled edges f<~c­ing 
inward. Tighten them snugly and carefully. 
Don't attempt to tighten them fully until you lower 
the vehicle, or the vehicle could be forced off the 
jack. 
• Place the small lever, located near the jack handle 
socket, in the down position to lower the vehicle. 
Lower the jack, moving the handle up and down as 
you did to raise the vehicle. Keep a firm grasp on 
the handle during this operation. 
• Tighten each of the lug nuts fully in a diagonal se­quence 
as shown in the illustration. Install the 
valve extension from the replaced tire onto the 
spare. 
• When using a conventional spare tire, align the 
wheel cover with the valve stem extension match­ing 
the hole in the cover. Install the cover and be 
sure it is snapped in place all the way around. 
• Stow the tire, jack and wrench. 
• Unblock the wheels. 
Tire Replacement 
If the tire is worn evenly across the tread, a tread 
wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the 
tread. Replace the tire. Replacement of unevenly 
worn tires may be necessary before an indicator 
band appears across the entire tread. 
124 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
WARNING - When you replace tires, never 
mix radial, bias-belted or bias type tires. Use 
only the tire sizes listed on the tire decal at­tached 
to your vehicle. Make sure that all tires 
are of the same size, speed rating and load-car-rying 
capacity. Use only tire and wheel com­binations 
I as recommended on the tire decal or by your dealer. Failure to follow these precau-tions 
can adversely affect the safety and han-dling 
of your vehicle. 
Failure to follow any of the above tire replace­ment 
precautions may result in tire failure, loss 
of vehicle control and possible injury to vehicle 
occupants. 
Tires larger or smaller than originally installed may 
.affect the accuracy of the speedometer. Consult your 
dealer about the need to change speedometer drive 
gears. 
Tire Rotation 
Front and rear tires perform different jobs and can 
wear differently depending on the type of vehicle 
~n~ yo~r d~iving habits. To equalize wear and op­timize 
t1re life, rotate tires at about 7,500 miles (12 
000 km) and then each 15,000 miles (24 000 km) 
thereafter. · 
125
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
If you notice abnormal wear, find and correct the 
cause, and rotate the tires following the diagram to 
allow more even wear. Never use the temporal 
spare for tire rotation or as a regular tire. 
RECOMMENDED TIRE ROTATION DIAGRAM 
4-TIRE ROTATION 
LF I I RF 
txt 
LR I I RR 
Use of Snow Tires and Tire Chains 
WARNING - Snow tires should be of a size 
and type equivalent to the other tires on the 
vehicle. Otherwise the safety and handling of 
your vehicle may be adversely affected. 
Snow tires installed on the rear require a 4 psi (28 
kPa) increase in the cold inflation pressure above that 
shown on the tire pressure decal, but not to exceed 
the maximum cold inflation pressure shown on the 
tire. 
CAUTION - Tire chains are not recommended. In 
case of emergency, or where required by law, chains 
may be used if they are the proper size for the tires 
and are installed tightly (no slack) with ends se­curely 
restrained. Follow the chain manufacturer's 
instructions. Drive slowly. If any contact of the 
chains against the vehicle is heard, stop and re­tighten 
the chains. Use only SAE Class "S" tire 
chains. Use of other chains may damage your 
vehicle. 
126 
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
Cleaning White Sidewall Tires 
Clean tires with Ford Whitewall Tire Cleaner or equiv­alent. 
Follow directions on container and rinse tires 
and wheels with plenty of clean water. 
Tire Quality Grading 
New passenger cars are fitted with tires having Uni­form 
Tire Quality Grading Information (described 
below) molded into the tire sidewall. 
United States 
Department of Transportation 
Uniform Tire Quality Grades 
TREADWEAR 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based I on the wear rate of the tire when tested under con­trolled 
conditions on a specified government test 
course. For example, a tire grade 150 would wear one 
and a half (1-1/2) times as well Olil the government 
course as a tire graded 100. The relative·performance 
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their 
use, however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac­tices, 
and differences in road characteristics and 
'climate. 
TRACTION A 8 C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are, A, 8, 
and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on 
wet pavement as measured under controlled condi­tions 
on specified government test surfaces of as­phalt 
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor 
traction performance. WARN lNG: The traction 
grade assigned to this tire is based on braking 
(straightahead) traction tests and does not include 
cornering (turning) traction. 
127
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 
TEMPERATURE ABC 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, 
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of 
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested un· 
der controlled conditions on a specified indoor labo· 
ratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can 
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and re­duce 
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a 
level of performance which all passenger car tires 
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety 
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher 
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel 
than the minimum required by law. WARNING: The 
temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire 
that is properly inflated and not overloaded. 
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load· 
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause 
heat build-up and possible tire failure. 
128 
TRAILER TOWING 
Recommended Trailer Towing Equipment .. 1 30 
Vehicle Wiring Harness ............... · · · 1 31 
Hitches ................... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1 31 
Safety Chains .................... · . · · · · · 1 3 2 
Vehicle/1'aller Load .............. . ..... · · 1 3 3 
Hook-Up and Adjustment Procedure - Load 
Equalizing Hitch with Automatic Load 
Leveling Suspension System ........... 1 34 
High Altitude Towing ................. · · · · 1 34 
Trailer Lights ........................ · · .. 1 3 5 
Speed Control Operation ................. 1 35 
Maintenance ................. · · · · · · · · · · · · 135 
129
TRAILER TOWING 
TRAILER TOWING 
Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehi­cle's 
engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension. 
For your safety and the care of your vehicle, properly 
match the trailer-towing equipment to the trailer. 
Make sure that all towing equipment is properly and 
safely attached to your vehicle. For advice on trailer 
towing, consult a reputable trailer dealer or rental 
agency. 
Recommended Trailer Towing Equipment 
TOWING CLASS I·LIGHT Ill MEDIUM 
Gross Trailer Up to 2000 lbs. 50001bs. 
Weight (lbs.) (907 Kg) (2272 Kg) 
Maximum 200 lbs. 750 lbs. 
Tongue Load 
(lbs.) 
(91 Kg) (227 Kg) 
Hitch Load Load 
Design Carrying Equalizing 
Type Type 
Trailer·Tow Not Class Ill Pkg. 
Package Option Required Required 
WARNING- Towing trailers beyond the max­imum 
recommended gross trailer weight 
exceeds the limits of the vehicle and could re­sult 
in engine damage, transmission damage, 
loss of control and personal injury. 
130 
TRAILER TOWING 
Trailer towing significantly increases the powertrain 
load, particularly in hilly country and with heavier 
trailers. Under these condi t ions you may 
experience an excessive amount of shifting between 
OVERDRIVE and THIRD gears. Moving the sh ift se­lector 
to D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) will eliminate 
this condition plus provide better engine braking. 
When driving in less hilly country or with a lighter 
trailer load you may move the gearshift selector 
lever to @ (OVERDRIVE) without experiencing ex­cessive 
shifting. 
When descending steep grades, it is recommended 
to place the gearshift selector lever in the 1 (low) 
position to shift the transmission into second gear 
and provide additional engine braking. 
NOTE - An auxiliary automatic transmission oil 
cooler is recommended for any trailer-towing other 
than temporary rental cross-town towing. 
Vehicle Wiring Harness 
Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed Trailer 
Towing Package include a trailer wiring harness and 
a Trailer Towing Package wiring kit. This kit is pack­aged 
in a cardboard box (located in the luggage com­partment) 
and includes two jumper harnesses to 
connect your trailer wiring and also installation 
instructions. 
Hitches 
There are currently two types of hitches in common 
use - the simple load-carrying for light trailers and 
the load-equalizing (weight-distributing) for medium 
and heavy trailers. Choose a proper hitch and ball 
and make sure its location is compatible with that of 
the trailer. Slots have been provided for accom­modating 
a universal multi-clamp trailer hitch. Each 
slot is located on the upper surfaces of the rear 
bumper. Both are designed to accommodate a hitch 
capable of handling CLASS I trailer loads. 
131
TRAILER TOWING 
NOTE - An anti-sway device, built into the hitch or 
installed separately, is recommended for trailers 
heavier than 2000 pounds (907 kg). 
LOAD CARRYING HITCH - This type of hitch places 
the entire tongue load of the trailer on the rear 
wheels of your vehicle and therefore is limited for 
use with CLASS I trailers (up to 2000 lbs., 907 kg 
gross loaded weight and 200 lbs., 91 kg maximum 
tongue load). 
LOAD-EQUALIZING HITCH - This type of hitch dis­tributes 
the tongue load to all . four wheels of your 
vehicle and a portion of this weight back to the 
trailer wheels. These hitches are designed for tow­ing 
CLASS Ill trailers (up to 5000 lbs., 2270 kg gross 
loaded trailer weight and 750 lbs., 341 kg tongue 
load). 
CAUTION - Do not use single clamp bumper hitch­es 
or hitches which attach to the vehicle's axle. 
However, multi-clamp bumper hitches for 
occasional use of a rental trailer are acceptable, if 
properly attached. Follow towing instructions of a 
reputable rental agency. Never attach safety chains 
to the bumper. 
To avoid vehicle damage and handling difficulty, 
distribute the trailer load with 10 to 15% of the gross 
trailer weight on the hitch. Always tie the load 
down securely. 
Safety Chains 
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and 
trailer. This will avoid danger to road users if the 
hitch fails. Cross chains under the trailer tongue and 
allow enough slack fo r turn ing corners. Connect 
safety chains to the vehicle frame or hook retainers. 
Never attach safety chains to the bumper. For rental 
t railers, fol low rental agency instructions for proper 
hookup of safety chains. 
132 
TRAILER TOWING 
VehiclefTrailer Load 
WARNING - Never exceed either the gross 
axle weight ratings (GAWR front and rear) or 
the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). This 
is shown on the Safety Compliance Certifica­tion 
Label. Overloading can cause vehicle 
breakdown and damage and possible personal 
injury. 
CLASS I TRAILERS - To figure your vehicle load 
with a light duty trailer, add the actual weight of the 
driver, passengers, luggage, any extra equipment 
and the tongue load of your trailer. If additional 
equipment has been added to your vehicle since de­livery, 
include this weight in figuring your load. If 
you don't know the individual weights of the driver, 
passengers, luggage, extra equipment, and tongue 
load, use this method for calculating your total vehi­cle 
load. First, weigh your vehicle without the driver, 
passengers, and luggage. Then weigh your vehicle 
with the driver, passengers, luggage and trailer at­tached. 
Subtract the two weights to find out the ve­hicle 
load. If the vehicle load is greater than the 
rated load capacity shown on the tire decal, remove 
enough weight from the vehicle to bring the load 
down to the rated load capacity. 
CLASS II and Ill TRAILERS - To figure the vehicle 
load for CLASS II and Ill trailer towing, first weigh 
your vehicle without the driver, passengers, and lug­gage. 
Record this information. Now hook up the 
trailer to your vehicle and adjust the hitch spring bars 
until the vehicle and trailer are level. For load leveler 
equipped vehicles, see Hook-up instructions. With 
the trailer hooked to the vehicle, weigh the vehicle 
with the driver, passengers, and luggage. Record 
this figure. Now, subtract the weight of the vehicle 
without the trailer from the weight of the vehicle with 
the trailer. Compare this load to the allowable load 
for your vehicle which is shown on the tire decal. 
133
TRAILER TOWING 
Hook-Up and Adjustment Procedure - Load 
Equalizing Hitch with Automatic Load Leveling 
Suspension System 
For vehicles equipped with the optional load leveling 
suspension system, always use the following pro­cedure 
to hook up a trailer with a load equalizing 
hitch: 
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. With the ig­nition 
on, allow the vehicle to level automatically 
(approximately one to two minutes). 
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 
3. Measure the height of a reference point on the 
front and rear bumpers at the center of the 
vehicle. 
4. Attach trailer tq vehicle and adjust the hitch 
equalizer(s) so that the front bumper height is 0 
to 1/2 inch below the unloaded height. After ad­justment, 
the rear bumper should be no higher 
than in step 3. 
CAUTION - Adjusting an equalizing hitch on vehi­cles 
equipped with the optional load leveling system 
so that the rear bumper is at the same height or 
higher than it was unloaded could result in venting 
of air from the leveling system. This could cause 
premature wear in the load leveling shock 
absorbers. 
High Altitude Towing 
High altitudes reduce vehicle performance and tow­ing 
ability. For improved vehicle and braking 
performance reduce maximum gross trailer weight. 
134 
TRAILER TOWING 
Trailer Brakes 
WARNING - Separate trailer brakes of ade­quate 
size are required on trailers weighing 
over 1000 lbs. (454 kg) loaded weight. Do not 
couple a trailer hydraulic brake system directly 
to the vehicle brake system. Failure to heed 
these precautions may result in inadequate 
braking and possibly personal injury. 
Electric brakes, either manual or automatic, or surge 
type hydraulic trailer brakes are considered safe sys­tems 
if properly installed and adjusted as recom­mended 
by their manufacturer. Be sure your brakes 
conform to local and Federal regulations. 
Trailer Lights 
CAUTION - Do not connect a trailer lighting system 
directly to the lighting system of the vehicle. See 
your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental trailer 
agency for correct type of wiring and relays for your 
trailer and heavy-duty flashers. 
Speed Control Operation 
Towing a trailer may affect the operation of your ve­hicle's 
speed control, if so equipped. For additional 
information, refer to the Speed Control section of this 
guide. 
Maintenance 
Towing a trailer for long distances is considered to 
be "severe service" and your vehicle will require 
more frequent maintenance. Consult the Mainte­nance 
Schedule and Record Log booklet for addi­tional 
information. 
WARNING - Improper leveling of the vehicle 
or weight in excess of the amount shown on 
the tire decal can cause rapid tire wear or loss 
of vehicle control and possible injury to vehicle 
occupants. 
135
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
Maintenance Information . · .......... .... . . 138 
Emlsslons Control Systems .... . .. ....... 138 
Refill Capacities ....... ............. ..... 140 
Motorcraft Service Pa:rts ................. 141 
Lubricant §peclflcatlons .......•. ...•.. · .. . 141 
Electrical Clrcult Protection ........•.... . 144 
FUSeS .•••. ' .• .• -~ ......•......••••..... ·144 
Circuit Breakers .......•..... ·.: .... : ... 14 7 
Light Bu.lb Description .... ; ......... ·•~ ... 149 
137
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 
All maintenance information for your vehicle is pro­vided 
in a separate publication entitled 1988 
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND RECORD LOG. 
The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in the 
publication are required because they are consid­ered 
essential to the life and performance of your 
vehicle. 
Ford Motor Company recommends that you also per­form 
the Owner Maintenance Checks also listed in 
the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND RECORD LOG. 
These services are matters of day-to-day care that 
are important to the proper operation of your vehicle. 
In addition to the conditions described in the Owner 
Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual 
noise, vibration or other indication that your vehicle 
may need service and attend to it promptly. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and 
service parts conforming to Ford specifications. 
Motorcraft parts are designed and built for best per­formance 
in your vehicle. Using these parts for re­placement 
is your assurance that Ford-Built quality 
stays in your vehicle. 
Emissions Control Systems 
The catalytic converter in your vehicle changes most 
exhaust emissions into water vapor and carbon diox­ide 
and allows Ford Motor Company to develop set­tings 
which may result in better fuel economy and 
improve overall operation. To assure that the con­verter, 
as well as other emissions control devices and 
systems, operates effectively, you should use only 
unleaded fuel, and have the services listed in the 
Maintenance Schedule and Record Log booklet per­formed 
at the specified time and mileage/km inter­vals. 
You should also avoid running out of gasoline 
or turning off the ignition while the vehicle is in mo­tion 
especially at high speeds. 
138 
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
WARNING - Because of high engine compart­ment 
and exhaust system temperatures 
resulting from emissions equipment, do not 
park idle or operate your vehicle in dry grass 
or oiher dry ground cover where the possibility 
of ground fires exists. 
CAUTION - Do not make unauthorized modifi~a­tions 
to the engine or vehicle. Modifications causmg 
increased amounts of unburned fuel to reach the ex· 
haust system (including the catalytic converter) ~an 
significantly increase the temperature of the engme 
compartment and/or the exhaust system. 
Avoid driving your vehicle if it does not ~perate 
properly. If the engine diesels (more th~n .f1ve sec· 
onds of engine run-on after shut-off), m1sf1res, sur· 
ges stalls or backfires, see your dealer. Be alert for 
fluid leakage, odor, smoke, loss of oil pre~sure, or 
charge indicator or over temperature warmng. 
Emissions Control System Laws 
Federal law prohibits vehicle manufacturers, deale.rs 
and other persons engaged in the bu~iness of repal~­ing, 
servicing, selling, leasing, or tradmg motor .vehl· I cles, as well as fleet operators, from know1n~ly 
removing or rendering an emission~ .con.trol dev1ce 
or system inoperative. Further, mod1f1cat1ons of the 
emissions control system could create liability on the 
part of individual owners under the la~s .of some 
states. In Canada, modification of the em1ss1on~ con· 
trol system could create liability under applicable 
Federal or Provincial laws. 
Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) 
Emissions information appears on the VEer. deca.l .lo­cated 
on or near the engine. This decal. 1dent1f1es 
engine displacement and provides certam tune-up 
specifications. 
139
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
REFILL CAPACITIES (APPROXIMATE) 
ENGINE DISPLACEMENT IN METRIC 
LITERS AND CUBIC INCHES u.s. IMP. LITERS 
Cooling System-Quarts 
5.0l (302 CID) Engines 14.1 11.7 13.3 
Engine Oil (1) (2)-Quarts 4.0 3.3 3.8 
5.0l (302 CID) Engine 
-Quarts With Filter Change 5.0 4.2 4.7 
Fuel Tank Gallons 
5.0l (302 CID) Engine 18.0 15.0 66.1 
Power Steering (1)-Pints 
C-11 2.5 2.1 1.2 
Rear Axle-Pints 
(Conventional and Traction·lok) 
8.8" Ring Gear Axle 3.75 3.3 1.8 
Transmission (1)-Quarts · 12.3 10.2 11.6 
Windshield Washer Reservoir 
-Quarts 2.0 1.7 1.9 
(1)D1pst1ck Used To Determine Exact Fill Requirements. 
(2)5.0l Engmes Have Two Oil Drain Plugs. Both Must Be 
Removed To Insure Proper Oil Drain. 
SPECIFICATIONS 
Radiator Filler Cap 
Pounds Per Square Inch (psi) 16.0 
Kilopascals (kPa) 110.3 
140 
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
MOTORCRAFT SERVICE PARTS 
ENGINE 
5.0L EFI 
SPARK PLUG' 
AWSF·44C 
AIR FILTER 
FA·1032 
FUEL FILTER 
FG-800 
OIL FILTER 
FL·1A 
CRANKCASE EMISSION FILTER FA-678 
BATIERY 
BX-64A 
(1)Refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) decal for 
spark plug and gap specifications. 
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS 
The transmission and steering system in your vehicle 
are filled at the factory with high-quality, long-lasting 
lubricants or fluids that do not require periodic drain­ing 
and refilling except under severe duty conditions. 
However, the lubricant or fluid should be checked pe­riodically 
and refilled with the proper lubricant or 
fluid, meeting Ford technical specifications. See the 
Scheduled Maintenance Services section for instruc­tions 
on maintaining proper fluid levels. 
141
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
FORO FORD 
ITEM PART NO. PART NAME SPECIFICATION FORD FORD 
ITEM PART NO. PART NAME SPECIFICATION 
Hinges, Hood D?AZ-19584-A Polyethylene ESR-M1C159-A 
Latch and Grease 
Auxiliary 
Automatic XT-2-QDX Motorcraft Dexron"' -II 
Overdrive Dexron"' -II 
Catch Transmission Auto. Trans. Fluid 
Brake Master CGAZ-19542-A Ford Heavy ESA-M1C75-B 
Cylinder CGAZ-19542-B Duty Brake 
Auto. Trans. C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose ESA-M1C75-B 
Shift Linkage Long Life 
Fluid 
Front Suspen- C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose E5A-M1C75-B 
sion Lower Long Life 
Ball Joints Lubricant 
Front Wheel 
Bearing 
& Throttle Lubricant 
Valve (TV) 
Linkage 
Engine Oil (D9AZ-6731-A) Motorcraft Oil ES-E1ZE-6714-AA 
Filter FL-1A Filter Long- 
Steering C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose ESA-M1C75-B 
linkage Long life 
Life Type 
Engine Oil X0-5W30-QSP 5W30and ESE-M2C153-C 
Lubricant and 10W40Super and API SF o r 
Lock Cylinder DBAZ-19587-A Ford Lock ESB-M2C20-A 
X0-10W40-QSP Premium SF/CC or SF/CD 
X0-10W30-QP 10W30 and 
Lubricant and 20W40 Premium 
Rear Axle 
(Conv.) EOAZ-19580-A 
(Tractlon-Lok) Ford Hypoid (1) ESP-M2C154-A 
Gear Lube 
X0-20W40-QP SAE30 and 
X0-30-QSD 15W40Super 
and Duty 
X0-15W40-QSD 
Power Steer- XT-1-QF Motorcraft Auto ESW-M2C33-F 
ing (Pump Trans. Fluid 
Reservoir) Type F 
Engine E2FZ-19549-A Ford Cooling ESE-M97B44-A 
Coolant System Fluid 
Door 
Weathers trips COAZ-19553-A 
Silicone Lube ESR·M13P4-A 
(1) For Traction-Lok Add 4 oz. of C8AZ-19B546-A Friction Modifier 
142 
143
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION 
Your vehicle's electrical system is protected from 
overload damage by three types of circuit disconnect 
devices: fuses, fuse links and circuit breakers. Should 
an el~ctric~J co.mponent fail to operate, check the ap­propnate 
CirCUit protector. 
WARNING - Always replace a blown fuse or 
fuse link with the same rating as specified. 
Never replace with a higher amperage rating 
because severe wiring damage and possibly 
fire can result. 
Fuses 
The fuse panel is located to the left of the steering 
column in the instrument panel. To expose the fuse 
panel, remove the lower steering column finish pan­el 
by removing the four retaining screws. Fuses that 
open (blow) may be replaced, but will continue to 
open until the cause of the overload condition is 
corrected. 
Fuse Panel 
11 
144 
15 
NUM8ERS REFER TO FOLLOWING CHARTS 
6 
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
Fuses and Circuit Breakers 
OESCRIP· 
POSITION TION COLOR CIRCUIT PROTECTED 
1 15 AMP Light Stoplamps, Hazard Warnin? 
Fuse Blue Lamps, Speed Control 
Module, Cornering Lamp 
Relays 
2 8.25 AMP Windshield Wiper, Windshield 
C.B. Washer Pump, Interval · 
Wiper, Washer Fluid 
Level Warning 
3 Not Usable 
4 15 AMP Light Tail Lamps, Parking Lamps, 
Fuse Blue Side Marker, License 
Lamps, Instrument Cluster, 
Radio Illumination 
5 15 AMP Light Turn Signal Lamps, Backup 
Fuse Blue Lamps, Keyless Entry 
Module, Illuminated Entry 
Module, Electronic Day/Night 
Mirror 
6 20AMP Yellow AJC Clutch, Heated 
Fuse Backlite Switch, Decklid 
Release, Cornering Lamps, 
Electronic Chime Module, 
Speed Control Module, 
Electronic Compass, Overhead 
Console Mod., "C" Pillar Lites, 
Anti·Theft Mod. 
7 10 AMP 
Fuse 
Red Electric Heater Mirror 
8 15 AMP Light Courtesy Lamps, Key Warning 
Fuse Blue Buzzer, Illuminated Entry 
Module, Keyless Entry Module, 
Visor Mirror Lights, Remote 
Electric Mirrors, Truck Lamp, 
Hood Lamp, Electronic Radio 
Memory, Tripminder, 
Illumination Module, 
Glove 8ox Lamp 
145
PECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIE 
-POSIT ION DESCRIPT ION CO LORI CIRCUIT PROTECTED 
9 30 Amp. Light A TC Blower Motor 
Fuse Gre en 
10 Not 
Used 
11 20 Amp. 
Fuse 
Yellow Radio, Power Antenna 
Tape Player, Premium, 
Sound System 
12 20 Amp. 
C. B. 
Power Seats, Door Locks 
Keyless Entry System , 
Rear Cigar Lighters , 
I- 
13 5Amp. Tan ln~trument Cluster, Radio 
Fuse Climate Control and-Ash ' 
Tray Illumination Lamps 
Illuminated Outside The;- 
~ometer, Message Center 
.. eyboard 
14 20 Amp. 
C.B. 
Power Window Rei a 
. Moon Roof Relay, Fr~sh-to- 
Pass Relay 
15 10 Amp. Red Tail Lamps, Side 
Fuse Marker/Coach Lamp 
License Lamp, Lam~ Out 
I-Module, 
Trailer Tow Relay 
16 20 Amp. Yellow Horn, Front Cigar Lighter 
Fuse - - 
17 15 Amp. Light Electronic Cluster 
Fuse Blue Message Center Module - 
18 10 Amp 
Fuse 
Red Warning Indicator Lamps 
~~w Fuel Module, Auto , 
~P System, Electronic 
Chimes, Electronic 
I 
Mes_sage Center, Elec-tron1c 
Day/Night Mir 
Low 0"1 ror, 
For lhe Anii-Thell s I Level Relay 
the glove boll und!'~: ther• are three lnllne fuses located 
headlamp, tall tamps and crash pad: A 20 amp. ru ov.r 
I ~~tel hofn circuit and teed mark ... tamps wiring, • 20am" ,to PfOt.c:t 
protect mar1utr and Iaiita:!:~~~,: module, and a lOP~,:;e,~O.:'~ 
NOTE- The turn sl . 
. 
46 
fuse panel· the h gnat ll .. her Is located on 
panel beh.' u.rd rl .. her It located on the hont skle of the 
lnd tha turn signal fleshef. the back side of the fuse 
-~ ! 
I 
~ 
E#49'ili4MI"ii!i·R'i9Ui¥. 
1'1 
. 
' 
. 
I . 
Fuse Links 
Fuse links are circuit protection devices incorporated 
into the wiring harness for some electrical equip­ment. 
These links, like fuses, open when the circuit 
load exceeds their amperage rating. Fuse links maY 
be purchased from your Ford or Lincoln/Mercury 
dealer. 
Circuit Breakers 
Circuit breakers open when a circuit overload ex­ceeds 
their rated current amperage. Once open, the 
cycling type used for windshield wipers and head­lights 
will automatically reset after a certain length of 
time. If the overload which caused them to open is 
still present in the circuit, they will continue to open 
and reset until the overload is cleared. The non-cy­cling 
type used for power windows and power door 
locks, will stay open once it has been tripped until 
the overload is removed. 
Circuit Breaker and Fuse Link Chart 
CIRCUIT 
PROTECTION 
CIRCUIT 
RATING 
LOCATION 
INTEGRAL 
HEADLAMPS 
AND HIGH 
22 AMP 
WITH 
BEAM 
CIRCUIT 
HEADLAMP 
INDICATOR LIGHT 
BREAKER SWITCH 
POWER 
20 AMP 
ATTACHED TO 
WINDOWS AND 
CIRCUIT 
STARTER 
POWER MOON 
BREAKER RELAY 
ROOF 
POWER 
20 AMP 
FUSE PANEL 
WINDOW RELAY 
CIRCUIT 
BREAKER 
~-~! 
<: 
k 
I 
147
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
Circuit Breakers 
Circuit 
Protection 
Circuit Rating Location 
Trailer Towing No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Brakes Fuse Link at Starter 
Lights No. 16 Gauge Motor Relay 
Fuse Link 
Load Circuit No. 16 Gauge 
Fuse Link 
Battery No. 12 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Charge Load Fuse Link at Starter 
Ci rcuit No. 16 Gauge Motor Relay 
Fuse Link 
EEC/EFI Module No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Fuse Link at Starter 
No. 20 Gauge Motor Relay 
Fuse Link 
EFI Fuel Pump No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Fuse Link at Starter 
Motor Relay 
Windshield 8.25 Amp Fuse Panel 
Wipers Circuit 
Breaker 
Power Seats 20 Amp Fuse Panel 
and Power Circuit 
Door Locks Breaker 
Electric No. 16 Gauge Engine Compt. 
Defroster Fuse Link Wiring at 
(Backlite) Feed Starter Relay 
Circuit 
Load Circuit Two No. 16 Engine Compt. 
Gauge Fuse Wiring at 
Link Starter Relay 
Load Leveling No. 16 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Fuse Link at Starter 
Motor Relay 
Hood Lamp No. 20 Gauge Wiring Assembly 
Message Fuse Link at Starter 
Center Motor Relay 
lgnit1on Two No. 20 Wiring Assembly 
Circuit Gauge Fuse at Left Hand 
Links Fender Apron 
148 
SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 
LIGHT BULB DESCRIPTION 
Trade 
Number 
Headlamps-Hi & Lo .... .... .......................... H4656 • 
Headlamps-High Beam .............. . .. ••..... . ....... H4651 
Front Park & Turn Signals ........ . •................ .... 1157NA 
StopfTurn Signal and Tail Lamps ... ..•...................... 1157 
High Mount Stoplamp (2) ..........• • ......• •.............. 912 
Rear Side Marker ....... . .. . . .•.. •• ..........• • ..... ..... 194 
License Plate Lamp ... . ... . ............. ........ .... • ..... 168 
Door Courtesy Lights .. . ............... ... ......... ... .. 212.2 
Glove Box Light .. .. . ... .. .•. . •• .. ......... •• •............ 194 
Back-up Lights ..... . .. .. . . ..• ... . .. . ......... . .... . .... 1156 
Front Cornering Lamp ........ . • . . ........................ 1156 
Front Side Marker Lamp ........ .... . .. ..................... 194 
Ashtray Light (Armrest) .. .. ..... .. ..... . ....... . ....... .. 1893 
Ashtray Light (Instrument Panel) ... ... .. ...... .. ....... ... 1815 
Headlight Nomenclature ............. ..... .....•......... 1816 
Brake Warning Light .. . .................... . .. . . •... . . .... . 37 
Low Fuel Warning Light ..... ... ... .. ........... ... ......... 37 
Alternator Warning Light .. ............ . ..• •.......• •. ...... 37 
High Beam Indicator Light ....... . •• •. • ... . • .•...•.• •. ..... 194 
Turn Signals Indicator Light ...... •• • • •• • • •••••.....•...... 194 
ACC Control Panel Lights .. ......•.. ... • ........•.. •. ..... 161 
Seat belt Warning Light .. .. ...... •••.... .... ......... . ..... 37 
Fuel Gauge ..... ...... .. ........... ..................... 194 
Electric Defroster Light ..... . ... .. ....................... 2162 
Dome Light .................. • •. . ....................... 912 
Map Lights (2) .... .... . ........... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 105·2 I Visor Vanity Mirror ..... . ...................... . ......... 4·168 
Radio Pilot Lights .... ............... ..................... . • • 
Electronic Radio Graphics Illumination ......... . ............ N/A 
Stereo Indicator Light ............ .......... .. ....... ... .. . 
Premium Sound System Indicator Light . .......... EOVF18C622AA 
Premium Sound System Graphics Bulb .... .. ....... B9FM 18843A 
Speedometer and PRN @ D1 Illumination ................. 194 
Coach Lamp Bulb .................. ..........•......... . . 161 
Clock Illumination ..... .... .. ..... . .. . • .................. 194 
Engine Warning Light .................... .... ............. 194 
Reading Light and Courtesy Lights ............... . ......... 912 
Luggage Compartment Light ......... ............ .......... 89 
Dual Floorwell Lights .............. . . ............... .... 906·4 
Instrument Panel Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 89 
Autolamp Nomenclature ............................ ..... 1816 
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • • • • . .... 1445 
Engine Compartment Lamps.................... . . . . . .... 912 
·Substitution of low beam headlamp bulbs other than same as 
original equipment may result in a false warning, or no Headlamp 
Burnout warning from the message center. 
• • Replaceable at Ford authorized radio service centers. 
149
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Fueling .................................. 152 
Notice About Mlsfuellng ........... ....... 153 
Fuel .. .... ............ ......... .... ...... 153 
Quality ...... ........................... 1 54 
Anti-Knock Index (Octane Rating) ...... .. . 155 
Gasohol and Alcohol/Gasoline Blends ..... 1 56 
Checking Under the Hood .......... .. .... 1 57 
Opening the Hood ... .... ..... ... ....... 1 57 
Engine Compartment Service Points ...... 158 
Engine 011 ............................... 1 59 
Checking Oil Level ...................... 1 59 
Performance Designation . .......... .. ... 1 60 
Oil Identification Symbol ................. 1 60 
Viscosity (Thickness) .................... 1 61 
Changing Oil and Filter ............. . .... 1 63 
Engine Cooling System .................. 1 6 3 
Checking Coolant Level ............ . .... 163 
Coolant ......... .. ................ .. ... 165 
Freezing Protection .. .............. .. ... 165 
Coolant Drain and Flush ............. . ... 1 66 
Coolant Refill Procedure ................. 1 66 
Checking Hoses ........................ 1 6 71 
'D'ansmlsslon Fluid Level Check .......... 167 
Brake Fluid .......................... . ... 169 
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 170 
Suspension and Steering ................. 1 71 
High Mount Brake Lamp (Rear Window and 
Lens Cleaning, Bulb Replacement) ...... 1 71 
Appearance Protection ................... 1 7 2 
Exterior Cleaning and Care ........ . .... . 1 7 2 
Interior Cleaning and Care ..... .... ...... 1 7 5 
151
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
FUELING 
Fuel Tank Filler Opening and Cap 
The fuel tank filler opening is located on the left 
quarter panel. To remove the cap, turn counterclock­wise 
until cap is free. Swing tether-retained cap asi­de 
for fuel filling. To install cap, place it into the fuel 
filler opening and turn clockwise. A clicking sound 
indicates the cap is ratcheting and completely 
installed. 
WARNING - Use of an aftermarket fuel filler 
cap other than an authorized Motorcraft ser­vice 
part or the equivalent is not recommended 
and could result in damage to the fuel system 
or cause improper system operation due to 
pressure or vacuum buildup, and may compro­mise 
the performance of the fuel system in the 
event of a collision. 
The fuel filler pipe opening is designed smaller to 
prevent accidental filling with other than unleaded 
fuel: 
Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehi­cle. 
Any type of fuel, if spilled on painted surfaces, 
may dull or soften the paint. 
WARNING - Fuel may be under pressure. 
Always remove fuel cap carefully and slowly. tf 
fuel is leaking from the cap, or if a hissing 
sound is heard, do not attempt to remove the 
cap. tf these precautions are not followed, fuel 
may spray and cause personal injury. 
152 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
NOTICE TO VEHICLE OWNERS ON MISFUELING 
THE RIGHT FUEL ADDS TO YOUR DRIVING 
ECONOMY 
Vehicles equipped with catalytic converters must use 
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY (as specified on the instru­ment 
cluster and inside the fuel filler door). 
Using the right fuel can save you money because: 
• Use of leaded fuel shortens the life of spark plugs, 
exhaust systems and EGR valves and will damage 
the catalytic converter on your vehicle. 
• Independent studies have estimated that use of un­leaded 
fuel can actually SAVE you money in the 
long run by reducing frequent maintenance and 
parts replacement. 
• Your warranties may be invalidated if malfunction 
or damage to your vehicle is due to use of the 
wrong fuel. 
• Current and future state inspection programs, 
using more sophisticated testing methods, will 
make detection of misfueling easier. Under these 
circumstances, you may be required by law to 
make costly repairs at your own expense. 
153
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Therefore, fuel your vehicle in accordance with 
Ford's recommended specifications to help reduce 
long-term operating costs. 
• Federal law prohibits gasoline retailers and certain 
others, and their employees, from dispensing lead­ed 
gasoline into any motor vehicle which is labeled 
"Unleaded Fuel Only" or which is equipped with a 
gasoline tank filler inlet restrictor. 
• G~soline pum~s which dispense unleaded gas­olrne 
are requrred by Federal regulations to be 
labeled with the words "Unleaded Gasoline." 
Such pumps are also equipped with specially sized 
nozzles to fit the gasoline tank filler inlet on your 
vehicle. 
Fuel Quality 
Usi.ng ~ high quality unleaded gasoline will help 
~arntarn the driveability, fuel economy and emis­srons 
performance of your vehicle. A properly formu­lated 
gasoline will be comprised of well refined 
hydrocarbons and chemical additives and will per­form 
the following functions: 
• Minimize varnish, lacquer, and other induction sys­tem 
deposits. 
• Prevent gum formation or other deterioration dur­ing 
storage. 
• Protect fuel tank and other fuel system compo­nents 
from corrosion or degradation. 
• Pr~vide the correct seasonally and geographically 
~d)usted_ volatility. This will provide easy starting 
rn the wrnter and avoid vapor lock in the summer. 
In addition, the fuel will be free of water, debris and 
other impurities. ' 
154 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Some driveability deterioration on multi-port elec­tronically 
fuel injected vehicles can be traced to 
continuous use of certain gasolines which may have 
insufficient amounts of detergent additives to pro­vide 
adequate deposit control protection. We recom­mend 
that you select a gasoline with detergents 
when you purchase your fuel. While not all mar­keters 
of desirable gasolines choose to advertise 
their cleaning capabilities or adequacy for use in fuel 
injected vehicles, some do; the presence of such ad­vertising 
may assist you in locating such a desirable 
gasoline. If you are unsure of the qualities of the 
gasoline you are purchasing, ask your service station 
attendant. If the performance of your vehicle deterio­rates, 
consult your dealer or other qualified 
technician. 
Anti-Knock Index (Octane Rating) 
Your vehicle has been designed to operate using un­leaded 
gasoline with an (R + M)/2 minimum anti­knock 
index rating of 87. Federal regulations require 
that each retail gasoline dispensing pump must dis­play 
a label bearing the minimum anti-knock index 
rating. 
Use of unleaded gasoline with anti-knock index rat­ings 
lower than 87 can cause persistent, heavy spark 
knock, which can lead to engine damage. If your en­gine 
knocks heavily when you use gasoline with an 
anti-knock index rating of 87 or higher, or if you hear 
continuous spark knock while maintaining cruising 
speeds on level roads, consult your dealer or other 
qualified technician. 
You may notice occasional, light spark knock when 
accelerating or driving up hills. This should not 
cause concern because the maximum fuel economy 
is obtained under conditions of occasional light spark 
knock. Gasoline with an anti-knock index rating high­er 
than 87 may be used, but is not necessary for 
proper operation. 
155
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Gasohol and Alcohol/Gasoline Blends 
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (grain al­cohol), 
is available in some areas. Ford vehicles 
should operate satisfactorily on gasohol blends con­taining 
no more than 10% ethanol by volume and 
having an anti-knock index of 87 or higher. 
In some cases, methanol (wood alcohol) or other al­cohols 
may be added to gasoline. Ford vehicles 
should operate satisfactorily on blends containing up 
to 5% methanol by volume when cosolvents and 
other necessary additives are used. If not properly 
formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corro­sion 
inhibitors, such blends may cause driveability 
problems or damage emissions and fuel system ma­terials. 
Insufficient data are available to insure the 
suitability of all methanol/gasoline blends at this 
time. To avoid jeopardizing your vehicle warranty or 
incurring unnecessary repair costs, DO NOT USE 
blends containing more than 5% methanol by vol­ume, 
or blends that do not contain cosolvents and 
corrosion inhibitors. 
If you are uncertain as to the presence of alcohols in 
the gasoline 'you are purchasing, check the label on 
the pump or ask the station attendant. 
CAUTION - Discontinue use of any gasohol or alco­hol/ 
gasoline blend if driveability or fuel system 
problems occur. Do not use such fuels unless they 
are UNLEADED. 
156 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
CHECKING UNDER THE HOOD 
Opening the Hood 
Release the hood latch from inside your vehicle by 
pulling the HOOD release handle under the left end 
of the instrument panel. Then, to raise the hood, 
step to the front of the vehicle. Release the auxiliary 
catch between the hood and the center of the adja­cent 
panel, and lift the hood until the counter bal­anced 
hinges hold it open. When you close the 
hood, make sure the hood latches securely. 
WARNING - To avoid the possibility of per­sonal 
injury, do not release the hood latch until 
the gearshift selector lever has been securely 
latched in P (PARK), the parking brake has 
been fully set, the engine has been turned off, 
and the key has been removed from the igni­tion 
lock cylinder. 
H it is necessary to work under the hood with 
the engine running, be sure that the gearshift 
selector lever is securely latched in P (PARK) 
and the parking brake is fully set. Unexpected 
and possibly sudden vehicle movement may 
occur if these precautions are not taken. Do 
not permit any clothing, such as neckties or 
handkerchiefs, near the engine or radiator fan. 
They can become entangled in moving parts 
and result in damage to the vehicle or personal 
injury. Also remove watches, bracelets, and 
rings. 
157
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
To avoid the risk of fire and personal injury, do 
not start the engine with the air cleaner 
removed. 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT SERVICE POINTS 
3 ''9 
1. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 
' 2. POWER STEERING DIPSTICK/FILL 
3. BATTERY 
4. WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR 
5, RADIATOR CAP ... .. . ' 
6. COOLANT RECOVERY RESERVOIR " 
. 7. AIR CLEANER 
S. DISTRIBUTOR 
lt ENGINE OIL FILLER CAP 
,. ·10. BRAKE MASTER CYUNOtfi--FLUID RESERVOIR 
11. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK 
12. ENGINE OIL FILTER . 
158 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
SELF SERVICE POINTERS 
If you choose to do your own fueling, you should 
also perform the following simple maintenance rou­tines. 
This extra effort will save you additional mon­ey 
and will contribute to the driving efficiency of your 
vehicle. 
• Check the engine oil level at every refueling stop. 
• Clean windshield, outside mirrors and headlights. 
• Check windshield washer fluid. 
• Check tires for excessive or worn edges. 
• Check the tire pressure at least monthly. 
These procedures require only a tire gauge, a rag, an 
oil can spout and windshield washer fluid. 
ENGINE OIL 
Checking Oil Level 
It is normal to add some oil between oil changes. 
Have your engine oil level checked or check it your­self 
at every refueling stop. 
The amount of oil an engine may use will vary with 
the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal 
variation from one engine to another of the same or 
different size, especially during the first 7,500 miles. 
Heavy duty operation (such as t rai ler towing, short 
trips and severe loading and usage) may use more 
oil. 
159
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
To check the engine oil level, park your vehicle on 
level ground and turn engine off. Protecting yourself 
from engine heat, pull out the dipstick. Wipe it clean 
and reinsert fully. Pull the dipstick out and check 
level. Keep the oil level above the ADD mark on the 
dipstick by adding oil as required. Do not overfill. 
Performance Designation 
To help achieve proper engine performance and du­rability, 
use only engine lubricating oils of the proper 
quality. These oils also help promote engine efficien­cy 
which results in improved fuel economy. 
Ford recommends that you use Motorcraft oil or an 
equivalent oil that meets Ford Specification ESE­M2C153- 
C. Use API (American Petroleum Institute) 
Categories SF, or SF/CC, or SF/CD only. 
Engine oils with improved fuel economy properties 
(energy conserving) are currently available. They of­fer 
the potential for small improvements in vehicle 
fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel burned 
to overcome engine friction. Often these improve­ments 
are difficult to measure in your everyday driv­ing, 
but over the course of a year can offer significant 
cost and energy savings. These oils are recom­mended 
to be used in conjunction with the recom­mended 
API Category. 
Oil Identification Symbol 
160 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
A symbol has been developed by the API to help you 
select the proper engine oil. It should be included on 
the oil container you purchase. The top section of 
the symbol shows the oil performance by the API 
designation. This should match the Maintenance 
Guide recommendation. The center section will 
show the SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) vis­cosity 
grade. The lower section will show "Energy 
Conserving" only if the oil has proven fuel saving 
capabilities. 
Oil Viscosity (Thickness) 
The engine in your new vehicle has been factory 
filled with SAE 10W-30 oil. Ford recommends that 
you use SAE 10W-30 or SAE 10W-40 oil when outside 
temperatures remain above 0°F ( - 18°C). If tem­peratures 
consistently remain below 0°F ( - 18°C), 
Ford recommends that you use SAE 5W-30 oil. 
161
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Oil Viscosity Recommendations (SAE Grades) 
162 
r~ T -- --· 
r6 +6r-- - 
+5 +40_- - .... I I SAE30 
0 +3r- t----f r--- 
-7 +20 I ,-- 
- 12 +10 _ 
- -iAe 20~·40 
SAE20W·50 I ------S-AE .1..5 W-40 
-10 0 I -29 -20 I t!!i. ,--~ , 
:::..; SAE 5W·30 
Outside 
Temperature 
SAE 10W·30 
SAE 10W·40 
(Recommended) 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Changing Oil and Filter 
Change engine oil and filter according to the Sched­uled 
Maintenance Charts. 
Use a Motorcraft FL-1A Long-Life Oil Filter or equiv­alent 
which meets Ford Specification ES-E1ZE-6714- 
AA. This filter protects your engine by filtering 
harmful, abrasive, or sludgy particles without clog­ging 
up or blocking the flow of oil to vital engine 
parts. 
NOTE- Your vehicle is equipped with two oil drain 
plugs. When changing the on, both plugs must be 
removed to completely drain the old oil. Otherwise, 
the crankcase may be overfilled when new oil is 
added. 
WARNING - Continuous contact with USED 
motor oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory 
mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap 
and water. 
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM 
The cooling system is of the coolant recovery type. 
Coolant in the system expands with heat and over­flows 
into the coolant recovery reservoir. When the 
system cools down, coolant is drawn back into the 
radiator. 
Walter C. Avrea, the owner of patents 3,601,181 and 
RE 27,965 has granted Ford Motor Company rights 
with respect to cooling systems covered by these 
patents. 
Checking Coolant Level 
Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reser­voir 
at least once a month using the following 
guidelines: 
163
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
• Do not remove the radiator cap to perform a rou­tine 
coolant level check. Instead, inspect the 
coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir as 
follows: 
• hot engine - maintain coolant at or above the 
"FULL HOT" mark. 
• cold engine - maintain coolant at or above the 
"FULL COLD" mark. 
If level is low, add a 50/50 mixture of specified cool­ing 
system fluid and water to the coolant recovery 
reservoir. Recheck the coolant level after one or two 
occasions of vehicle use. 
If you have to add coolant more than once a month, 
or if you have to add more than one quart at a time, 
have your dealer check the cooling system for leaks. 
WARNING - Never remove the radiator cap 
under any circumstances while the engine is 
operating. Switch off the engine and wait until 
it has cooled. Even then, use extreme care 
when removing the cap from the radiator. 
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it 
slowly to the first stop. Step back while the 
pressure is released from the cooling system. 
When you are sure all the pressure has been 
released, press down on the cap - still with a 
cloth - turn and remove it. Stand clear of the 
radiator opening. Hot coolant may splash out. 
Failure to follow these instructions could result 
in serious personal injury from hot coolant or 
steam blow out and/or damage to the cooling 
system or engine. 
WARNING - Do not use radiator coolant or 
antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. 
Radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer 
reservoir can severely affect visibility when 
sprayed on the windshield. 
164 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Whenever radiator coolant level checks are made, 
check condition of radiator cap rubber seal. Make 
sure it is clean and free of any dirt particles. Rinse 
off with water, if necessary. When replacing cap on 
radiator, also make sure radiator filler neck seat is 
clean. Check that overflow hose is not kinked or cut. 
WARNING - Continuous contact with USED motor 
oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect 
your skin by washing with soap and water. 
Coolant 
Whenever you add coolant use equal parts of water 
and Ford Cooling System Fluid E2FZ-19549-A (in Can­ada, 
Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or equivalent that meets 
Ford Specification ESE-M97844-A. Do not use alco­hol 
or methanol antifreeze, or mix them with the 
specified coolant. 
Since the coolant increases boil protection in sum­mer 
and contains rust/corrosion inhibitors, you 
should leave it in year around. Plain water may be 
used in an emergency, but replace it with the spec­ified 
coolant as quickly as possible to avoid damage 
to the system. 
NOTE- This vehicle is equipped with an aluminum 
radiator and use of the proper coolant is essential for 
corrosion protection. Only coolants which meet Ford 
Specification ESE-M97844-A should be used. 
CAUTION - Use of concentrations less than 30% 
(approximately two liters) coolant concentrate 
(4°F/ - 16°C freezing point) may cause radiator and/or 
engine damage. 
Freezing Protection 
The factory-installed solution of Ford Cooling System 
Fluid and water will protect your vehicle to - 35°F 
(- 37°C). 
165
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Check the freezing protection rating of the coolant at 
least once a year, just before winter. Maintain a pro­tection 
rating consistent with minimum expected am­bient 
temperatures in your driving area or, at least 
- 20°F ( - 29°C) to prevent engine damage as a result 
of freezing and to assure proper engine operating 
temperature. 
Coolant Drain and Flush 
Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain and 
flush of the coolant system can be found in the Car 
Shop Manual. Following these recommended pro­cedures 
will insure that the specified coolant level 
and 50/50 mixture of cooling system fluid and water 
is maintained. 
Coolant Refill Procedure 
When the entire cooling system is drained and re­filled, 
the following procedure should be used to 
insure a complete fill: 
• Remove radiator cap. 
• With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50 mixture 
of recommended cooling system fluid and water 
until the radiator is full. 
• Reinstall the radiator cap to the pressure relief 
position by installing the cap to the fully installed 
position, and then backing off to the first stop. 
• Start and idle engine until the radiator upper hose 
is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and 
coolant is flowing through the entire system). 
• Immediately shut off engine. Cover cap com­pletely 
with a thick cloth and cautiously remove 
radiator cap and add a 50/50 mixture of recom­mended 
cooling system fluid and water until radi­ator 
is full. 
• Reinstall the radiator cap securely. 
166 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
• Fill the coolant recovery reservoir, through the 
small opening at top, with a 50/50 mixture of spec­ified 
cooling system fluid and water to the FULL­HOT 
mark written on the coolant reservoir. Check 
that reservoir hose is not kinked. 
• Check for leaks at the draincock and block plug. 
• Recheck the coolant level, using the recommended 
procedure, after one or two occasions of vehicle 
use. 
Checking Hoses 
Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and hose 
connections for deterioration, leaks, and loose hose 
clamps as specified in the maintenance schedule. 
Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent 
as necessary. 
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL CHECK 
CAUTION - Vehicle should not be driven if fluid is 
below the "DO NOT DRIVE" hole with the outside 
temperature above 50°F (10°C). (See ADDING 
FLUID.) 
Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to 
check your automatic transmission fluid. However, 
in the unlikely event that transmission slippage oc­curs, 
the fluid level should be checked and filled to 
the proper level. Overfilling can cause foaming or 
loss of fluid from fill tube or vent. 
167
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Checking Fluid Level 
Transmission fluid expands as its temperature rises. 
Therefore, it is preferable to check the fluid level at 
normal operating temperature (after approximately 
20 miles (32 km) vehicle operation). However, if nec­essary, 
the fluid level can be checked at room 
temperature. 
00 NOT FLUID LEVEL AT 
DMRAIVER K OPERA liNG TEMPt;'RATURE 66"C TO we,,,.., TO,,..~ 
ct... ,<0 b;,;1 DONT ADD ~ 
"'7 
FLUID LEVEL AT 
ROOM TEMPERATURE 
21 'C TO 35"C (70•F TO 95.F) 
To check the fluid level, first park on a level surface 
and set the parking brake fully. Start engine, apply 
foot service brake and move the gearshift selector 
lever through all of the gear selections allowing suffi­cient 
time in each position to engage. Then make 
sure you engage the gearshift selector lever in the P 
(PARK) latch position and reset the parking brake 
fully. Keep the engine running. Secure loose clothing 
and remove jewelry. Protecting yourself against en­gine 
heat, wipe off the dipstick cap. Pull the dipstick 
out. wipe it clean and push it all the way back into 
the tube, making sure it is fully seated. Pull the dip­stick 
out and check the level. 
At normal operating temperature (approximately 20 
miles (32 km) of vehicle operation). the fluid level on 
the dipstick should be within the crosshatched area. 
At room temperature, the level should be between 
the holes on the stick. If the vehicle has not been op­erated 
for some time and outside temperature is be­low 
50°F (10°C), the fluid must be warmed by running 
the engine. 
168 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Adding Fluid 
NOTE - If the vehicle has been operated for an ex­tended 
period at high speed or in city traffic in hot 
weather, or the vehicle is being used to pull a trailer, 
to obtain an accurate reading the fluid has to cool, 
usually about 30 minutes after engine has been 
turned off. 
Before adding fluid, be sure that the correct type will 
be used. The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. 
If it is necessary to add fluid, add in half pint (.25 I) 
increments through the filler tube to bring the level 
to the correct point indicated on the dipstick. If over­fill 
occurs, excess fluid must be removed. 
IMPORTANT: The fluid level indication on the dip­stick 
will be different at operating temperature and 
room temperature. For the correct fluid level reading 
on the dipstick, follow the appropriate instructions 
stated previously. When dipstick is installed, make 
sure it is fully seated. 
CAUTION - If vehicle has been operated for an ex­tended 
period at high speed, or in city traffic in hot 
weather, or the vehicle is being used to pull a trailer, 
to obtain an accurate reading, the fluid has to cool, 
usually about 30 minutes after engine has been 
turned off. 
BRAKE FLUID 
To check the fluid level, carefully clean and remove 
master cylinder reservoir cap. The fluid level should 
be within 1/4 inch (6.4mm) of the top of the reservoir. 
If the level is low, top off. Add only a DOT 3 brake 
fluid meeting Ford Specifications ESA-M6C25-A such 
as Ford Heavy Duty Brake Fluid. 
169
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
BRAKE MASTER 
CYLINDER RESERVOIR 
The level will decrease with accumulated mileage. 
This is a normal condition associated with wear of 
disc brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively 
low, have the brake system inspected. 
WARNING- To avoid the possibility of brake 
failure which could result in property damage 
or personal injury, do not allow the master cyl­inder 
to run dry. Never reuse brake fluid that 
has been drained from the hydraulic system or 
fluid that has been allowed to stand in an open 
container for an extended period of time. 
POWER STEERING FLUID 
Checking Fluid Level 
Before checking the fluid level, let the engine run un­til 
it has reached normal operating temperature. 
With the engine at idle, turn the wheel back and forth 
several times to get any air out of the steering sys­tem. 
Then turn off the engine and check the fluid 
level on the dipstick. The level must be in the FULL 
HOT range on the dipstick. Use proper temperature 
range on dipstick when checking fluid level. Do not 
overfill. Use only a fluid that meets Ford Specifica­tion 
ESW-M2C33-F (Type F) such as Motorcraft Auto­matic 
Transmission and Power Steering Fluid Type F 
or equivalent. Whenever the dipstick is inserted, al­ways 
make sure it is properly seated and locked. 
170 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
CAUTION - Do not operate the vehicle for pro­longed 
periods with a low power steering pump 
fluid level to avoid damage to the power steering 
pump. 
SUSPENSION AND STEERING 
Inspecting for Road Damage 
The suspension and steering linkage in your vehicle 
should be inspected periodically for abnormal 
looseness and damaged seals. Also be alert for any 
changes in steering action. Hard steering, excessive 
free play or unusual sounds when turning or parking 
indicate a need for inspection or servicing. 
Rear Shock Absorber Load Leveling 
Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic 
load leveling rear shock absorber system. This sys­tem 
maintains the vehicle height at a constant level 
by automatically adding air to or releasing air from 
the shock absorbers in response to changes in vehi­cle 
loads. 
HIGH MOUNT STOPLAMP (REAR WINDOW AND 
LENS CLEANING, BULB REPLACEMENT) 
Your vehicle is equipped with an interior high mount 
stoplamp which is mounted on the trim panel at the 
centerline of the rear window. The stoplamp must 
be removed using the following procedure in order 
to clean the rear window, clean the stoplamp lens, or 
service the stoplamp bulb. 
Removal: 
1. Remove the stoplamp button with a thin blade 
tool. 
2. Remove retaining screw with a Phillips 
screwdriver. 
3. Slide stoplamp assembly away from the rear win­dow 
to disengage hold-down tabs and then lift 
assembly up and over retainer bracket. 
171
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
HIGH MOUNT 
STOPLAMP 
STOPLAMP 
COVER BUITON"' 
RETAINING ~ 
SCREW~ 
~--~~ / 
HOLD-DOWN TABS 
ON RETAINER 
BRACKET 
/ 
/ 
/ 
Installation: 
1. P~sition stoplamp assembly over retainer bracket 
With h~ld-down tabs lined up with mating tabs 
on retamer bracket. 
2. Push downward and toward rear window glass to 
engage tabs. 
3. Install retaining screw securely. 
4. Press stoplamp cover button in place. 
APPEARANCE PROTECTION 
Washing and Polishing 
Protect_ the exterior with frequent washing, including 
unders1de areas. Use Ford Wash and Wax Concen­t~ 
ate, or equivalent, diluted to the proper concentra­tion 
follo~ed by a rinse with clear cold water. Do not 
wash veh1c_le with hot water, in the direct rays of the 
sun, or wh1le sheet metal is hot. 
172 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Polish paint and bright metal with Ford Custom Sil­icone 
Gloss, Ford Custom Auto Wax, Ford Custom 
Cream Auto Wax, or equivalent to remove harmful 
deposits and provide added protection to body sur­faces, 
body hardware, and chrome and aluminum 
parts. Touch up nicks and scratches with proper 
paint. Do not use steel wool, abrasive type cleaner, 
gasoline or strong detergents containing highly al­kaline 
or caustic agents on chrome-plated materials, 
aluminum wheels, head lamps, bumpers or anodized 
aluminum parts because you may damage the pro­tective 
coating and cause discoloration or paint 
deterioration. 
Vehicles subjected to airborne pollen, insect drop­pings, 
bird droppings and other organic matter, 
especially those vehicles subjected to this matter that 
are exposed to high temperatures and sunshine, 
should be washed as often as necessary to keep 
them free of this organic matter. Similar precautions 
should be taken where a vehicle may be exposed to 
chemical industrial fallout. Failure to do so may re­sult 
in damage to the exterior surfaces. 
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a 
defect in paint materials or workmanship and there­fore 
is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, be­lieves 
that that continual improvement in customer 
satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford 
has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to 
the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by 
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 
miles of purchase, whichever comes first. 
Vinyl Top and Padded Moulding Care 
Rinse the vinyl to remove loose dirt and grime. 
Exceptionally dirty areas should be pre-cleaned with 
Ford Triple Clean, Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner, or 
mild soap solution. Next, apply Ford Vinyl Hardtop 
Cleaner and Reconditioner, or equivalent, following 
label directions. 
173
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
To avoid damage to the vinyl top and mouldings, use 
only an approved Ford cleaner, or equivalent. Do not 
use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive material or 
cleaners. 
Hot waxes applied by automatic car washes can af­fect 
the cleanability of vinyl material. 
Cambria Cloth Care and Cleaning Procedure 
The Cambria cloth cover material used on some of 
the optional carriage roof treatment tops is a durable 
material that will, with proper care, retain its ap­pearance 
characteristics for a long period of time. 
This cover can be subjected to commercial car wash­ing 
without adversely affecting the appearance. 
The cover should be washed frequently with a mild 
soap solution and cold or lukewarm water and a soft­bristled 
brush. Rinse the top with clean water mak­ing 
sure to remove all traces of soap. If the c~ver is 
severely soiled, a mild cleaning agent such as Ford 
Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent may be used. 
Use only an approved Ford Cleaner, or equivalent. 
Rinse the entire top with water, then apply the clean­er 
on a small area (approximately two square feet). 
Scrub the area lightly with a soft-bristled brush 
adding water as necessary. Remove the cleaner and 
water with sponge and then rinse the balance of the 
cleaner off with water. Use a liberal amount of water 
to prevent the cleaner from running down onto the 
body finish and drying. This could cause streaks in 
the paint finish. 
~o waxes, polishes, sealers or "dressing-type" mate­nals 
should be applied to the top material. Under no 
circumstances should grease and wax removers, 
thinners 'or solvents be used. 
Underbody 
Flush the complete underside of vehicle frequently. 
Keep body drain holes unplugged. Inspect for road 
damage. 
174 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Rustproofing Compounds 
The flexible plastic and/or rubberlike parts and rigid 
plastic bumper components may be damaged by af­termarket 
rustproofing compounds. If rustproofing 
overspray, drips, or runs are allowed to remain, 
these parts may exhibit surface swelling, distortion 
or deterioration. If the car has been aftermarket rust­proofed, 
inspect and clean with a hi-flash naphtha­wetted 
cloth. Wipe completely dry. Re-inspect fre­quently 
as rustproofing may run or drip for some 
time after installation, especially in hot weather. 
Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Vinyl 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or 
vacuum cleaner. Clean the vinyl surfaces with Ford 
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, or equivalent. Ford Vinyl 
Protectant may then be applied for enhanced 
appearance. 
Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Leather 
Genuine leather is not uniform. It may have healed 
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean the surface 
with Ford Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent, or 
with a mild soap solution. Wipe clean with a damp 
soft cloth. Dry and buff surfaces with a dry, soft 
cloth. 
Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Fabric 
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a 
vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh sp9ts immediately. 
Care should be taken not to stain the fabric or affect 
its color or fire resistance properties. 
General Cleaning Procedure: 
1. Remove excess staining material from fabric by 
scraping or wiping with a clean cloth. 
.• 
2. Identify the staining material if possible.
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
3. Clean the fabric as outlined in the following 
Methods "A", "8", or "C". Test all cleaners in a 
small hidden area of the fabric prior to use. If fab­ric 
color or texture is adversely affected by a par­ticular 
cleaner, do not use. 
Method "Aw 
Stains such as grease, oil, tar, water spots, crayon 
and lipstick: 
CAUTION - Using other than recommended clean­ers 
or procedures may ·adversely affect fabric 
flammability, appearance or durability. 
1. Spray stain with "Ford Automotive Fabric Spot 
Lifter" or equivalent from a distance of 8-10" as 
directed on the instructions furnished with the 
can. 
2. Allow the Spot Lifter to dry completely forming a 
white powder on the surface of the fabric. 
3. Brush and vacuum the white powder from the 
surface of the fabric. 
4. If the soiled spot is not removed from the fabric, 
repeat Steps No. 1, 2 and 3 or use Method "8". 
Method "8'" 
Stains such as grease, oil, tar, water spots, crayon 
and lipstick: 
1. If the stain is still visible after the spot cleaning 
procedure (Method "A") blot the soiled area with 
a clean white cotton cloth saturated with Ford 
Spot Lifter or equivalent. 
2. Rub in a circular motion while continuously ex­posing 
clean portion of cloth. 
3. Gradually widen area of application onto edges 
of design, pleat, or biscuit. 
176 
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
4. Repeat Steps No. 1, 2 and 3 as necessary. 
5. Wipe cleaned area with clean damp cloth to re­move 
any remaining cleaner. 
Method "C" 
Stains such as dirt, dry soil, food, pop, and coffee: 
1. Apply "Rosenthal's Multi-Purpose Rug and Up­holstery 
Cleaner" with a clean brush or sponge 
as directed on the instructions furnished with the 
container. 
2. Rub in a circular motion until stain is removed. 
3. Gradually widen area of application to edges of 
design, pleat, or biscuit. 
4. Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 as necessary. 
5. Rub cleaned area with a damp cloth to absorb re-sidual 
cleaner. 
6. Allow material to dry completely. 
To maintain a uniform appearance of the seat mate­rial 
in the event of severe soil and stain, the entire 
seat or insert will have to be cleaned to prevent a 
"ring" condition. 
Cleaning Lap-Shoulder Belt Webbing 
Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution 
recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets; 
follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do 
not bleach or re-dye the webbing as this may weaken 
it.
SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Cleaning Interior Window Glass 
If the int~rior glass surfaces on your new car become 
f?gged (I.e. covered with an oily, greasy or waxy 
film): the residue should be removed with an am­mon~ 
a/alcohol glass cleaner, following the directions 
on the container. 
Cleaning Woodtone Interior Trim 
Clean soiled or stained surfaces with Ford Multi-Pur­pose 
Clea.ner diluted per label instructions (3 oz./gal.) 
or any m1ld household detergent and a soft cloth. 
178 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
Dealer Assistance ........ . .............. 1 80 
District Office Assistance ................ 1 80 
District Office Addresses ................. 1 8 1 
Ford Consumer Appeals Board ........... 1 8 3 
What Cases Qualify ..................... 184 
How the Board Operates ................ 1 8 6 
Office Phone Numbers and Addresses .... 1 8 8 
Canadian Regional Offices ............... 1 90 
Assistance Outside U.S. and Canada ..... 1 91 
Additional Service Information ............ 193 
Accessory Equipment .................... 1 9 5 
Infant Carrier and Tot-Guard Order Form .. 1 9 7 
Service Literature Order Forms ........... 201 
I 
179
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
DEALER ASSISTANCE 
Your dealer is vitally interested in your complete sat­isfaction 
with the vehicle you purchased from him. 
He is ready to help you with all of your maintenance 
and service needs - and he has the support and as­sistance 
of the Ford Motor Company with District and 
Regional Offices in 36 locations in the United States 
and Canada. 
If, for any reason you are not satisfied witti the ser­vice 
received, the following actions are suggested: 
• First, discuss the matter with your dealership Ser­vice 
Manager - make sure he is aware of any 
problems you may have and that he has had the 
opportunity to assist you. 
• If you are still not satisfied, seek out the Owner or 
General Manager of the dealership, explain the 
problem and request assistance. 
DISTRICT OFFICE ASSISTANCE 
For further assistance beyond that provided by your 
dealer, or if you are driving in an unfamiliar area and 
are in need of service, you may contact the nearest 
Ford Parts and Service Division District (U.S.) or Re­gional 
office (Canada). The addresses and telephone 
numbers of these offices are listed below and on the 
following pages. 
180 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
Ford Parts and Service Division 
ATLANTA DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northern Georgia, 
Eastern Alabama 
P .0. Box 105003 
Atlanta, GA 30348·5003 
(404) 763·6440 
BOSTON DISTRICT OFFICE 
Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, 
Massachusells, Rhode Island, 
Connecticut 
P.O. Box 587 
Waltham, MA 02254·0587 
(617) 895·1 000 
BUFFALO DISTRICT OFFICE 
Upper and Western New York, 
Northern Pennsylvania 
P.O. Box 244 
Buffalo, NY 14225·0244 
(716) 631-4430 
CHARLOTIE DISTRICT OFFICE 
North Carolina, South Carolina 
P.O. Box 220307 
Charlotte, NC 28222·0307 
(704) 554·4501 
CHICAGO DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northeastern Illinois, 
Northwestern Indiana 
2225 W. North Avenue 
Melrose Park, IL 60160·1191 
(312) 681-6500 
CINCINNATI DISTRICT OFFICE 
Southern Ohio, Southern West 
VIrginia, Eastern Kentucky, 
Southeastern Indiana 
P.O. Box 6308 
Cincinnati, OH 45215-6308 
(513) 563-3120 
CLEVELAND DISTRICT OFFICE 
Eastern and Northwestern Ohio, 
Northwestern Pennsylvania 
P.O. Box 41035 
Brecksville, OH 44141 ·0035 
(216) 526·6900 
DALLAS DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northern Texas, Oklahoma 
P.O. Box 110037 
Carrollton, TX 75011-0037 
(214) 323·6299 
DENVER DISTRICT OFFICE 
Colorado, Wyoming, 
Western Nebraska, 
Southwestern South Dakota, Utah, 
Southern Idaho, Northeastern 
Nevada, Southeastern Oregon, 
Montana 
P.O. Box 5568, Terminal Annex 
Denver, CO 80217·5568 
(303) 893·3673 
DETROIT DISTRICT OFFICE 
All Michigan (Exc. Upper 
Peninsula) 
P.O. Box 775 
Wixom, Ml 48096.(1775 
(313) 337·9900 
HOUSTON DISTRICT OFFICE 
Southern Texas 
P.O. Box 827 
Houston, TX 77001-0827 
(713) 680·4260 
INDIANAPOLIS DISTRICT OFFICE 
Central and Western Indiana, 
Southeastern Illinois 
P.O. Box 19448 
Indianapolis, IN 46219·0448 
(317) 353·8251 
JACKSONVILLE DISTRICT 
OFFICE 
Florida, Southern Georgia 
P.O. BoxY 
Jacksonville, Fl 32203·0576 
(904) 783-7777 
KANSAS CITY DISTRICT OFFICE 
Western Missouri, Kansas 
P.O. Box 501 
Shawnee Mission, KS 66201.(1501 
(913) 888·0141 
LOS ANGELES DISTRICT OFFICE 
Southern California, 
Southeastern Nevada 
2200 West Sequoia 
P.O. Box 4680·P 
Anaheim, CA 92803-4680 
(714) 520-8300 
LOUISVILLE DISTRICT OFFICE 
Western Kentucky, Central 
Tennessee, South Central 
Indiana 
P.O. Box 32080 
Louisville, KY 40232·2080 
(502) 456-3700 
181
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
MEMPHIS DISTRICT OFFICE 
Arkansas, Western Tennessee, 
Northam Mississippi, 
Northwestern Alabama 
P.O. Box 83-47, 
Hollywood Station, 
Memphis, TN 38108·8347 
(901) 454-7270 
MILWAUKEE DISTRICT OFFICE 
Wisconsin (Exc. Northwestern 
Corner), Upper Pennlnsula 
Michigan 
P.O. Box 267 
Brookfield, WI 53005·0267 
(414) 785·3100 
NEW ORLEANS DISTRICT 
OFFICE 
Southern Mississippi, Louisiana, 
Southwestern Alabama 
P.O. Box 8630 
Metairie, LA 70011·8630 
(504) 454·6764 
NEW YORK DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northern New Jersey, Eastern 
Now York, Southeastern New 
York, Long Island 
U.S. Highway 46 
Teterboro, NJ 07608·1177 
(201) 288·9421 
OMAHA DISTRICT OFFICE 
Western Iowa, Central and 
Eastern Nebraska, Southeastern 
South Dakota 
P.O. Box 37433 
Millard Station 
Omaha, NE 68137·7433 
(402) 592·8850 
PHILADELPHIA DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northeastern Pennsylvania, 
Southeastern Pennsylvania, 
Southern New Jersey, Delaware 
P.O. Box 816 
Pennsauken, NJ 08110·0816 
(609) 662·8021 
PHOENIX DISTRICT OFFICE 
Arizona, New Mexico, 
Western Texas 
P.O. Box 844 
Phoenix, AZ 85001·0844 
(602) 266-8500 
182 
PITTSBURGH DISTRICT OFFICE 
Southwestern Pennsylvania, 
Northern West Virginia, 
Southeastern Ohio 
Suite 910 
Manor Oak Twp. 
1910 Cochran Road 
Pittsburgh, PA 15220·1254 
(412) 928·2939 
ST. LOUIS DISTRICT OFFICE 
Southern Illinois, Eastern Missouri 
P.O. Box 24576 
St. Louis, MO 63141·0575 
(314) 569·4455 
SAN JOSE DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northern California, Southern 
Oregon, Western Nevada, Hawaii 
P.O. Box 4002 
Milpitas, CA 95035·4002 
(408) 262·911 0 
SEATTLE DISTRICT OFFICE 
Alaska, Washington, Northern 
Oregon, Northern Idaho 
Suite 215 
10604 N.E. 38th Place 
Kirkland, WA 98033·7995 
(206) 244·5800 
TWIN CITIES DISTRICT OFFICE 
Northwestern Wisconsin, 
Minnesota, North Dakota, 
Northern South Dakota 
P.O. Box 9303 
Minneapolis, MN 55440·9303 
(612) 887·4290 
WASHINGTON DISTRICT OFFICE 
Mainland Maryland, Northern 
Virginia, Southern Virginia, 
Eastern West VIrginia, 
Peninsular Maryland 
8051 Gatehouse Road 
Fails Church, VA 22046·1503 
(703) 698·1900 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
If a problem arises that the dealer or one of the 
above offices cannot answer or correct, Ford Motor 
Company has established a priority customer as­sistance 
system for our luxury car owners. In the 
U.S. you can reach your Luxury Car Coordinator by 
dialing our toll-free number 1-800-521-4140 (all states 
except Michigan) . In Michigan, call toll-free 
1-800-482-5308. These phone numbers are opera­tional 
during regular business hours (Eastern Time) 
Monday through Friday. In Canada, call the nearest 
Ford of Canada Regional Office. 
Questions in the U.S. that cannot be answered by 
one of the above offices may be directed to: 
Ford Parts and Service Division 
P.O. Box 1805 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121-1805 
THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARD 
NOTE - The footnotes for the following section are 
contained at the section's end. 
The Ford Consumer Appeals Board reviews service 
complaints on Ford and Lincoln-Mercury products 
that haven't already been resolved by your dealer or 
the Ford Parts and Service Division District Office. 
The Ford Consumer Appeals Board is a cost-free, in­dependent, 
third-party, dispute settlement mecha­nism 
available to Ford Motor Company product 
owners whose complaints involve either: 
• A vehicle covered by the new vehicle warranty pro­vi 
dad by Ford or by a state vehicle repair/ 
replacement statute. 
183
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
• A vehicle and/or component that is no longer cov­ered 
by the new vehicle warranty and/or a state 
repair/replacement statute, but is within 48 months 
and 50,000 miles of service.(!) 
WHICH CASES QUALIFY FOR BOARD REVIEW? 
T.he Board reviews all service complaints except 
those involving: 
• A non-Ford product 
• A non-Ford dealership 
• A Ford Motor Company vehicle in excess of 48 
months or 50,000 miles of service except for com­ponents 
covered by a longer term warranty 
• A vehicle sales transaction 
• A request for reimbursement of consequential ex­penses 
unless incidental to a service or product 
complaint being reviewed 
• Alleged personal injury or property damage 
• Cases currently in litigation 
If your vehicle qualifies under the new vehicle war­ranty 
or a state vehicle repair/replacement statute, 
the following five-step procedure is suggested, al­though 
Steps 1 and 2 are NOT required for Ford Con­sumer 
Appeals Board review. 
1. Review your complaint with your dealer or his 
representative. If the dealer is unable to resolve 
your complaint to your satisfaction, proceed to 
Step 2. 
2. Contact a District Office of the Ford Parts and Ser­vice 
Division - addresses and phone numbers 
are listed in the Owner's Guide. If your complaint 
still remains unresolved, proceed to Step 3. 
184 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
3. Request a Ford Consumer Appeals Board Cus­tomer 
Statement form by calling toll-free 
1-800-241-8450 or the Ford Parts and Service Dis­trict 
Office. Be sure to complete the information 
at the top of the statement concerning your 
name, address, dealer's name and city, and the 
information about your vehicle. 
4. Briefly describe what your unresolved complaint 
is about and what you want done to resolve your 
complaint. 
5. Attach all documents and maintenance or repair 
orders which you believe are important to the un­resolved 
complaint(s) and your vehicle's service 
history. Forward to the Executive Secretary of 
the Ford Consumer Appeals Board. 
WHAT IF MY VEHICLE IS OUT OF WARRANTY AND 
BEYOND STATE REPAIR/REPLACEMENT STATUTE? 
If your vehicle is beyond warranty and/or a state re­pair/ 
replacement statute but qu~lifies wi_t~in the 48 
months and 50,000 miles of serv1ce cond1t1on above, 
it is a REQUIREMENT that you follow the five step 
procedure.(!) If you have not previously been in c_on­tact 
with Ford Motor Company and you submit a 
. Ford Consumer Appeals Board Customer Statement, 
it will be referred to the appropriate Ford Parts and 
Service Division District Office for resolution. If you 
then remain dissatisfied, your complaint may be­come 
eligible for Board review. 
185
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
HOW DOES THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS 
BOARD WORK? 
The Board consists of five members: three consum­er 
representatives, a Ford dealer and a Lincoln­Mercury 
dealer. The Owner Relations Manager from 
the Ford Parts and Service Division (FPSD) District 
Office serves as a non-voting Executive Secretary. 
Dealer Board members act as non-voting advisors to 
the Board on all cases involving vehicles within the 
stated terms of the applicable warranty or a state re­pair/ 
replacement statute.@ 
If you contact the Ford Consumer Appeals Board 
with a case that appears to qualify for review, you 
will be sent a one-page Customer Statement form. 
To begin the Board review process, the form should 
be completed and mailed to the special Board P.O. 
Box number. It is important that legible copies of all 
documents and maintenance or repair orders related 
to your case be included with the completed form. 
When the Customer Statement form is accepted for 
review by the Board, an acknowledgment postcard 
will be sent advising you of the number assigned to 
your case. At the same time, your dealer is sent a 
form to get his comments on the problem. A Ford 
Motor Company representative is also asked to sub­mit 
a Company Statement. 
At monthly meetings, Board members review each 
case and arrive at a decision by a simple majority 
vote. Decisions are based only on the written state­ments 
submitted by each of the involved parties. 
Personal presentations by customers, dealers and 
Ford Motor Company representatives are made only 
if requested by the Board.@ 
186 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
You will be notified in writing of the Board's decision 
shortly after your case has been reviewed. Decisions 
by the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but 
not on customers who are free to seek remedies that 
may be available under state or federal law. The de­cisions 
of the Board, however, may be introduced 
into evidence by Ford or its dealer in legal proceed­ings 
that you may initiate. 
HOW LONG WILL IT TAKE TO HAVE A CASE 
REVIEWED? 
Since the Boards generally meet once a month, some 
cases will take more than 30 days before going to the 
Board. Every effort will be made to resolve each 
case within 40 days of the date the Customer State­ment 
form is received by the Board (47 days if you 
did not contact your dealer or Ford Motor Company 
before submitting your case to the Board). 
INFORMATION YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO 
PROVIDE FOR CASE CONSIDERATION 
• Vehicle year, make, model and I.D. number 
• Date purchased 
• Date of repair and repair mileage 
• Current mileage 
• Selling and/or servicing dealer 
• Description of unresolved service complaint 
• Summary of actions taken with dealer and Ford 
Motor Company 
• Names (if known) of individuals contacted at the 
dealership and at Ford Motor Company 
• Copies of maintenance and repair orders and other 
relevant explanation of problem(s) 
• Action required to resolve complaint 
187
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
HOW IS THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARD 
CONTACTED? 
You may contact the Ford Consumer Appeals Board 
by calling toll-free 1-800-241-8450 or writing to the 
Board in your geographic area. Board addresses 
follow: 
FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARDS* 
ATLANTA LOUISVILLE 
P.O. Box 91069 P.O. Box 35186 
East Point, GA 30364-1069 Louisville, KY 40233-5186 
BOSTON 
P.O. Box 667 MEMPHIS 
Waltham, MA 02154-0667 P.O Box 381611 
BUFFALO Germantown, TN 38183-1611 
P.O. Box 187 MILWAUKEE 
Williamsville, NY 14221.0187 P.O. Box 788 
CHARLOTTE Brookfield, WI 53005-0788 
P.O. Box 220822 NEW ORLEANS 
Charlotte, NC 28222.0822 P.O. Box 6491 
CHICAGO Metairie, LA 70010-6491 
P.O. Box 1662 
Melrose Park, IL 60161·1662 NEW YORK 
CINCINNATI P.O. Box 2368 
P.O. Box 41508 °South Hackensack, NJ 
760 
2368 
Sharonville, OH 45241.0508 6- 
OMAHA 
CLEVELAND P.O. Box 3n56 
P.O. Box 234 Millard Station 
Richfield, OH 4428&-o234 omaha, NE 68137-n56 
DALLAS PHILADELPHIA 
P.O. Box 110147 P.O. Box 618 
Carrollton, TX 75011.0147 Pennsauken, NJ 08110.0618 
DENVER PHOENIX 
P.O. Box 16082 P.O. Box 34865 
Denver, CO 80216.0082 Phoenix, AZ 85067·4865 
DETROIT PITTSBURGH 
P.O. Box 900 P.O. Box 13457 
Wixom, Mi 48096-0900 Pittsburgh, PA 15243-o289 
HOUSTON ST. LOUIS 
P.O. Box 1519 P.O. Box 27375 
Houston, TX n251-1519 St. Louis, MO 63141·0575 
INDIANAPOLIS SAN JOSE 
P.O. Box 39226 P.O. Box 360909 
lndtanapolls, IN 46239-o226 Milpitas, CA 95035-0909 
JACKSONVILLE SEATTLE 
P.O. Box 955 P.O. Box 1886 
Orange Park, FL 32067-<1955 Bellevue, WA 98009-1886 
188 
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 
KANSAS CITY 
P.O. Box 2918 
Shawnee Mission, KS 
66201·1318 
LOS ANGELES 
P.O. Box 4630-P 
2200 West Sequoia 
Anaheim, CA 92803-4630 
TWIN CITIES 
P.O. Box 1502 
Minneapolis, MN 55440-1502 
WASHINGTON, D.C. 
P.O. Box 696 
Merrifield, VA 22116-o696 
'For geographiC area and states covered, please refer to listong of Ford Parts and 
Service Dostrict Office locations under "Customer Assostance". 
FOOTNOTES: 
1. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to 
change Ford Consumer Appeals Board program 
eligibility parameters involving vehicles not 
covered by either warranty or applicable state 
vehicle repair/replacement statutes without 
notice and without incurring obligation. 
2. The operation of the Ford Consumer Appeals 
Board may be affected by state vehicle repair/re­placement 
statutes. Therefore, Board composi­tion, 
location, and the number of Boards may be 
subject to change. 
3. In Kentucky and Montana customers have the op­tion 
under their respective states repair/replace­ment 
laws of making persona l presentations 
before the Board. 
189

Fordrazborka.zu8.ru lincoln

  • 2.
    ..... ~ ICONVENTIONAL INSTRUMENT PANEL 14 35'00313 t 32 34 -A!J i 1 31 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT PANEL & WARNING LIGHTS 1A ~- . [II(~ 11 -~~-J 7 I I J -,- 't 3 6 7 9 11 14 37 t III T"" •
  • 3.
    INSTRUMENTATION IGNITION LOCKCYLINDER 16 IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER 5POSITIONS LOCK POSITION-Steering wheel is locked lor theft protection. The key can be remo•ed only in this position. The column mounted shift selector must be engaged in P (PARK) before the key can be placed In the LOCK position. OFF POSITION-Steering wheel unlocked. After the engine is started, the OFF position can be used to shut the engine down without locking the steering wheel. LOCK ~1aiF ON ( (( t~} START ACCESSORY ACC (ACCESSORY) POSITION-Vehicle electrical syatem operates without Ignition. START POSITION­Used to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key. The key will return to ON position. ON POSITION­Warning lights can be checked before the engine Is started. Normal running position after englna Ia started. WARNING- Before leaving the driver's seat you should always make sure the gear selector lever is engaged in P (PARK). Set the parking brake fully AND shut off the ignition. Unex­pected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. INSTRUMENTATION If difficulty is encountered in turning the key from the LOCK position, move the steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. INDICATOR LIGHTS -INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Instrument Panel (Optional) FASTEN !..i CHECK BELTS '<"r' OIL UNLEADED BRAKE FUEL ONLY CHECK ALARM ENGINE Conventional Instrument Panel FASTEN BELTS4t. BRAKE DOOR OIL CHECK ALARM ~ ENGINE AMP CHECK WASHER 0 OIL ALARM (Anti-Theft Lamp) - This light will blink on and off when the ignition switch is OFF and any door is opened. This indicates a standby condition of the anti-theft system. Once the doors are locked, the light will remain lit for approximately 30 seconds. BRAKE SYSTEM AND PARKING BRAKE WARNING LIGHT - This light (BRAKE) should glow when the ignition lock cylinder is in the ON or START position and the engine is not running. 17
  • 4.
    INSTRUMENTATION Your vehiclehas a dual braking system. In case of a loss of hydraulic pressure in either brake system, the other will provide reduced braking capability. In this case the BRAKE warning light on the instrument pan­el will light when the brakes are applied, and remain lit with the ignition key in the ON position. WARNING - Any indicated maHunction in the hydraulic braking system should receive imme­diate attention, to avoid the possibility of loss of braking and personal injury. CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT - This light (AMP) will glow with the ignitton switch in the ON or START position until the engine is started and the al­ternator begins charging. If the light glows with the engine running, have the electrical system checked. CHECK OIL- This light will glow momentarily when the ignition switch is turned to START. If the light glows steadily while the engine is running, the en­gine oil level should be checked. Check actual level using the oil dipstick while the vehicle is on level ground. Add oil if required. In some instances the CHECK OIL light may also glow if the vehicle is start­ed on a steep grade, even though the oil level is sufficient. Always check level before adding oil by using the oil dipstick and with the vehicle on level ground. DOOR WARNING LIGHT- This light will glow if the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door is not completely closed. HEAD LAMPS ON CHIME - This chime will sound when opening the driver's door with the head lamps on, until the door is closed or the head lamps are turned off. IGNITION KEY CHIME - A chime will sound if the driver's door is opened while the key is fully in the ignition. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the 18 INSTRUMENTATION key in the ignition. Always lock your vehicle when leaving it unattended. LOW FUEL WARNING LIGHT - This light will glow briefly with the ignition switch in the ON position. When the fuel level is approximately 1/8 of a tank, this light will glow steadily. OIL WARNING LIGHT- This light will glow with the ignition switch in the ON or START posit~on u~til the engine is started. If the light glows steadily while the engine is running, there is a loss of oil pressure. ~f this occurs, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possi­ble, shut off the engine and check the oil level. Add oil if necessary. CAUTION - H the engine is not stopped as soon as safely possible, severe engine damage could result. SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND CHIME - This warning light glows for four to eight seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position. The seat belt chime will also sound for a few seconds if the driver's belt is not used. WASHER FLUID LOW WARNING LIGHT- This light will glow with the ignition switch ON and when the fluid level reaches approximately the 1/4 level. Electronic Message Center Warnings ELECTRONIC INStRUMENT PANEL WITH MESSAGE CENTER FUEL GAUGE SPEEDOMETER MESSAGE CENTER 1 00 ®OOJOD AM JAN 1 MON ( fo~N<:) : II ) 19
  • 5.
    INSTRUMENTATION The followingwarning displays will appear on your Message Center only when a warning is required for the particular system. • Brake Pressure • Charge System • Engine Oil Pressure • Engine Coolant Temp. • Door Ajar • Trunk Ajar • Windshield Washer Fluid Low • Head Lamp Out • Tail Lamp Out • Brake Lamp Out WARNING - Be sure to heed the warning in­formation displayed on the display and take corrective action. The warnings will replace the clock display or other messages when applicable. The warnings appear one at a time, and appear in sequence if there is more than one. A computer automatically and con­stantly checks the systems when the ignition key is in ACC or ON position, even if the engine is not run­ning. The sensors for lamps function only when these items are in use. Each initial warning begins with an audible tone, to attract attention, and flashes for four seconds. Some warnings will keep reappear­ing until the condition is serviced. In ACC positionr there is one audible tone, and the flashing is less fre­quent than in ,the ON position. Hookup of additional lights may result in false warn­ing or no warning in the Lamp Outage message. 20 INSTRUMENTATION ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM The system provides both an aud.io and a visual alarm signal by intermittently soundmg ~he horn and flashing head lamps, tail lamps and parkmg. lan:'ps on and off. In addition, further vehicle protect1on IS pro­vided by disabling the vehicle starter circuit to pre­vent vehicle starts until the system has been disarmed. Arming the System The system will be armed when the following input sequence is followed: • The ignition key is removed. • Any door is open (alarm indicator lamp will blink on and off reminding you to arm the system). NOTE-The door can be closed at this time without arming the alarm. • The doors are locked by using either the power lock switch or by using the last two buttons (7/8, 9/0) of the keyless entry keyboard (if so equi~ped.). This step must be performed while the door 1s st1ll open. The alarm indicator lamp will now glow steadily. NOTE - At this point, the arming procedure can be cancelled by unlocking the doors with the power door lock switch. System will then return to standby condition (blinking light). • All doors are closed (indicator lamp will remain lit for approximately thirty seconds). 21
  • 6.
    INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM ISARMED - INDICATOR lAMP IS OFF Disarming the System Unlock eithe~ front door with the door key, rotating ~he key fully m the unlock direction until it stops turn­rng or unlock the vehicle using the keyless entry door unlock sequence. If the key is not fully rotated to the end of travel, the system may not necessarily disarm. (See Shutting Off the Alarm.) If the system is armed while the operator is in the ve~icle, it can be disarmed by turning the ignition swrtch to " run " or "accessory" ppsition. However this will not disarm the system once it has bee~ activated. Activating the Alarm The alarm system will be activated if any of the fol­lowing actions occur after the system has been armed: 1. Any door is opened without using a door key or keyless entry code (if so equipped). 2. The trunk lock cylinder is removed. (NOTE- the trunk can be opened with a key without activating the alarm.) · Shutting Off the Alarm The alarm is shut off by three methods. One method is by unlocking a front vehicle door with a door key. Another is by using the keyless entry door unlock se­quence (if so equipped). The third method is a func­tion of the control module which will turn the alarm off automatically within two to four minutes -after the alarm has been activated. When the alarm is shut off automatically, the system returns to an armed state and the alarm will activate if another intrusio~ occurs. 22 INSTRUMENTATION The starter interrupt circuit is activated at the time of the initial intrusion and will remain activated until de­activated by disarming the system with the door key or keyless entry code. GAUGES ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT PANEL FUEL GAUGE SPEEDOMETER MESSAGE CENTER ·: - .-. ..... 1 00 ;~. , @"ii~ AM JAN 1 MON a ::§ [!HIIol0 111 I Conventional Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi­tion, this gauge indicates approximate fuel level. The reading may fluctuate during cornering and stopping. Electronic Fuel Gauge To operate, turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position. The display will flash on then off for a few seconds. The fuel level will be indicated by the number of bars illuminated. The reading may fluctu­ate during cornering and stopping. LOW FUEL ALERT - A low fuel alert, indicated by a continuously flashing fuel pump symbol, will be dis­played when two bars or Jess remain lit. Empty is indicated when the last bar turns off. NOTE - One bar does not indicate one gallon or liter. 23
  • 7.
    INSTRUMENTATION SERVICE ALERTS- If the fuel gauge shows one of the following service alerts, it indicates a circuit prob­lem and should be checked by your Dealership Ser­vice Department. • The E, F, and (1/2 tank) symbols flash on and off continuously and bars are not fit. • All fuel bars flash on and off continuously. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. The pointer will move to the NORMAL band as the engine warms. It is acceptable under certain driving conditions, such as heavy traffic or stop-and-go driv­ing in hot weather, for the pointer to read at the very top of the normal band. If the pointer moves out of the normal band towards the H (hot) position, the engine is overheating and engine damage may result. Safely pull off the road, turn off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant level following the instructions under Engine Cooling System. CAUTION - If the engine is not stopped as soon as safely possible, severe engine damage could result. If the engine continues to overheat, have the cooling system checked and repaired. CLOCKS Electronic Refer to the Electronic Message Center for operating procedures. 24 INSTRUMENTATION Conventional Quartz Electric Sweephand Clock No timekeeping accuracy adjustment is requ ~ red. To set the time, pull out the set knob and turn It ~lock­wise to advance the time, or turn counterclockwise to set back the time. SPEEDOMETERS Conventional This speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle. Electronic Digital This speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) or kilometers per hour (kn:' /.h). Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC P?Sitlon. The numerals 188 initially light up for approximately two seconds then turn off for approximately ~o ~econds indicating the display segments are fun~tlonmg cor­rectly. The vehicle speed will then be displayed. To select kilometers per hour on the speedometer, press the "km/h-MPH" on the message center key­board and release. To select the MPH mode, press the "km/h-MPH" button again. The speedometer has a maximum reading of 85 mph (137 km/h). ODOMETERS The odometer indicates the total distanc~ the _vehicle has been driven. The odometer reads m mile~ for U.S. vehicles and kilometers for Canadian vehicles. Trip Odometer The trip odometer is in the conventional instrument cluster. A reset knob returns the numbers to zero. when pulled. 25
  • 8.
    INSTRUMENTATION ELECTRONIC MESSAGECENTER T~~ Electr?nic Message Center display provides you wrt a varrety of features including: • Distance to Empty • Vehicle Condition Check Out • Clock • Average/Instantaneous Fuel Economy • Traveled Distance • Elapsed Time • Average Speed • Distance to Destination • Estimated Time of Arrival KEYBOARD TRIP LOG . I §... "~'G~l~ nrr~.1 I ,~...~., rQ.--[~ ;;IQJQJEJ These features are con!rolled by the 12 keyboard ~ushbu~ons. The operatron of the individual button rs descrrbed below. s 26 r:=1 ~ INSTRUMENTATION Converts units of measurement displayed from Met­ric to English and back with each press. Controls speedometer and Message Center. Displays distance to travel, based on driving condi­tions, before fuel tank is empty. Unless ignition is turned off during refueling, display will not reflect the addition of fuel for a few miles. If battery is discon­nected temporarily, the DTE display will reference the factory pre-set fuel economy number until a new average distance per gallon can be determined. The DTE measurement is designed so the vehicle will not run out of gas before the DTE reads 0 miles. Checks out the following eleven conditions and indi­cates any problems: Door Ajar, Trunk Ajar, Charge System, Oil Pressure, Engine Temp., Miles to Empty, Washer Fluid, Brake Pressure, Head Lamps, Tail Lamps, and Brake Lamps. 27
  • 9.
    f- INSTRUMENTATION Displaysthe clock, if not already displayed. Clock Set Procedure • Press RESET button • Press CLOCK button. Hours will flash • Press ADV button to advance to correct hour and AM or PM indication • Press CLOCK button to select minutes portion. Minutes will flash • Press ADV button to advance to correct minute Follow the same procedure using the CLOCK button to select day, month, and date portions and use the ADV button to advance the portions to the desired setting. To complete the setting of the clock, press the RESET button. Resetting the clock will be needed if vehicle battery power is disconnected or if clock "memory" is dis­rupted by electrical disturbances such as from jump starting, lightning, or exposure to high power radio transmitters. 28 INSTRUMENTATION Once a function of the clock is selected by the RESET and clock buttons, the ADV button is pressed to ad­vance the clock function to the correct reading. I Displays the vehicle fuel economy in miles per gallon (or liters per 100 kilometers). Average fuel economy is displayed first for five sec­onds and then instantaneous fuel economy is displayed. To reset, press RESET once, then F/ECON once. NOTE - The average fuel economy you calculate­dividing miles traveled by gallons used - may differ from the Average Fuel Economy displayed because: • Your vehicle not being perfectly level during fill-up • Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the gasoline pumps at service stations • Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another The Message Center calculations are not affected by any variations in fuel fill-up. Therefore, the Average Fuel Economy displayed may not precisely agree with your calculations. 29
  • 10.
    INSTRUMENTATION Displays thedistance traveled since it was last reset, thus functioning as trip odometer. Max reading is 9999.9. To reset to zero at the beginning of a trip, press RESET once and then DIST once. Displays elapsed time in hours, minutes and seconds since last reset. To reset elapsed time to zero, press RESET once, then press EffiME once. The elapsed time will continue to count even though the engine is off. Displays average speed based on distance traveled and the time to travel that distance, including time when vehicle is stopped or engine is turned off. To reset average speed, press RESET once and then AV SPD once. The display will then show the present speed. The average speed feature is not affected by the individual resetting of elapsed time or elapsed distance. 30 INSTRUMENTATION Displays miles (kilometers) remaining to a preset destination. To enter the distance you plan on travel­ing, press RESET once and then DEST. Display will read 0. With the numbered buttons on the keyboard, enter the distance to your destination, reading from left to right. Press RESET again and "DEST SET" will appear. Press DEST at any time during your trip to see the remaining distance to your destination. Displays the current time-of-day and the time-of-day you'll arrive at the destination you previously entered with the OEST button, assuming you travel at the re­cent vehicle speed and that the clock is correctly set. 31
  • 11.
    INSTRUMENTATION If yourETA is greater than 24 hours from the present time, or you are past your destination, dashes will appear in the display. If your average speed is less than 25 mph (40km/ h) ETA is based on average speed or actual vehicle speed, whichever is greater. If your average speed is greater than 25 mph, ETA will be based on vehicle speed or 25 mph, whichever is greater. An asterisk (*) is displayed whenever the ETA is NOT based on vehicle speed. I RESET I Used to reset keys 3/CLOCK, 5/F/ECON, 6/DIST, 7/E/ TIME, 8/AV SPD, and 9/DEST. To reset an individual function, press RESET and then the desired key. To reset the entire trip log (buttons numbered 5-9) si­multaneously, press RESET twice and then set DEST as described above. 32 INSTRUMENTATION LIGHT CONTROLS Headlamps/Dome/lnstrument/Parking Lamps Manual Operation HEADLAMP SWITCH-MANUAL OPERATION BRIGHTNESS OF INSTRUMENT PANEL LAMPS IS CONTROLLED BY ROTATING KNOB AS SHOWN. DOME LAMP AND OTHER INTERIOR LAMPS ARE TURNED ON BY ROTATING FULLY COUNTERCLOCKWISE INTE:~~:H' _ ~.- . -' DIM LAMPS ON ."'9:r·---..:=::::::~ /<~:~ LAMPS ./-- .::'( OFF } I PULL KNOB OUT TO THIS POSITION TO TURN ON PARKING, SIDE MARKER AND INSTRUMENT PANEL LAMP PULL KNOB OUT TO THIS POSITION TO TURN ON THE HEADLAMPS, PARKING, SIDE MARKER, AND INSTRUMENT PANEL LAMPS 33
  • 12.
    INSTRUMENTATION Headlamp ConvenienceSystem r~;:;.D LIGHTS ~-= OF{jF~IN AUTO OIM DELAY RANGE MAX MAX The .Headlamp Convenience Group contains an auto­matic headlamp dimmer and Autolamp ON/OFF delay system. AUTOM~TIC DIMMER OPERATION- To use your automatic headlamp dimmer, turn your h.eadlamps on and move the flag dial away from MIN and into DIM ~ANGE area, then pull part way towards you on the d1mmer/turn signal lever. If the high beam (.brig~t lights) come on and the high b'eam indicate~ fight IS on, the unit is in the automatic position and you can release the dimmer/turn signal lever. If the high be~ms do not come on, pull all the way ?ack on the d1mmer/turn signal lever to put the unit rn the automatic position. ~nee you have turned on your automatic headlamp d1mmer, your headlamps will switch to low beam at the proper dist~nce from an approaching vehicle. The h~adlamp d1mmer will restrict your lights to low b~am 1n adequately lighted areas, but will switch to h1gh beam whenever driving conditions necessitate. 34 INSTRUMENTATION To temporarily switch to high beams for signaling oncoming traffic, pull back part way on the turn sig­nal lever. The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the turn signal lever part way back. Use the automatic dimmer range control, which is I concentric with the main light switch, to set the dis­tance at which your headlamps go from high to low beam. For normal driving conditions, set the control with its pointer at the midpoint of the adjustment range. If you prefer your lights to dim at a farther distance from oncoming vehicles, turn the control clockwise. If you want your lights to dim when oncoming vehi­cles are nearer to you, turn the control counterclockwise. There are two ways you can turn your automatic headlamp dimmer off. If you pull all the way back on the turn signal lever then release it, you will lock in the low beam lights, thus turning off the headlamp dimmer. You can also rotate the auto dimmer control to the MIN position to turn the headlamp dimmer off. To keep your automatic headlamp dimmer operating properly, clea.n the sensor lens periodically with a soft cloth. The lens is located under the hood behind the grille on the driver's side. Raise the flexible lip of the plastic sensor chamber to gain access to the sen­sor lens. AUTOLAMP OPERATION- This system allows you to set the headlamps to automatically: • Turn ON during darkness, OFF during daylight • Stay on up to approximately three minutes after leaving the vehicle with the ignition OFF The system operates with the manual light switch OFF and the ignition switch ON. 35
  • 13.
    INSTRUMENTATION To turnthe system on, move the flag dial, located behind the headlamp switch knob, from OFF into the DELAY range. The farther you turn the dial in the DE­LAY range, the longer the head lamps will stay on after you have left the vehicle. Once in the DELAY range, the headlamps are con­trolled by a photocell located in the top left-hand side of the instrument panel. Do not place any items in this area which would block light to the photocell or your lights may operate in the daytime if the system is turned on. You can override the automatic ON/OFF operation by pulling the manual headlamp switch to the ON posi­tion. •To turn off both operations, turn the flag dial back to the· OFF position. If you forget to turn off the headlamp switch, a warning chime will sound.when you· open the driver's door. Coach Lamp A coach lamp is mounted on the exterior of the cen­ter pillar. The lamp comes on when the head lamps and marker lamps are turned on. Illuminated Entry System This system will provide illumination of both front door lock cylinders and the vehicle's interior courtesy lights, when either outside front door handle is pulled or when any· button of the optional Keyless Entry System is pushed. The system will automatical­ly turn off after approximately 25 seconds, or when the ignition lock cylinder is turned to ON or ACC position. NOTE- The illuminated entry timer will not turn off the courtesy lamp if that lamp has been turned on manually ·or by the door switch. 36 INSTRUMENTATION Occasionally, it will be necessary to clean the lens of the door lock assembly. Use Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner Concentrate, a mild soap, or household am­monia and water solution. Apply with a soft cloth or cotton swab, followed by a clear water rinse. High Mount Stoplamp A third stoplamp is mounted on the rear window ledge at the center line of the rear window. This high mount stoplamp is activated when the brakes are ap­plied. For cleaning and bulb replacement ~rocedur~s refer to the Servicing Your Vehicle sect1on of th1s guide. Should the lens become contaminated with oil or grease, clean with Ford Tar and Road Oil Remover or equivalent. Apply solvent sparingly. Do not use abra­sive cleaning preparations and other solvents such as benzene, gasoline, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, or denatured alcohol. 37 I
  • 14.
    INSTRUMENTATION Hazard WarningFlasher System INSTRUMENT PANEL -Pull to turn on -Push to turn off The hazard warning flasher system serves as a warn­ing to other drivers to exercise extreme caution in approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle. The flashers will operate with the brake pedal pressed. The flashers can be used with the ignition switch in any position. The lights will flash continuously for two hours (battery fully charged and in good condi­tion) without discharging the battery excessively. Map Lights and Reading Lights MAP LIGHT MAP LIGHT 38 INSTRUMENTATION These map lights, located on each side of the dome lamp, can be turned on by a switch located between the dome lamp and the map light. Your vehicle is also equipped with two reading lights in the rear pillar. The switches for these lights are above the rear armrests. The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position for switches to operate. Checking and Cleaning Lights It's a good safety practice to check your headlamps, taillamps, brake stoplamps, turn signals, side mark­ers, license plate lamp, and hazard flasher system each day. Dirty lights reduce night vision distances and oncom­ing drivers can't see your vehicle as soon. Keep all your lamps clean at all times. Check the headlamp alignment if oncoming motorists frequently signal when you are already using your low beams, if the high beams are pointed substantially away from the straight ahead position, or if the headlamp illumination seems inadequate. STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS Dimmer/Flash-To-Pass/Turn Signal Switch LEFT TURN SIGNAL DIMMER/ FLASH·TO·PASS ~ 39
  • 15.
    INSTRUMENTATION DIMMER SWITCH- To change your headlamps from low to high beam or high to low beam pull the lever all the way towards you, until it latches, and release. An indicator light in the instrument panel will glow when the headlamps are operating on high beam. FLASH-TO-PASS SWITCH- Momentarily turns on the headlamp high beams when moved and held to­ward driver. (Activates with headlamp switch on or off.) The high beam indicator light on the instrument panel will also illuminate. TURN SIGNALS -To signal for a left turn, pull the lever down until it is held in position. To signal for a right turn, push the lever up. When you signal for a turn, the front turn signal lamp, the rear brake light and the indicator light on the instrument panel will flash on and off, indicating the direction of your turn. If the indicator continues to flash after making a turn, manually return the lever to center position. When you want to change lanes, you can flash your turn indicators without putting the lever in the "hold" position by moving the lever either up or down until the indicator flashes. When you release the lever it will return to the center position. If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does not illuminate or remains on continuously, rather than flashing, when you signal a turn, the signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this condition cor­rected as soon as possible, making sure in the mean­time that you use the accepted hand signals. CORNERING LAMPS- Your vehicle is equipped with cornering lamps that illuminate when either turn signal is activated, depending on the direction you are turning. HORN - Your vehicle is equipped with the horn on the steering wheel center pad; push pad to sound horn. Check the horn regularly for proper operation. 40 INSTRUMENTATION WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Interval System Ftrst position upward INTERVAL, second posttion upward LOW, third position HIGH. IgnitiOn ON or ACC. To operate the interval wiper and washer system, the ignition key must be in the ON or ACC position. The wiper and washer controls are located on a lever mounted to the left side of the steering column. Washer Operation The washers will operate when the lever is in any position. When the lever is in the OFF or INTERVAL position, the wipers will cycle two or three times at low speed after the lever has been released, then re­turn to the OFF or INTERVAL mode. WARNING- Do not use the washers in freez­ing weather without first warming the windshield with the defrosters, otherwise the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. 41 I
  • 16.
    INSTRUMENTATION CAUTION -Do not operate the windshield washer when the fluid level is empty to prevent possible damage to the washer system. Windshield Wiper Blade Maintenance CAUTION - Commercial hot waxes applied by auto­matic car washes have been known to affect the ability of the wipers to clean the windshield. Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effective­ness of the windshield wi pers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the windshield and the blade rubber with undiluted Ford Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate, an equivalent cleaner, or mild detergent and rinse thor­oughly with clear water. Repeat if necessary. CAUTION-To prevent damage to wiper blades, .do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near the wiper blades. To access the blades easily, place the wiper switch in the "Low" speed position and the ignition switch in the "Accessory" position. When the wiper blades are approximately vertical on the windshield, turn the ig­nition switch to "OFF." CAUTION - To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually. 42 INSTRUMENTATION Refilling Windshield Washer Reservoir WASHER RESERVOIR TOFRONT " OF VEHICLE TYPICAL COMBINED COOLANT RECOVERY/WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Periodically, or when the optional warning light indi­cates low fluid, check the fluid level in the reservoir located in the engine compartment. When it is low, fill the reservoir with a solution of water ahd Ford Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate or equiv­alent. In addition to removing grime, most wind­shield washer solvents contain additives to reduce the freezing point of the solution, when used accord­ing to directions. For vehicles equipped with Electronic Instrument Cluster, the low washer warning light will flash for 4 seconds only. The light will remain off after the first warning until the ignition is turned OFF and then back ON. 43 I
  • 17.
    I INSTRUMENTATION WARNING- Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. Radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer reservoir can severely affect visibility when sprayed on the windshield. CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER (Regulates temperature inside vehicle) I REAR WINDOW OEFROER FUNCT;O~ONTROL LEVER FAN SWITCH (Selects where air •s directed through-Floor ducts, defroster ducts, registers, or a combinatio.n of these.) (Selects fan speed or auto mode) For best performance, remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake below the windshield on the outside of the vehicle. Do not place articles under the front seats that will obstruct air. flow to the rear seats. 44 INSTRUMENTATION Automatic Climate Control (ACC) System To operate the ACC system, position the temperature control at the desired numerical temperature setting and place the function control in the position desired (usually PANEL, HI-LO, FLOOR or MIX). The system I will then automatically regulate discharge air tem­perature to maintain the selected temperature inside your vehicle. It is not necessary, nor advised, to move the temperature selector to the extreme posi-tions (65 or 85) to achieve comfort. Optimum per­formance will be achieved in the 72 to 77 range with only slight changes due to seasonal or other weather conditions (sun, load, humidity). The air conditioning compressor will operate in all positions except OFF, VENT, and FLOOR, if the out­side temperature is warmer than approximately 40-45 degrees F (4-6 degrees C). The fan speed is ·controlled automatically in the AUTO position or may be set manually ·for more or less air if· desired. HEATING- Move the function control to FLOOR. Air will be directed through the floor ducts, with a small amount going through the defrosters. In FLOOR, the automatic climate control system blower fan will start when the engine warms enough to provide heat. At freezing temperature this can take more than four minutes. In all other functions except OFF, the system blower fan will start immediately, regardless of engine temperature. In HI-LO, the system operates for heating but is not as economical because the air conditioning com­pressor operates in this function when required. In the MIX position, air is directed through the de­froster nozzle and floor ducts to assist in keeping the windshield and side windows clear and also provide heat to the floor. 45
  • 18.
    INSTRUMENTATION DEFROSTING-To defrostthe windshield, move the function control to DEFROST. For maximum effect, set the fan to HI. Air will be directed to the defroster outlets with a small amount directed through the floor ducts. NOTE- To maintain heating at the floor level while providing windshield defrosting or defogging during extreme cold or humidity conditions, move the func­tion control to MIX. This provides approximately equal airflow to the windshield and floor outlets. To help prevent fog from forming on the windshield and side windows in humid weather, place the sys­tem in the defrost position prior to starting the en­gine. Avoid driving with the system in the OFF position to prevent humidity build up inside the vehicle. DEFOGGING SIDE WINDOWS- Set the function control lever to PANEL, MIX, or HI-LO. Direct the side registers toward the windows and close the center registers. COOLING - Move the function control lever to PAN­EL. Adjust the direction of airflow by tilting the registers or moving the louvers. In HI-LO position the system operates for cooling as it does in PANEL position except the airflow is split between the panel registers and floor ducts. Use the PANEL position for maximum cooling and initial cooling of a hot vehicle interior. The VENT position brings outside air through the registers and is more economical than using A/C positions. If your vehicle has been parked with the windows clossd during hot weather, drive for a few minutes with the windows open and the air conditioner on. This forces most of the warm air out of the vehicle. 46 INSTRUMENTATION When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, latch the gearshift selector in P (PARK) to increase the engine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, move the function control to VENT to stop the compressor and increase the engine speed for a ·1 short time. During some air conditioning operating conditions, slight engine surging may be rroticed. This should be considered normal, as the system is designed to cy­cle the compressor on and off to maintain desired cooling. The reduced compressor operation should benefit fuel economy. Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if water drips on the pavement under the air condi­tioner drain after you have stopped the vehicle. Defroster Group CONTROL SWITCH- Push up and release to turn on. Push down and release to turn off. INDICATOR LIGHT -Glows when rear defroster Is on 47
  • 19.
    INSTRUMENTATION The defrostergroup includes an electric rear window defroster and heated outside rear view mirrors. The control switch for the defroster is located on the in­strument panel, to the right of the A/C control. Start the engine before operating defroster. If there is a heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off. The defroster timer automatically turns off the defroster after approximately 10 minutes of operation. If more defrost is required, the defroster can be reactivated for another 10 minutes by pushing the control switch to ON. To prevent damage to the conductors, which are bonded to the interior surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the interior surface of your rear window. 48 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Occupant Restraint Systems ............ .. 50 Front-Lap Shoulder Belts .. . . . .. . . .. ...... 50 Center Front and Center Rear Lap Belts . . . . 53 Rear Lap Belts with Retractors .... ........ 53 Seat Belt Extension Assembly . .. .... . . . . .. 54 Seat Belt Maintenance . .. ... .. . ...... . .. . 54 Infant and Child Restraints .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . 55 I Seats and Controls ....... . . .. .... . .. . . . . . 62 Manual Passenger Seat . . . ... . ..... .. ... . 6 2 Power Seat .... .. . . . . . .. . . . ... ...... ... . 6 2 Reclining Front Seats . .. . . . .... . .. . . .. ... 63 Mirrors .. . ..................... . .... . ..... 63 Rear View ........... . . ..... .. .......... 63 Outside Mirrors .... .. ...... .. ... .. . ...... 66 Convex . . ........ . .. . .......... .. ... .... 67 Illuminated Visor ...... . .... .. .... .... .. . . 6 7 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 Tilt Steering Wheel ..................... .. 68 Power . . ................. .. ....... . ..... . 69 Brakes . ... ..................... . .. . ...... 69 Stopping Distance ............... . ..... .. 69 Foot Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 0 Parking .. ......... . ............ .. .... . .. 71 Automatic Parking Brake Release . . . . . . . . . . 7 2 Automatic Load Leveling Suspension System . . ............... ... ............. 73 49
  • 20.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WARNING - Be sure to LOCK ALL DOORS be­fore driving away. Locking the doors, along with using the safety belts provided, will mini­mize the risk of injury or ejection in an accident. Ford Motor Company recommends that you always "buckle up". In some areas restraint system use is required by law. WARNING - All vehicle occupants should wear their seat belts for maximum protection in the event of a collision. According to accident statistics, properly re­strained children are safer in the rear seat than in the front seat. For young children; infant and child restraints should be obtained and used in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufac­turer of the infant and child restraint. See In­fant and Child Restraints. In some areas, child restraint use is required by law. Front Lap-Shoulder Belts The belt system allows freedom of movement, lock­ing tight only on hard braking or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The system cannot be made to lock by jerking on the belt. After entering your vehicle, close the door and adjust the front seat to obtain the best position for your driving comfort, access to controls, and visibility. Then pull the lap-shoulder belt from the retractor so the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoul­der and chest and insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. 50 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion to a snug fit. Be sure the belt is as low on your hip~ as possible. If the shoulder belt is uncomfortably tight, a comfort regulator is provided in the shoulder belt retractor to reduce belt pressure against your chest. The shoulder belt can be ad­justed much like a window shade to maintain a small amount of slack in the belt. The adjacent door must be closed to use this comfort regulator feature. Adjustment Procedure To set the comfort regulator, the shoulder belt ini­tially should be positioned snugly against the chest. If the belt is not positioned snugly, the comfort reg­ulator may already be engaged. Disengagement is accomplished by the following procedure: Figure A - Pull the shoulder belt outward 4 or 5 inches (10 to 13 em), then release it and allow belt to fully retract. Repeat procedure if belt is not snug to the chest. Figure B- Now the belt tension may be adjusted by pulling down slightly on the shoulder belt and re­leasing. The least amount of slack needed to re lieve tension, but not more than 1 1/2 inches (3.8 em), should be pulled out when using the comfort reg­ulator system. 51 I
  • 21.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE • If the desired setting is not achieved or excess slack develops as you change seat position, repeat the above procedure. • When the door is opened, the comfort regulator will release automatically, permitting the lap­shoulder belt to retract. After unbuckling the belt it is recommended that you guide the tongue during retraction to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle. 52 WARNING - Never allow more than 1-1/2 inches (3.8 em) of slack to be introduced into your seat belt system because the belt locks upon impact where it is positioned. Wearing the belt too loose will negate any real safety protection. Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around your neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one per­son. Be sure the lap portion of the belt is fit­ted snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not on the waist. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Center Front and Center Rear Lap Belts Because the center lap belts do not have retractors, they should be shortened and fastened when not in use. To lengthen the belt, tip the tongue at a right angle to the belt, and pull the belt over your lap until the tongue reaches the buckle. To fasten the belt, insert the tongue into the open end of the proper buckle until you hear a snap and I feel the latch engage. Then pull on the loose end of the webbing to snug the belt. The belt should be snug and as low as possible around the hips, never around the waist. Rear Lap Belts with Retractors Pull the belt out of the retractor with a steady motion and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. WARNING - Be sure the lap belt is fitted snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to do so may in­crease the chance of injury in the event of a collision. If you should jam the lap belt retractor by allowing the belt to retract when it is twisted, you can free the webbing with this procedure: • Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten it on the retractor spool. • Feed the belt back into the retractor until it is com­pletely retracted. Repeat previous step if necessary. • Pull the belt out of the retractor as far as it will go. Remove any foreign matter or untwist the belt as necessary and let the belt retract. • Extend and retract the belt about five times to make sure the belt retractor operates properly. 53
  • 22.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE Unfastening Seat Belts Push the release button in the buckle and allow the belts to unlatch. Seat Belt Extension Assembly A seat belt assembly that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened approximately eight inches (20 em.) with a seat belt extension assembly (54611C22) available from your dealer. WARNING - To ensure that the seat belt ex­tension assembly will hold in the event of a collision, only seat belt extensions manufac­tured by the same supplier as the seat belt should be used. Seat Belt Maintenance Seat belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to assure that they have not become damaged and that they remain in proper operating condition, par­ticularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. 54 WARNING -All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Ford recom­mends that all seat belt assemblies in use dur­ing a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assem­blies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Infant and Child Restraints WARNING - For maximum protection in the event of a collision or sudden stop, always protect the infant and child occupants of your vehicle with an infant or child safety seat de­signed especially for them and which con­forms to applicable motor vehicle safety standards. Do not permit children to sit where they cannot be properly restrained. If infant and child safety seats are not installed and used correctly, they may not provide the protection they were designed to provide. Be sure to read and follow carefully all of the installation and use instructions, and obey all warnings supplied with the infant and child safety seats. The following test should be performed after properly installing an infant or child safety seat in a front or rear center seating position equipped with a manually adjustable lap belt. Before placing the child in the infant or child seat. tighten lap belt, forcibly tilt the infant or child seat from side to side, and also tug it forward, to see if the lap belt holds it securely in place. If belt slippage occurs, the infant or child seat should be properly installed in a dif­ferent seating position. If the new position is another center seating position, the test pro­cedure should be repeated. Do not use the type of infant or child seat that attaches to a seatback, because the seatback may not support the load in the event of a collision. Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. 55 I
  • 23.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE SEATING POSITIONS WITH LAP-SHOULDER SEAT BELTS -FRONT OF VEHICLE- - FRONT OF VEHICLE__.,. FORD INFANT CARRIER FORD TOT -GUARD 56 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE SEATING POSITIONS WITH LAP SEAT BELTS ONLY .,._FRONT OF VEHICL£- - FRONT OF VEHICLE-FORO INFANT CARRIER FORD TOT ·GUARD 57 I
  • 24.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE A child should never be allowed to ride unrestrained. The Ford Infant Carrier and Ford Tot­Guard are available from your dealer and may be ordered directly from Ford Motor Company. Both accessory units are secured by vehicle lap belts or lap-shoulder belts and do not rely on the seatback for their support. These child safety seats are for use only in forward facing vehicle seats equipped with a seat belt. The Ford Infant Carrier is for infants up to 20 pounds (9 kg) in weight - until approximately one year of age. It faces rearward for best protection. The Tot-Guard is designed for use by children who weigh between 20 and 50 pounds (9 and 23 kg), whose seating height is between 19 and 28 inches (48 and 71 em). To order the Infant Carrier and/or Tot-Guard see the order form in the back of this guide. (The Tot-Guard is not available in Canada.) When the Ford Tot-Guard or Ford Infant Carrier is used in the front right seat with a lap-shoulder belt system, the lap and shoulder belt should be posi­tioned as shown in the illustration. These instructions apply ONLY to the Ford Tot-Guard and Ford Infant Carrier. Other infant or child restraint systems may require different belt placements or procedures. 58 WARNING - When using any infant or child restraint system it is important that you fol­low the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer concerning its installation and use. Failure to follow each of the restraint manufacturer's instructions could increase the chance or severity of an injury in the event of a collision or sudden stop. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Should difficulty be experienced in buckling up the Infant Carrier or the Tot-Guard because the vehicle seat belt is too short even when fully extended, a seat belt extension assembly (54611C22) can be ob­tained from your dealer at no charge to provide ex­tra length. Do not use other extension assemblies. WARNING - To ensure that the seat belt extension assembly will hold in the event of a collision, only seat belt extensions manufac­tured by the same supplier as the seat belt should be used. For children having a seating height greater than 28 inches (71 em), the maximum for use of the Tot­Guard, the lap belts in the rear seat of all models or in the center front seat of vehicles with center belts and without center console can be used. WARNING - Children should not be seated in the right front seat with or without an infant or child restraint unless they can be positioned so that the shoulder strap does not contact or remain in front of the face, chin, neck or throat. Failure to follow this precaution can Increase the risk or severity of injury in the event of a collision. Tether Attachment Locations for Installation Some child safety seats provide a tether strap which goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchorage in the floor or panel behind the rear seat. (The Ford Infant Carrier and the Ford Tot­Guard do not require a top tether strap.) Attachment holes or weld nuts (on each side) have been provided in your vehicle to attach the anchor hard­ware supplied with the safety seat, if required. 59
  • 25.
    I BEFORE DRIVINGYOUR VEHICLE Instructions for Locating Tether Attachment(s) 1. From inside the luggage compartment looking underneath the metal panel structure behind the rear seat, locate one of the two existing .35 inch (9mm) holes identified by the letter "T". Each hole is located approximately 13.0 inches (33cm) outboard from the centerline of the vehicle and along a line 2.25 inches (5.7cm) rearward from the center of the rear seat speaker. 2. Pierce a small .35 inch (9.0mm) hole upwards through the flat area of the trim panel behind the rear seat. Exercise caution to prevent hitting the rear window glass as it could shatter. WARNING - An assistant must be inside the vehicle holding the .flat rear seat trim panel down to prevent it from being dislodged. They must also avoid holding it down in the area that the hole is being pierced to avoid hand or arm injury. EXISTING .35 1NCH (9 mm) TETHER HOLE IN METAL PANEL STRUCTURE (BEHIND THE REAR SEAn MARKED BY THE LETTER "T" STAMPED IN PANEL NEXT TO HOLE NOTE. VIEW FROM INSIDE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT. PASSENGER SIDE SHOWN­DRIVER SIDE TYPICAL 60 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 3. From inside the vehicle enlarge the hole in the trim panel until the anchor bolt supplied by the restraint manufacturer fits. 4. Install the top tether anchor hardware in accor­dance with the restraint manufacturer's instruc­tions. It is important that the anchor bolt be securely tightened. Head Restraints WARNING - Adjust the head restraints so that it is just behind your head and never be­hind your neck to reduce the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Pivoting Head Restraints 60" ROTATION POSSIBLE FROM NORMAL POSITION FULLY ROTATED POSITION VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT 1 INCH (25 mm) / SEATBACK 61 .I
  • 26.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE SEATS AND CONTROLS WARNING - Never adjust the driver's seat or the seatback while the vehicle is in motion to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury. Manual Passenger Seat The seat adjustment lever is located at the front lower left part of the seat. Push the lever to the left to unlock the seat. Move the seat to the desired posi· tion and then release the lever to lock the seat in its new position. Power Seats ~FRONT ~OF SEAT The controls to operate the power seats are located on the front door armrests. The SEAT switch moves the seat forward, backward, up or down. The FRONT TILT switch moves the front of the seat up or down. The REAR TILT switch moves the rear of the seat up or down. 62 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Reclining Front Seats RECLINER RELEASE HANDLE '-...,~ LIFT TO OPERATE Lift up and hold the recliner releas·e handle. Lean against the seatback to tilt it backwards or lean for­ward to bring it upright. When you have reached desired position release the handle. WARNING - To minimize risk of personal injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop, both the driver's and the passenger's re­clining seatbacks must always be in a fairly upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat and shoulder belts may be significantly reduced when the seatback is reclined much beyond this position. MIRRORS Rear View Mirror Your inside rear view mirror has a day and a night position. The night position reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you. Move the tab at the bottom of the mirror away from you for the day position and toward you for the night position. 63 I
  • 27.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE Special double swivel mounting bracket allows movement to position mirror up or down and side to side. C .. ) TAB DAy -.._; NIGHT Grip mirror in center when making adjustment s. WARNING - Do not put objects on the flat area behind the rear seat, as they may obscure vision and could become dangerous projectiles in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Automatic Dimming Inside Rear View Mirror LED (GREEN) 64 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE This mirror is equipped w ith two light sensors (pho­tocells) and will automaticall y change from the normal pqsition to the non-glare position when glare reaches the mirror. The sensor that detects rear glare is located on the lower right half of the mirror control panel. When glare reaches the mirror, the mirror will make a slight sound as it changes from the normal position to the non-glare position and a small green indicator will light. When the glare sub­sides, the mirror will return to the normal position after a short delay. For automatic operation, move the OFF/AUTO switch to the AUTO position. Then adjust the level of sen­sitivity of the mirror by turn ing the DISTANCE dial to any position between NEAR and FAR. FAR will be the most sensitive setting and bright headlights far away will cause the mirror to automatically switch. At the NEAR setting, bright headlights will have to be closer to you to switch the mirror. To f ind the most comfortable position, start at any position and turn the dial only one position in the desired direction. Then drive a while before adjusting it again. Large changes in the dial may be confusing until you be­come familiar with this mirror. The second light sensor, located on the front of the mirror case, measures the brightness of the light in front of your car. It automatically makes a correction in the glare trip level which you've selected on the dial. On a bright city street it will take a greater amount of glare to flip the mirror than on a dark country road. Try different settings until the most comfortable setting is reached. During the day you will not have to do anything to the mirror. It will automatically monitor for glare at night. The mirror may be turned off at any time (either in normal glare or non-glare position) and can be ad­justed by hand by slightly tipping the mirror up or down to change reflective surfaces. 65
  • 28.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE NOTE - When in the AUTO position, the mirror au­tomatically locks in the normal glare position whenever the vehicle is placed in REVERSE. This as­sures a bright, clear view in the mirror when backing up. Left and Right-Hand Electric Side View Mirrors Your vehicle is equipped with electric remote outside rear view mirrors. The switch for controlling their adjustment is located in the driver's left hand armrest. The same "joy stick" controls both LH and RH mirrors. To operate, first select the mirror to be adjusted by rotating th_, joy stick to the L or R posi­tion and then adjust the selected mirror with the joy stick. Mirror Thermometer The left hand (driver's) outside rear view mirror houses a dual scale (Fahrenheit/Celsius) ther­mometer. The thermometer becomes illuminated whenever the head lamp control knob is pulled. The thermometer lamp is also dimmed or brightened as the instrument panel lamp intensity is adjusted. Heated Mirror Feature Both mirrors become heated whenever the Electric Rear Window Defroster control is activated. Do not attempt to remove ice with a scraper as damage to the mirror may result. 66 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Convex Mirror (Right Side) The right-hand side view mirror on your vehicle is convex. A convex mirror has a curved surface and will show a wider view of the lane next to and be­hind your vehicle. WARNING - All right hand mirrors are convex as noted on face of mirror. Objects seen in mirror are closer than they appear. The mirror should not be used to estimate relative dis­tances of following vehicles when changing lanes. Use your inside mirror (or glance rearward) to deter­mine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in the convex mirror. Dual Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors VANITY MIRROR VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS DRIVER'S VISOR To illuminate the visor vanity mirrors, pull down the visor and lift the mirror cover. To adjust the amount of light move the slide switch to the left to dim and to the right to brighten. 67
  • 29.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE Cleaning Mirrors Do not clean your mirrors with a dry cloth or abra· sive materials. Use a soft cloth and mild detergent and water, or. Ford Glass Cleaner. Be careful when removing ice from outside mirrors because you may damage the reflective surface. CAUTION - Do not clean the plastic housing of the electric inside mirror with gasoline or other pe­troleum- based cleaning products. STEERING Tilt Steering Wheel PULL TO RELEASE To change the position of your steering wheel pull the tilt wheel release lever towards you. The 'lever will move with the wheel as you select the desired position. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust while the vehicle is in motion. 68 BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Power Steering Power steering uses energy from your engine to as­sist you in steering the vehicle. When the engine is off, or if the power system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered manually, but requires increased driver effort. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering system checked. CAUTION - Never hold the steering wheel against the stops (extreme right or left turn) for more than five seconds. If you hold the wheel against the stops longer than five seconds, the power steering pump could be damaged. BRAKES Stopping Distance This information is furnished in accordance with the requirements of the Consumer Information Regula­tions of the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin­istration, United States Department of Transportation. The following figure indicates braking performance that can be met or exceeded by the vehicles to which it applies under different conditions of loading and with partial failures of the braking system. The infor­mation presented represents results obtainable by skilled drivers under controlled road and vehicle con­ditions, and the information may not be correct un­der other conditions. 69
  • 30.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE Stopping Distances• Braking System (In feet (meters) from 60 mph (100Km/h) 0 1 00 200 300 400 500 600 (0) (30) (61) (91) (122) (152) (183) Full Operational Service Brake { Light ••• 194 (59) Load Maximum ~:::2~0;4~(6~2~) • Emergency Service Brakes ~ 456 (139) (With partial service brake system failure.) Brake Power Unit Failure Maximum Load (Appl icable only to vehicles •1111!1••••• 456 (139) equipped with power brakes.) 'This table applies to all Ford Motor Company passenger vehicles. Foot Service Brakes Your vehicle has power front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. They adjust automatically through nor· mal usage. An occasional or intermittent brake squeal will not affect braking effectiveness. If squeal occurs continu· ously with every application, the brakes should be checked. After driving through water, gently apply the brakes several times as the vehicle is moving slowly in order to dry the brakes. 70 WARNING - Do not drive with your foot rest­ing on the brake pedal. This will result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear and increased stopping distances. When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous application will cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in a tempo­rary loss of braking. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Parking Brake WARNING - Do not use the gearshift selector in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully AND make sure the gearshift selector is securely latched in P (PARK). Turn off the ignition when you leave the vehi­cle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. The parking brake pedal is suspended above the toe­board at the extreme left of the foot service brake pedal. To set the parking brake, apply the foot service brake with your right foot and hold it while you apply the parking brake firmly and fully with your left foot. Always check the brake warning light each time you start the engine. This light will glow with the word BRAKE when the engine is running and your parking brake is set. WARNING - If the parking brake is released and the BRAKE light remains on, this is an indi­cation of a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary. CAUTION - Driving with the parking brake set will result in poor fuel economy and rapid rear brake wear. 71 I
  • 31.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE AUTOMATIC PARKING BRAKE RELEASE UrrmglJgHJ [fRAKE RELEASE) MANUAL RELEASE LEVER-PULL TO RELEASE NOTE: AUTOMATIC 'ELEASE OPERATES ONLY IN @ (OVERDRIVE), D (DRIVE) AND 1 (LOW) POSITIONS. THE PARKING BRAKE WILL AUTOMATICALLY UN· LOCK WHEN THE GEARSHIFT SELECTOR IS MOVED TO ANY FORWARD GEAR WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING. The parking brake will not automatically release when the vehicle is shifted to the R (REVERSE) posi· tion. The parking brake can be released manually by pulling the handle located beneath the instrument panel. (See illustration.) 72 WARNING - To avoid personal injury when manually releasing the parking brake, make sure the gearshift selector is securely latched in P (PARK) and do not release the parking brake while outside the vehicle. BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic load leveling Suspension System This system maintains the vehicle height at a con­stant level for most passenger, fuel, and trunk loading conditions. The system offsets changes in the vehicle load by automatically adding air to or re­leasing air from the load leveling rear shock absorb­ers. A small electric air compressor supplies air when required. The compressor is located in the en­gine compartment on the left-hand fender apron. NOTE - Normal vehicle operation does not require any action by the driver. Please refer to the trailer towing information section of this guide for special instructions regarding trailer towing with load leveling equipped vehicles. load leveling System - Manual Fill Procedure The automatic load leveling system will maintain the right vehicle attitude for all loaded and unloaded conditions up to Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). If your vehicle does not automatically level, the system can be filled manually by disconnecting the wire har­ness from the control module. Attach an air hose to the air valve on the compressor and inflate until the rear of the vehicle is level. The control module is located in the luggage com­partment behind the right-hand trim panel. CAUTION - If the manual fill does not raise the rear of the vehicle to a level condition within 10-15 sec­onds, or does not maintain a level condition after a manual fill, the air leveling system should receive immediate attention through an authorized dealer. Do not reconnect the wire harness to the control module. 73
  • 32.
    BEFORE DRIVING YOURVEHICLE AND OPERATING MANUAL CONTROLMODULE FILL VAL/-- - ' ............ VEHICLE Vehicle Break-In .. . ................ . . 76 Economy ............................ 76 ~ •11111111 Instructions ...................... 7 8 IIIIIIM Block Heater ...................... 80 ••at Fumes ........................... 80 Vehicle Cranks But Does Not Start .. 81 Pump Shutoff Switch ................ 81 ................................. 83 I Running Out of Fuel ...................... 82 COMPRESSOR 74 75
  • 33.
    NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN Your new vehicle does not need an extensive bra in. Try not to drive continuously at the same speed, as parts tend to adjust themselves better to parts if various speeds are used during the first 1001 miles (1600 km). Approximately 100 miles (160 km)ol city driving or 1000 miles (1600 km) of highway dJiv. ing is required to break in a new set of brake linings fully. Repeated heavy stops should be avoided dur· ing this period. New vehicles should be driven 500 miles (800 km) before towing a trailer. Don't add anti-friction compounds or special break-in oils during the first few thousand miles of operation since these additives may prevent piston ring seat· ing. See Engine Oil for information on oil usage. FUEL ECONOMY Accurate fuel economy normally cannot be deter· mined until a vehicle has been driven at least 1,000 miles (1600 km) because fuel consumption is higher during the new vehicle "break-in" period. Therefore wait until a vehicle has consumed at least five fuN tanks of gasoline before calculating its fuel economy. To calculate fuel economy, divide the number of miles by the number of gallons of fuel used. In met· ric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 and d~ vide the answer by the number of kilometers traveled. This will give you the number of liters used per 100 kilometers, which is the normal method used to compare fuel economy in metric units. Do this for several tankfuls to obtain an average. Comparison with EPA Fuel Economy Estimates EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from labora· tory tests under simulated road conditions and thus are estimates which may not reflect the actual condi· tions you experience. The tests also do not exactly duplicate your personal style of driving, including all your stops, starts and lane changes. 76 n addition to your individual driving habits, opt!on~l equipment such as air conditioning can have a Slgntf­teant effect on fuel economy. Other factor~ th~t aff~ct fuel economy include vehicle load and tire mflatlon pressure. Improving Fuel Economy There are two important factors you can co~t.rol to Improve fuel economy: the n:'ec~anical condition of your vehicle and how you dnve lt. A well tuned, properly maintained vehicle ~ill deliver better fuel economy than a neglected v_ehlcle. T? _be sure that your vehicle is in top operatmg _condition for maximum fuel economy, follow the mamtenance schedule provided in the Maintenance Schedule and Record Log booklet. Your driving habits will have a si-gnifica~t influe~ce on the amount of fuel you use. By co~sclously thmk­mg about fuel economy and followmg these sug­gestions when you drive, you should be able to stretch your mileage: • Avoid changes in speed as much as possible. • Look ahead and anticipate changing traffic condi-tions. Sudden stops waste fuel. • Avoid long periods of idling. • Avoid fast acceleration. • Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. • Keep loads light. Avoid carrying unneeded items. • Keep tires inflated to the recommended pressures. I 77
  • 34.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE STARTING THE ENGINE Climate conditions and other factors play a large part in deciding how you should go about starting your vehicle. Read all the starting instructions carefully, so you'll be aware of these factors when you start your vehicle. WARNING - Before turning the key, make sure the parking brake has been set fully. Place the gearshift selector in P (PARK). After the engine starts, allow to idle for a few sec­onds. Hold foot on service brake, engage the transmission, and release parking brake. Gradually release the service brake and drive away in a normal manner. Elevated engine speeds (fast idle) are normal when the engine is started to allow for smooth engine op­eration during warm-up. These elevated engine speeds will cause the vehicle to move slightly faster when engaged in a drive gear than when the engine is at its normal warm engine idle speed. Cold Engine 1. Be sure your headlights are off. This will reduce the electrical load on your battery and allow all the power to go to the starter motor. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Turn the key to start until engine starts. Release key as soon as engine begins to run - Do Not hold key in start position AFTER engine starts. Do Not depress accelerator pedal until engine is running. 4. At temperatures below 32°F (0°C)-if engine fails to start in 10 seconds, turn key off, wait three or four seconds, then repeat procedure. 78 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 5. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C)- if engine fails to start in four seconds, turn key off, wait th ree or four seconds, then repeat procedure. 6. In subzero temperatures, the engine may require extended cranking times and several attempts to start. (Under continuous extreme cold overnight conditions, use of an engine block heater or garage is recommended.) CAUTION - Do not crank the starter continuously for more than 30 seconds at a time. Starter overheat and damage could result. If the engine fails to start or falters in starting, wait three or four seconds be­fore re-engaging the starter. If the engine is flooded, or fires intermittently, and fails to start during a 30· second cranking period, turn ignition key to OFF position, and wait two minutes before attempting to start the engine again. As soon as engine starts, release key from START position to avoid starter damage. CAUTION - Avoid extended or unnecessary idling. Extended idling of the engine (ten minutes or more), particularly at "high" engine speeds could produce excessive system temperatures that can damage your vehicle. Warm Engine 1. Turn key to "start" until engine starts. Release key as soon as engine begins to run - Do Not hold key in start position after engine starts. Do Not depress accelerator pedal until engine is running. 2. If the engine fails to start in four seconds, turn key off, wait three or four seconds, then repeat procedure. 79
  • 35.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE If Engine Fails to Start Using Preceding Instructions 1. Press the pedal all the way to the floor and hold. 2. Turn key to the START position. 3. When engine starts, release key then release ped­al gradually as engine speeds up. Engine Block Heater The engine block heater is used to warm the engine coolant which improves starting, provides for faster engine warm-up, and results in quicker response from heater-defroster system. It is recommended for use whenever the outside temperature is 0°F or be­low ( - 18°C or below). The heater is plugged into a grounded 110 volt outlet (household system) and each heater unit consumes between 400 and 600 watts of power. For best results the heater should be plugged in at least three hours prior to starting. The use of the heater for longer periods of time will not cause the engine to exceed the thermostat setting. • Do not use with ungrounded electrical systems. • Do not use with two pronged (cheater) adapters. Exhaust Fumes WARNING - Never idle engine in closed areas. Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended amount of time with the engine run­ning. Exhaust gases, particularly carbon mon­oxide, may build up. These gases are harmful and potentially lethal. Carbon monoxide is colorless and odorless, but can be present with all other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected immediately by your dealer and have the con­dition corrected. Do not drive with exhaust fumes present. 80 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE In order to guard against the possible entry of carbon monoxide into your vehicle, the exhaust system and body ventilation system should be properly i n­spected by a competent technician as follows: • Each time the vehicle is raised for service; • Whenever you detect a change in sounds from the exhaust system; • Whenever the vehicle has been damaged by im­pact with another vehicle, object and/or road obstruction. In order to afford proper ventilation, all air inlet vents I should be kept clean of snow, leaves, and other debris. If you run the engine while stopped (idle) in an un­confined area, open the windows at least one inch and adjust the heating or air conditioning to draw outside air into vehicle as follows: Set fan speed on medium or high with function con­trol lever in HEAT or DEFROST position and the temperature control lever at any desired position. IF YOUR VEHICLE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch (EFI Engines Only) ~our vehicle is equipped with an electronic fuel injec­tron system. It is also equipped with a switch that shuts off the electric fuel pump and fuel flow to the engine in the event of a major collision. The switch is located on the left-hand side of the luggage compart­ment mounted on the outboard side of the deck lid hinge support. Once the switch is triggered (i.e. white reset button is in the up position - electric fuel pump is shut off), to restart the vehicle the switch must be manually reset. 81
  • 36.
    ' STARTING ANDOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WHITE RESET BUTTON Reset Instructions • Turn ignition switch to OFF. • Check for leaking fuel. DECKLID HINGE WARNING - If you see or smell gasoline do not reset the switch. • If no fuel is apparent, reset the switch by pushing the white button. (See illustration.) • Turn ignition switch to ON for a few seconds, then to OFF. • Again, check for leaking fuel. Running Out of Fuel If your vehicle runs out of fuel, stop the vehicle on a level location away from traffic. The engine may be restarted by adding at least one gallon of fuel to the fuel tank. If the vehicle is not level, up to three gal­lons of fuel may be required. Prolonged engine cranking may be required to pump fuel from the fuel tank to the engine before the engine will start. Refer to Starting Instructions. 82 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING - Never pour gasoline in the throt­tle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. These practices could result in fire and personal injury. Pushing Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be started by pushing. Follow the directions under Use of Jumper Cables. Battery The new original equipment Motorcraft mainte­nance- free battery does not require the addition of water during its normal service life. The vents, which are for venting only, are part of the cover and cannot be removed. Keeping the top of the battery clean and dry will give longer, trouble-free operation. Also, make certain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the battery cables or terminals, remove the cables (negative cable first) and clean the cables and termi­nals with a wire brush. Neutralize the acid with a so­lution of baking soda and water. Install the positive cable, then the negative cable, applying a small quantity of grease to the top of each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion. Battery Replacement When the original equipment battery requires re­placement, under warranty, it may in some instances be replaced by a Ford authorized low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for water additions if necessary. The electrolyte level should be checked at least every · 24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in tem­peratures up to 90°F (32°C) and more often in tem­peratures above 90°F (32°C). Keep the electrolyte level in ~ach cell up to the level indicator. Do not overfill. 83
  • 37.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE If the level gets low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, provided the water isn't hard or doesn't have a high mineral or alkali content. However, if possible, refill with distilled water. If the battery needs water quite often, have the charging system checked for a possible problem. WARNING - Batteries normally produce ex­plosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or light­ed tobacco to come near the battery. When charging or working near a battery, always shield your eyes. Always provide ventilation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to spew through the vent caps, resulting in per­sonal injury. lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Bat­t~ ries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or .clothing. Also, shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution. In case of ·acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Use of Jumper Cables WARNING - To avoid harm to yourself or _damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these directions in order. If in doubt, call for road ...service. • Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor and ignition system and other electrical parts beyond repair by connecting it to a 24-volt power supply (two 12-volt batteries in series, or a 24-volt motor generator set). 84 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not disconnect the battery of the vehicle to be started. Disconnecting the battery could damage the vehicle's electrical system. • Make sure vehicles do not touch one another. Set the parking brake fully on each. Stay clear of the engine cooling fan. • Turn on the heater blower motor of the vehicle to be started by setting the climate control system on DEFROST. Turn off all other switches and lights on both vehicles. • Make jumper cable connections. (See illustrations.) -Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive ( +) terminal of the. dead battery and the other end to the positive (+)terminal of the booster battery. - Connect one end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( - )terminal of the booster.battery, and the other end to the A/C compressor mounting bracket (as shown in the illustration) or good metallic contact spot on the engine of the vehicle to be started. Do not connect jumper to fuel lines. WARNING - Do not attach the other end to the negative (-) battery terminal, because a spark could occur and cause explosion of gases normally present around the battery. • Make sure the jumper cables are not in the way of moving engine parts. • Start the engine of the vehicl'e with the booster battery. Run the engine at a moderate speed . • Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 85
  • 38.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE • Leave all switches off except heater blower motor and reduce engine speed to idle on both vehicles to prevent possible damage to the vehicles' elec­trical systems. • Remove cables in reverse order. - Remove the negative ( - ) end of the jumper ca­ble from the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. - Remove the end of the jumper cable from the negative ( - ) terminal of the booster battery. - Remove the end of the jumper cable from the positive ( +) terminal of the booster battery. - Remove the end of the jumper cable from the positive ( +) terminal of the dead battery. 86 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE MAKE SURE VEHICLES DO NOT TOUCH MAKE CONNECTIONS IN NUMERICAL ORDER (DISCONNECT IN REVERSE ORDER 4, 3, 2, 1) AIR COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BRACKET Towing Vehicles The transmission and rear axle must be in proper working order before moving the vehicle. To move a vehicle with an inoperative transmission or rear axle, you must raise the rear wheels and tow the vehicle from the rear. 87
  • 39.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE Release the parking brake and place the transmission in N (NEUTRAL). Towed vehicles should be pulled with the driving rear wheels off the ground. If the driving wheels cannot be raised off the ground, ei­ther place them on a dolly or disconnect the drive­shaft. When it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the driving wheels on the ground and driveshaft con­nected, do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) and/or a dis­tance of 50 miles (80 km) or transmission damage could result. Towing speed is to be limited to 50 mph (80 km/h) with the driving wheels off the ground and on a smooth surface. For wrecker towing on rough pave­ment, the maximum towing speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). When a vehicle is pulled on its front wheels, the steering wheel must be clamped in the straight ahead position with a steering wheel clamping de­vice designed for towing service use, such as pro­vided by towing manufacturers. CAUTION - If the ignition key is not available to un­lock a steering column where applicable, place a dolly under the rear wheels and tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised. Do not use the vehicle's steering column lock to secure the wheels in straight ahead position when pulled from the rear. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE TRANSMISSION OPERATION When shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL to any drive gear, hold foot on service brake while engaging the transmission. Gradually release the service brake and drive away in a normal manner. 88 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE The automatic overdrive transmission provides fully automatic operation in either the @ (OVERDRIVE) or D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) position. Driving With the shift selector in @ (OVERDRIVE) gives the best fuel economy for normal driving conditions. II p R N@ D 1 II AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR tNDICATOR Automatic Overdrive Positions: P (PARK) - Locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always come to a com­plete stop before shifting into P (PARK). To latch the selector lever in P (PARK), lift it toward you (see il­lustration). Push it completely counter-clockwise against the stop and then push it forward toward the instrument panel. Make sure the gearshift selector lever is all the way forward and securely latched be­fore releasing it. You cannot shift out of P (PARK) without lifting the lever toward you and rotating it down. Always make sure the gearshift selector lever is latched in P (PARK) before leaving the driver's seat. Never leave it in any other position. Set the parking brake fully, remove the key, and lock all doors. WARNING - Do not use the P (PARK) position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the gearshift selector lever is latched in P (PARK) so that it cannot be moved without lift­ing the lever toward you and rotating it down AND set the parking brake fully. 89
  • 40.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE Turn off the ignition when you leave the vehi· cle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. R (REVERSE) (OVERDRIVE) R (REVERSE) - This position allows the vehicle to move backward. Always come to a complete stop be­fore shifting into or out of R (REVERSE), except as explained under "Rocking the Vehicle." N (NEUTRAL) - If necessary, you may start the en­gine in this position. The wheels and transmission are not locked. 90 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE @ (OVERDRIVE) - This is the NORMAL DRIVING POSITION. As the vehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts from first to second and third gear will oc­cur. The upshift to fourth gear does not occur until the vehicle approaches the desired higher cruising speed and the driver eases up on the accelerator pedal. The transmission automatically downshifts as speed decreases. The overdrive gear is specifically geared for econo­my and is not appropriate for certain hilly terrain, or towing large trailers. If the transmission shifts back and forth excessively between overdrive gear and third gear or overdrive gear fails to provide adequate I hill climbing performance (especially when on speed control), shift to D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT). The shift lever can be moved from @ to D or D to @ at any vehicle speed. D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT)- The transmission oper­ates as in @ except that it will not shift into overdrive gear. This position is useful to eliminate any excessive shifting between overdrive and third gears and also provides more engine braking than @ position. The shift lever can be moved from D to @ or @ to D at any vehicle speed. 1 (LOW) - This position can be used when max­imum engine braking is desired. To help brake the vehicle on hilly roads where D (OVERDRIVE LOCK· OUT) does not provide enough braking, shift the se­lector lever to 1 (LOW). At vehicle speeds above approximately 25 mph (40 km/ h), the transmission will shift to second gear and remain in second gear. When vehicle speed drops below approximately 25 mph (40 km/ h), the transmission will downshift to first gear and remain in first gear. Upshifts from 1 (LOW) can be made by manually shifting to @ (OVERDRIVE) or D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT). When 1 (LOW) is used for starting up, the transmission starts in first gear and stays in first gear. 91
  • 41.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE FORCED DOWNSHIFTS - To gain extra acceleration as in passing, push the accelerator to the floor. At speeds above approximately 55 mph (89 km/h) in @, the transmission will downshift from overdrive to third gear. At speeds from approximately 55 mph (89 km/h) to 25 mph (40 km/h) in @ or D, the transmis­sion will downshift to second gear. At lower speeds the transmission will downshift to first gear in either position. SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Consumption of Alcoholic Beverages FORD MOTOR COMPANY SUPPORTS THE RECOM­MENDATIONS OF THE PRESIDENTIAL COMMISSION ON DRUNK DRIVING. Exercise your good judgement and encourage others to do the same. Know your legal limits and do not exceed them. Also know your personal limits (which may be lower than the legal limits). Should you ever exceed your limits, find alternative transportation - call a cab, ask a friend to drive you. home, or call a family member to come get you. THE PRESENCE OF ALCOHOL IN SIGNIFICANT LEV­ELS IN THE BLOOD INCREASES THE PROBABILITY THE DRIVER WILL BE INVOLVED IN AN ACCIDENT. Slippery Surfaces On slippery surfaces, avoid quick movements of the steering wheel. Decrease your speed and allow for extra stopping distance required by these conditions. Apply the brakes by pumping the pedal steadily and evenly to avoid wheel lockup and loss of vehicle control. 92 WARNING - To avoid skidding on slippery roads do not downshift into 1 (LOW) at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not use fingertip speed control on slippery roads. STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE Wheel Spin If the wheels spin, move forward slowly and evenly. If this does not work, try rocking the vehicle. Rocking the Vehicle "Rocking" the vehicle is moving it forward and back­ward in a steady rhythm to gain enough momentum to move it off a particularly slippery spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward and reverse gears while pressing gently on the accelerator. If you are still stuck after a minute or two of rocking, have the vehicle pulled out. CAUTION - Prolonged rocking, even at low speeds, may cause engine overheating, transmission and axle damage or failure, or tire damage. WARNING - Do not overspeed the engine and/or spin the wheels in ~xcess of an indi­cated 35 mph (56 km/h). Speeds above 35 mph are capable of disintegrating a tire with ex­plosive force which could result in injury to a bystander or occupant. Flooded Areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel rims. Drive through slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance since wet brakes do not grip well. After driving through water, gently apply the brakes several times to dry the brakes. Tips for Safe Driving As with any new vehicle your's may drive and handle differently from your previous vehicle, and particular care should be exercised until you become ac­customed to its various features and driving characteristics. 93
  • 42.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE Safe operation of any vehicle requires that it be oper­ated within reasonable limits. Abrupt changes in acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than anticipated, especially when road conditions vary. For example: • Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to spin, perhaps leading to moving of the rear of the vehicle from side to side- "fish-tailing." • Extreme braking can cause wheels to lock and slide, making it difficult to control the direction of the vehicle. Use a "squeeze" technique- push on the brake pedal with steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. • Abruptly releasing the accelerator or braking hard when your vehicle is in a severe curve and at a speed which is high in relationship to the severity of the curve (and to such other factors as the road, weather, and tire conditions) may cause the vehi­cle to change its direction of travel. If this occurs turn the steering wheel smoothly to the extent nec­essary to correct the vehicle's direction of travel. If possible, avoid application of the brakes. However, if braking is necessary, it should be done by gently employing the "squeeze" technique described above. FINGERTIP SPEED CONTROL Speed control allows you to automatically control the speed of your vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h). The switches used to set the speed control are on the steering wheel. 94 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING- To avoid loss of vehicle control, do not use the automatic speed control in heavy traffic or on winding, slippery or un­paved roads. CAUTION - Do not shift to N (NEUTRAL) when using the speed control. This will cause the engine to overspeed. To Set Speed Press the ON switch momentarily. Manually acceler­ate to the desired speed. Press the SET/ACCEL switch momentarily: Do not keep the SET/ACCEL switch pressed down or your speed will continue to in­crease. Release the accelerator pedal and the set speed-will be maintained. With the speed control on, you may increase your speed for passing as you normally would, by de­pressing the accelerator. When the accelerator is re­leased, the speed control will return your vehicle to the set speed. When going up or down steep hills, the vehicle may lose or gain speed even though the speed control is on. 95
  • 43.
    STARTING AND OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE NOTE- In hilly terrain, at higher elevations or when pulling a trailer, it may be preferable to drive in D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) to improve speed control performance. CAUTION - Use only properly installed FCC ap­proved radio transmitting equipment. Use of other transmitting equipment may cause the speed con­trol to malfunction. To Change Set Speed To reset to a lower speed, press and hold the COAST switch. When the vehicle has slowed to the desired speed, release the switch. To reset for an increase in speed, use either of the following methods: • Accelerate to the desired speed and press the SET/ ACCEL switch momentarily. When the switch is re­leased, the new speed will be maintained. • Press and hold the SET/ACCEL switch until your vehicle reaches the desired speed. Release the switch and the new speed will be maintained. To Cancel Speed Control Use either of the following procedures. • Slightly depress the brake pedal. This cancels the automatic control until you press the SET/ACCEL or RESUME switch. • Press the OFF switch. The automatic control will remain off until you press the ON switch and reset the speed. The speed control is also cancelled each time the ig­nition switch is turned off or the hazard warning lights are turned on. 96 STARTING AND OPERATING YOUR VEHICL To Resume at Previously Set Speed If the system is shut off by depressing the ~rake ped­al, the vehicle can be returned to the prev1ously. set speed by pressing the left side of the R~SUM~ sw1tch (hold for one or two seconds). The veh1cle Will accel­erate gradually to the previously set speed an~ then maintain that speed. Resume must be activated above 30 mph (48 km/ h). 97
  • 44.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE Door Handles/Locks . . ................... 1 00 Outside Door Locks ...... . .............. 1 00 Inside Door Locks ....................... 1 00 Power Locks ........................... 1 0 1 Keyless Entry System ................... 1 01 Windows and Controls .................. . 105 Power .....•... . ....................... 105 Power Moonroof Glass ...... , ............ 1 06 Radios ..... . .............. : . .. ~ ......... 1 07 Travelers Information ... ~ ................ 1 08 Radio Controls ................•......... 1 08 Tape Player Controls ....... , ..... • ....... 11 0 Tape Care and Operation .•......•....... 11 2 Premium Sound System ................. 11 4 Compact Disc Player ... ; . ...... ! •••••• , .. 11 4 Power Antenna .... ' .. , . ................. 11 5 · ~shtrays and Lighters .. . ........ ; . .. ~ , , .. 116 Tractlon-Lok Axle ....... . ................ 11 6 Tires and Tire Care ..... . ~ ... ·> .......... 116 Inflation Pressure ... . .. . ... ·. ; ........ . .. 11 7 Load Limits ... . ........... . ............ 11 7 Spare Tire .. , , ........ . .... ; ; .......... 1 21 Changing a Tire ....... . ... .. ........ . .. 1 2 2 Tire Replacement ...... .. ............... 124 Tire Rotation .............. •• .. ~ ........ 125 Use of Snow Tires and Tire Chains ....... 126 99
  • 45.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE DOOR HANDlES/lOCKS Outside Door locks ib ;:==:==::::::::;~ LOCK._. (/ LPITEFONT ~)1 IDJI ~~~~~~~;KEY LOCK O ,_ -~ To Open-insert square DOOR HANDLE key-turn to front of vehicle ....... FRONT OF VEHICLE Inside Door locks DRIVER'S DOOR To Lock-insert square key-turn to rear of vehicle FRONT DOOR LOCK / / / /I ·z J/-_ FRONT. - The inside door handles are located on the side door trim panels. To operate the handles, pull inward to­ward you. Pulling the inside door handles will auto­matically release only the front door locks. 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Door locks ...... --LOCK __ ,.,...,. UNLOCK FRONT--1)1111.. . The switches which control the power door locks are I located in the front seat armrests. To lock all doors, pull either door lock switch rearward. To unlock all doors, push either door lock switch forward. If you close the doors with power door locks engaged, the doors will remain locked. The manual door locks will override the power controls in case the power mech­anism should ever fail. Keyless Entry System This system is designed to allow locking or unlocking of the vehicle's doors and trunk lid without using a key. When the vehicle doors are fully closed, the ignition lock cylinder is in the ON position, the driver's seat is occupied or a heavy object is placed.on the driver's seat, and the transmission is shifted through (R) RE­VERSE, all of the doors will lock. 101
  • 46.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE KEYLESS ENTRY BUTIONS To unlock the driver's door, punch the five-digit code that appears on the warranty card or the owner's code card into the calculator-style switch group lo­cated on the driver's door. CAUTION - Do not punch the switch with a car key, ball point pen, pencil, etc. Hard objects may damage the pushbuttons. Each button should be pressed on the vertical line between the numbers because there is only one switch under each button. If more than five seconds elapse between button pushes, the system will time out, requiring that you start over. When the last button of the sequence is pushed, the driver's door will unlock. To unlock the passenger doors, button 3/4 must be pushed within five seconds of the driver's door unlocking. Pushing button 5/6 within five seconds of unlocking either the driver or passenger doors, will unlock the trunk lid. Depressing buttons 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time will lock all of the doors. In addition to unlocking by using the code appearing on your owner's code card or the warranty card, you may also program in a second code of your choice. To program this second code, you first have to enter the code from your code card. Then, within five sec­onds, depress the 1/2 button. Then, within five sec­onds of each other, depress five buttons in any sequence you desire. This button sequence will be retained by the system as the second code. To erase this second code, simply enter the warranty card code, depress button 1/2, and wait six seconds. 102 ( GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Depressing any one of the five buttons will illuminate the switch group and turn on the illuminated entry system. It has been demonstrated that persons idly depres.s­ing the switch buttons frequently follow certam sequences. Therefore, it is recommended that tem­porary codes 1/2-3/4-5/6-7/8-9/0, or 9/0-7/8-5/6-3/4-1/2, or any that use just one button not be used. NOTE_ Should the keyless entry system become in­operative the regular key-operated system can be used to lock and unlock the doors. A record of the permanent computer code for the keyless entry system can be found in four places: • A sticker with the printed number c~de. will. be taped to the computer module on the ms1de nght hand cowl trim panel. • A second sticker with the code will be taped on the lower L.H. corner on the front of the Owner War­ranty Card. This card is located inside the glove box. • A third sticker with the code will be taped on the underside of the deck lid. • An owner's wallet card will have the number printed on it. Glove Compartment Latch SQUEEZE TO OPEN GLOVE COMPARTMENT LATCH .LJ1tilM. USE ROUND OR OVAL HEADED KEY TO LOCK/UNLOCK 103
  • 47.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE Remote Control Trunk Release LOCATED INSIDE GLOVE BOX PRESS BUTTON TO ~~-OPEN TRUNK LID IGNITION IN ON OR ACC Deck Lid (Trunk) The lock cylinder cover must be rotated to the left to insert the key. Turn the key to the right to unlatch the trunk. Close the lock cylinder cover by lifting the cover over the stop or by pushing the top left-hand corner of the cover. 104 USE OVAL HEADED KEY TURN RIGHT TO OPEN GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Decklid (Trunk) Pulldown Latch System This system eliminates the need of having to "slam" the decklid down in order to close it securely. To operate, simply push down on top of the decklid with enough pressure to allow the latch to engage. The power mechanism will then automatically complete the pulldown and securely latch the decklid shut. A slight whirring sound will be heard when the power pulldown is operating. WARNING- To prevent the possibility of p~r­sonal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from all edges of the decklid when clos­ing. Do not attempt to stop the automatic pulldown or clear objects from the sealing edges once the initial latching has been made. When the sound of the power pulldown has stopped, the decklid can be reopened with ei­ther the key or the remote release. WINDOWS AND CONTROLS Power Windows The switches for controlling the power windows are located in the armrests below each window. The master control panel which operates all four win­dows is located in the driver's armrest. The switches on the other door armrest(s) individually control only the window next to them. The ignition lock cylinder must be in the ON or ACC position to use your power controls. To lower a window, push the window switch toward the rear of the vehicle. To raise the window, push the switch forward. WARNING - Do not allow children an oppor­tunity to play with power windows. They may accidentally injure themselves, perhaps seriously. 105
  • 48.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE OPEN-.----t~ CLOSE FRONT~ LOCK UNLOCK Power Vent Windows The vent windows are controlled by the power win­dow switches. The vent window opens first and closes last when you use the power controls. If you want to open the vent without lowering the side win­dow, release the switch before the side window starts to open. Window Lock Switch The driver of the vehicle may lock out all window switches except the master controls by pulling the window lock switch rearward. When the switch is pushed forward, the window(s) may be individually operated again. Power Moonroof Glass (Optional) WARNING - Do not allow children an oppor­tunity to play with the power roof. They may accidentally injure themselves, perhaps seriously. To operate the panel, place the ignition key in the ON or ACC position and use the two-way control switch located above the windshield between the sun vi­sors. Push the rear of the switch to open the panel and the front of the switch to close the panel. The Moonroof has a sliding shade which can be manually opened or closed, when the glass panel is closed. This shade will automatically open and lock when the Moonroof glass panel is opened. 106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CONTROL SWITCH~ 4~ ~t' 0 ' Moving parts are permanently lubricated. The o~ ly normal maintenance is to periodically wipe the gUide rail covers with a clean cloth. MANUAL OPERATION - The panel can be closed manually as described below; however, do this only if absolutely necessary. • Open the glove box and get the hand crank tool from the envelope. • Remove the small round drive gear access plug lo­cated in the center of the headlining just rearward of the roof panel opening and over the rear seat. Grasp with fingers and pull downward. • Insert the end of crank tool into the allen fitting of the motor shaft. Turn handle clockwise until roof panel is fully closed. Replace the cover, and take your vehicle to your dealer for diagnosis and repair. RADIOS CAUTION - Use only properly installed FCC ap­proved radio transmitting eq~ipment. u.se of other transmitting equipment may mterfere with yo~r ve­hicle's electrical system and may cause the eng me to malfunction or stall. To aid in the enjoyment of the factory-installed sound system in your vehicle, Ford M~tor Company offers the following operating suggestions. 107
  • 49.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE Ford electronic radios have four station select mem­ory buttons and various other controls which are explained in the following illustrations. Additional instructions for radios with tape players are also provided. Traveler's Information Ford radios will receive very limited range Traveler's Information Service broadcasts (localized road con­ditions, specialized instructions, etc.) at the extreme ends of the AM broadcast band (530 and 1610 Kilohertz). Electronically Tuned Radio/Cassette Player with Ford JBL Audio System A. Power is supplied when ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. Depress the POWER switch to turn the radio ON; depress again to turn the radio OFF. 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE B. Indicates STATION FREQUENCY. (Dims when lights are on.) C. Indicates STEREO RECEPTION when lit. D. Indicates AM or FM BAND SELECTION. E. Volume Control - Rotate clockwise to increase volume. F. Tone Controls - Your electronic radio has indi­vidual controls to adjust the BASS and TREBLE. To adjust BASS, rotate the control clockwise for more BASS; counterclockwise for less. To adjust TREBLE, rotate the control clockwise for more TREBLE; counterclockwise for less. G. Speaker Controls - Two controls adjust sound balance between the left and right sides of the vehicle (L & R) and between the front and back of the vehicle (F & 8). H. Band Select - Rotate the outer knob to select AM or FM band reception. I. Press once to SCAN up-band. Stops eight sec­onds on each listenable station, then continues. Press again to hold on station. NOTE: AM/FM indicator (D) flashes in scan mode. J . Seek - To tune up-band, hold in the "seek-up" button; to tune down-band, hold in the "seek­down" button. When released, tun ing stops on the next listenable station. K. Memory Button Tuning - Pushing any one of the four station select buttons causes the radio to tune to the station previously stored. When AM/FM switch is in the AM position, four AM stations may be selected. Four FM stations may be selected when the radio is in the FM mode. 109
  • 50.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE STORING A STATION IN MEMORY - Push button tuning is provided by storing eight of your preferred broadcasting stations (four FM and four AM) in the radio's memory. To set the memory button, use manual, seek or scan tuning to select the desired station. When the station is tuned, depress and hold a memory button. When the memory button is depressed, the station's sound will be interrupted for approximately two seconds. When the station's sound returns, the button is "set" and may be released. This process is repeated for each of the memory buttons. MANUAL TUNING (DOWN OR UP) - Rotate the inner knob (I) clockwise to tune "up"; rotate coun­terclockwise to tune "down". FAST TUNE- Rotate the inner knob (I) clockwise (or counterclockwise) twice quickly and hold. The radio will rapidly tune up (or down) the AM or FM band. Tape Player Controls, Electronically Tuned Radios­with Cassette Tape Player (Optional) 110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE A. Insert tape cassette, open edge to right, to PLAY (radio On, ignition ON or ACC). Adjust volume, tone and speaker balance as for radio programs. At the end of the tape , the cassette automatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape. At any time, the tape transport mechanism can be changed to play the other side of tape by pressing the REV button (1) . B. Press for playing tapes recorded using the DOL­BY ® SYSTEM*. Press again to deactivate. C. Fast Tape Travel Buttons- If the direction of the arrows for the button pressed is the same as the direction of tape travel (indicator E), the tape will fast advance the program being played. If the indicator and button arrows are opposite, the tape will fast rewind. To resume tape play, par­tially depress the EJECT (H) button. This will in­terrupt the fast advance/rewind mode and allow the player to resume tape play. D. Indicates DOLBY® SYSTEM activated when lit. E. "Arrow" indicates direction of tape travel. F. Depress the Cr02 (Equalization) switch (F) when playing metal tapes. On the Electronically Tuned Radio with the Ford JBL Audio System, press for DNR (Dynamic Noise Re­duction System). Press again to deactivate. NOTE - The Ford JBL System incorporates automatic type equalization. The system determines whether metal or non-metal tape is in use and auto­matically adjusts for the proper equalization. G. Your Electronic Cassette Radio has an Automatic Music Search feature which allows for easily searching the cassette tape for the start of a desired program. 111
  • 51.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE The Music Search feature is activated (light on) by pressing the AMS (Automatic Music Search) button. To locate the start of the next program on the tape, push the fast tape travel button with the arrow direc­tion corresponding to the tape travel indicator (indi­cator E). To locate the start of the program being played, push the fast tape travel button with the arrow direction opposite to the tape travel indicator (indicator E). This process may be repeated until the desired program is located. NOTE - There must be a minimum of four (4) sec­onds "quiet" between programs for the Music Search feature to distinguish between the separate programs. Pressing the AMS button again will de-activate the Music Search feature, and the Fast Tape Travel but­tons will resume their normal function. H. Press to EJECT cassette. NOTE- Before turning off your radio or the ignition of your car, always eject any cassette being played. Leaving th~ tape mechanism stopped while a tape is engaged can result in damage to the tape, pinch roll­er, or capstan. *The DOLBY~ SYSTEM is a noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Laborato­ries. DOLBY~ and the double-D (£t) symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Hints On The Care And Operation Of Tapes TEMPERATURE EXTREMES: Be careful not to expose tape cassettes to intense sunlight or other tem­perature extremes. If they do become exposed to high or low temperatures, allow each cassette to reach a moderate temperature before playing them. During cold weather, it is advisable to take cassettes indoors overnight to protect them. 112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE OPERATING PRECAUTIONS: When inserting a cas­sette into the tape slot, it should be firmly pushed in to assure that it is properly seated. Do not leave a tape cassette engaged in the tape player slot when not in use. Remove it completely to permit the slot door to close and keep out airborne dirt. . . Take care to protect the open edge of the tape from damage, dirt, oil and grease. When not in use, store tapes in their protective cases. If a cassette is found with loose tape, be sure it is rewound firmly around the hubs before using it. CASSETTE IRREGULARITIES - Cassette tapes can vary in performance and size. If any one cassette gives continual trouble, discontinue using it. Tape Player Performance If weak or wavering sound is encountered, it is sug­gested that the player be checked by using a tape of known quality. If the tape cassette is ruled out as the cause, routine cleaning may restore normal operation. For best results, use cassette tapes with no more than 90 minutes of playing time. The thinness of the tape used in C120 and C180 cassettes makes the tape more likely to stretch and break. Periodic Cleaning of Tape Player Over a period of time, the playback head, capstans, and pinch rollers gather an oxide residue from the tape as it passes these components while playing. Depending upon the quality of tapes used, more or less oxide will accumulate. Oxide accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound and damage to the cassette tape and player. 113
  • 52.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE It is recommended, for best performance, that the player be cleaned every 10 to 12 hours of playing time with a Ford cassette player cleaning cartridge available at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. The use of other cassette cleaning products is not recommended, as these could cause damage to your player or cassette tapes. Premium Sound System The Premium Sound system uses a separate power amplifier which increases the sound level and fidelity from the speakers. Premium sound is functioning whenever the radio is on. Compact Disc Player (Optional) A B c J H G F E 0 A. Reset Button B. Locking Door- When disc is in or when there is no power, the door is locked. C. Eject Button - Push to eject the compact disc. D. Play/Pause/Stop Button - Press to put player into pause mode. To stop, press and hold for two (2) seconds. 114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE E. Automatic Music Search - Press once to go to top of next track. Press N times to go to the Nth next track (for example, press three (3) t imes to go to the top of the third next track). F. Automatic Music Search - Press once to go to the beginning of the same track. Press N + 1 times to go to the top of the Nth previous track (for example, press four (4) times to go to the be­ginning of the third previous track). G. Fast Forward and Rewind- Press the right side for fast forward or the left side for rewind. The speed will increase ten times and the sound will be audible at 12DB. H. Return Button- Press to return to top of the first I. track. I Display Button - Press to change display be­tween track numeral and time (elapsed play time). J. Repeat Button - Press once to repeat current track. Press twice to repeat the entire disc. Power Antenna ANTENNA POWER ANTENNA SWITCH r (LOCATED TO THE RIGHT OF THE CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL)-Push switch down and hold to lower antenna; push switch up and hold to raise antenna. NOTE - Replacement antenna masts are available through your dealer. 115
  • 53.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE ASHTRAYS AND LIGHTERS Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray on the in­strument panel, in the right front door armrest, and in each rear door armrest. To open the instrument panel ashtray, pull out on the handle of the ashtray. To remove any of the ashtrays, pull up on the snuffer and lift out the ash receptacle. The cigar lighter is located in the ashtray on the in­strument panel to the right of the steering column. Lighters are also included in the rear door armrests. To operate the lighter, push it in all the way and then release it. When it is ready for use, it will spring back to its normal position. Do not hold lighter in manually. TRACTION-LOK AXLE This axle provides added traction on slippery sur­faces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Trac­tion- Lok axle functions as a standard rear axle. NOTE - Extended use of other than conventional spare tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. WARNING - On vehicles equipped with a Traction-Lok axle, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when chang­ing a tire. The wheel still on the ground could cause the vehicle to move. TIRES AND TIRE CARE For proper performance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, it is essential that you always maintain rec­ommended inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle. 116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Inflation Pressure Before driving each day, glance at all your tires. If one looks lower than the others, have the pressure of all tires checked. Otherwise, check pressure every few weeks. Check spare tire regularly. Refer to the tire decal attached to the front face of the right door pillar, for cold inflation pressures and load limits of recommended size tires. WARNING - Over- or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. - LOAD LIMITS When loading your vehicle, adding accessory equip­ment or towing a trailer, it is important for you to stay within the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and the front and rear gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The GAWR and GVWR are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label attached to. the rear edge face of the left front door. These ratmgs are the design limits of the vehicle, not just of the tires. WARNING - H any of these limits are exceed· ed, vehicle breakdown and possible personal injury can result. High Speed Driving WARNING - Ford Motor Company does not advocate driving over posted speed limits nor at excessive speeds. Driving over 85 mph (137 km/h) even for a short time may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. 117
  • 54.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE If your vehicle must be driven at continuous speeds of 75 mph to 85 mph (120 km/h to 137 km/ h) in an area where such speeds are permitted by law, the cold inflation pressure shown on the decal must be increased by 4 psi (28 kPa). In no event, however, should you exceed the maximum inflation pressure which is molded on the outer side of the tire. Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts If you have aluminum wheels, they are equipped with anti-theft wheel lug nuts (one per wheel). The key and your registration card are attached to the lug wrench stowed with the spare tire. Do not lose the registration card. You must send it to the manufac­turer, not the dealer, to get a replacement key if yours is lost. To remove or install the anti-theft lug nut, insert the key into the slot in the lug nut. Place the lug nut wrench on the key and, while applying pressure on the key, remove or install the lug nut. Mark the anti­theft lug nut location on the wheel before removing it. CAUTION - Make sure the key is held square to the lug nut. If the key is on an angle, it may damage the key and the anti-theft wheel lug nut. Do not use a power impact wrench on the lug nut key. ANTI-THEFT qD •. ~u~ LUG NUT KEY 118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE An additional balance weight has been installed 180o ± 10° opposite the anti-theft wheel lug nut. To main­tain proper wheel balance the anti-theft locking lug nut should always be reinstalled to its original wheel bolt hole location after service. Refer to instruction sheet on anti-theft lug nut usage attached to the inside trunk lid. Anti-Theft Locking Wire-Style Wheel Covers (Optional) Your vehicle may have a locking wire-style wheel cover feature. Each wire-style wheel cover has a lock bolt located behind the center hub ornament. A spe­cial key wrench is required for prying off the center hub ornament and for removing the lock bolt. The key wrench has been stored in the glove compart­ment. Do not lose the key wrench or you will have great difficulty in the event you need to remove a wheel cover. I 119
  • 55.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE A registration number is recorded on a card attached to the key wrench. Complete the registration card and return it to the lock manufacturer. Keep the I.D. card portion in a safe place for future use in ordering a replacement key wrench if it is necessary. Aluminum Wheels Your vehicle is equipped with aluminum wheels which are protected with a clear coating. CAUTION-Do not use acid wheel cleaners, abra­sive cleaners, scouring pads, etc. as they will damage the paint. Wash the wheels in the same manner that you wash the car body, with a mild detergent such as Ford wash and wax concentrate. Grease and road tar should be removed with an automotive tar remover. NOTE- Automatic car wash t ire brushes may damage aluminum and styled road wheel protective coatings. Before using such a service, be sure abrasive type brushes are not being used. 120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SPARE TIRE Spare Tire Location and Removal STOWAGE IN TRUNK Conventional Spare Tire FRONT OF VEHICLE ~ This spare tire is like the other original equipment tires on your vehicle. It may be used as a spare or as a conventional tire. When in storage, be sure the spare is inflated to the recommended pressure at all times. 121
  • 56.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE Changing a Tire In case of sudden tire failure, avoid heavy brake ap­plication. Gradually decrease speed. Hold steering wheel firmly and move slowly to a safe, off-road place. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition and turn on the hazard flasher system. When using a temporal (mini) spare tire, follow the usage instructions on the small wheel decal and then continue this procedure. I FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS: • Make sure the gearshift selector lever is latched in the P (PARK) position. • Set the parking brake fully. Block the wheel diago­nally opposite the wheel being changed. WARNING - When one rear wheel is lifted off the ground, the P (PARK) position, even if prop­erly engaged, will not keep the vehicle from moving and possibly slipping off the jack. To prevent inadvertent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully and always block the wheel diagonally op­posite the wheel being changed. • Remove the spare tire and jack from stowage. • Remove wheel cover if required with tap~red end of wheel nut wrench by inserting and twisting han­dle and then prying against inner wheel cover flange. • Loosen the wheel lug nuts one-half turn each but do not remove them until the tire is raised off the ground. Pulling up on handle rather than pushing is recommended to develop maximum force to loosen wheel lug nuts. (See section on anti-theft wheel lug nuts if your vehicle is so equipped.) 122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE JACK HANDLE BUMPER SLOT (LOCATED ON UNDERSIDE OF BUMPER) ~I I I WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE • Assemble the jack by inserting the bottom of the jack post into the base. The bottom of the po~t is smooth and will enter far enough to rest agamst I the bottom of the base. • Pull upward on the small lever near the jack handle socket. Slide the movable portion of the jack as­sembly up to meet the bumper. • Align the jack hook with the right or left slot in the bumper, insert the hook into slot, and check for a snug fit. • Adjust the jack position so the bottom o! the col­umn is slightly angled in toward the veh1cle. WARNING _: To minimize the risk of personal injury, do not put any portion of your body un­der the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack. The jack is provided for emergency wheel and tire changing only. H you wish to service the vehicle, use jack stands. Never start the en­gine while the vehicle is on the jack. • Insert the handle in the jack. Move the handle up and down until the tire is off the ground. Be care­ful that the jack position doesn't change, or the jack could slip. 12
  • 57.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE • Remove the wheel lug nuts. Mark the location of the anti-theft lug nut on the wheel before removing it. Pull the wheel off and immediately replace it with the spare. When using a temporal (mini) spare tire, follow the instructions on the Wheel Usage decal and then con­tinue this procedure. • Replace the wheel nuts with the beveled edges f<~c­ing inward. Tighten them snugly and carefully. Don't attempt to tighten them fully until you lower the vehicle, or the vehicle could be forced off the jack. • Place the small lever, located near the jack handle socket, in the down position to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack, moving the handle up and down as you did to raise the vehicle. Keep a firm grasp on the handle during this operation. • Tighten each of the lug nuts fully in a diagonal se­quence as shown in the illustration. Install the valve extension from the replaced tire onto the spare. • When using a conventional spare tire, align the wheel cover with the valve stem extension match­ing the hole in the cover. Install the cover and be sure it is snapped in place all the way around. • Stow the tire, jack and wrench. • Unblock the wheels. Tire Replacement If the tire is worn evenly across the tread, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace the tire. Replacement of unevenly worn tires may be necessary before an indicator band appears across the entire tread. 124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING - When you replace tires, never mix radial, bias-belted or bias type tires. Use only the tire sizes listed on the tire decal at­tached to your vehicle. Make sure that all tires are of the same size, speed rating and load-car-rying capacity. Use only tire and wheel com­binations I as recommended on the tire decal or by your dealer. Failure to follow these precau-tions can adversely affect the safety and han-dling of your vehicle. Failure to follow any of the above tire replace­ment precautions may result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control and possible injury to vehicle occupants. Tires larger or smaller than originally installed may .affect the accuracy of the speedometer. Consult your dealer about the need to change speedometer drive gears. Tire Rotation Front and rear tires perform different jobs and can wear differently depending on the type of vehicle ~n~ yo~r d~iving habits. To equalize wear and op­timize t1re life, rotate tires at about 7,500 miles (12 000 km) and then each 15,000 miles (24 000 km) thereafter. · 125
  • 58.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE If you notice abnormal wear, find and correct the cause, and rotate the tires following the diagram to allow more even wear. Never use the temporal spare for tire rotation or as a regular tire. RECOMMENDED TIRE ROTATION DIAGRAM 4-TIRE ROTATION LF I I RF txt LR I I RR Use of Snow Tires and Tire Chains WARNING - Snow tires should be of a size and type equivalent to the other tires on the vehicle. Otherwise the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected. Snow tires installed on the rear require a 4 psi (28 kPa) increase in the cold inflation pressure above that shown on the tire pressure decal, but not to exceed the maximum cold inflation pressure shown on the tire. CAUTION - Tire chains are not recommended. In case of emergency, or where required by law, chains may be used if they are the proper size for the tires and are installed tightly (no slack) with ends se­curely restrained. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Drive slowly. If any contact of the chains against the vehicle is heard, stop and re­tighten the chains. Use only SAE Class "S" tire chains. Use of other chains may damage your vehicle. 126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning White Sidewall Tires Clean tires with Ford Whitewall Tire Cleaner or equiv­alent. Follow directions on container and rinse tires and wheels with plenty of clean water. Tire Quality Grading New passenger cars are fitted with tires having Uni­form Tire Quality Grading Information (described below) molded into the tire sidewall. United States Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based I on the wear rate of the tire when tested under con­trolled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire grade 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well Olil the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative·performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac­tices, and differences in road characteristics and 'climate. TRACTION A 8 C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are, A, 8, and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled condi­tions on specified government test surfaces of as­phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARN lNG: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. 127
  • 59.
    GETTING TO KNOWYOUR VEHICLE TEMPERATURE ABC The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested un· der controlled conditions on a specified indoor labo· ratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and re­duce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load· ing, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. 128 TRAILER TOWING Recommended Trailer Towing Equipment .. 1 30 Vehicle Wiring Harness ............... · · · 1 31 Hitches ................... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1 31 Safety Chains .................... · . · · · · · 1 3 2 Vehicle/1'aller Load .............. . ..... · · 1 3 3 Hook-Up and Adjustment Procedure - Load Equalizing Hitch with Automatic Load Leveling Suspension System ........... 1 34 High Altitude Towing ................. · · · · 1 34 Trailer Lights ........................ · · .. 1 3 5 Speed Control Operation ................. 1 35 Maintenance ................. · · · · · · · · · · · · 135 129
  • 60.
    TRAILER TOWING TRAILERTOWING Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehi­cle's engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety and the care of your vehicle, properly match the trailer-towing equipment to the trailer. Make sure that all towing equipment is properly and safely attached to your vehicle. For advice on trailer towing, consult a reputable trailer dealer or rental agency. Recommended Trailer Towing Equipment TOWING CLASS I·LIGHT Ill MEDIUM Gross Trailer Up to 2000 lbs. 50001bs. Weight (lbs.) (907 Kg) (2272 Kg) Maximum 200 lbs. 750 lbs. Tongue Load (lbs.) (91 Kg) (227 Kg) Hitch Load Load Design Carrying Equalizing Type Type Trailer·Tow Not Class Ill Pkg. Package Option Required Required WARNING- Towing trailers beyond the max­imum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limits of the vehicle and could re­sult in engine damage, transmission damage, loss of control and personal injury. 130 TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing significantly increases the powertrain load, particularly in hilly country and with heavier trailers. Under these condi t ions you may experience an excessive amount of shifting between OVERDRIVE and THIRD gears. Moving the sh ift se­lector to D (OVERDRIVE LOCKOUT) will eliminate this condition plus provide better engine braking. When driving in less hilly country or with a lighter trailer load you may move the gearshift selector lever to @ (OVERDRIVE) without experiencing ex­cessive shifting. When descending steep grades, it is recommended to place the gearshift selector lever in the 1 (low) position to shift the transmission into second gear and provide additional engine braking. NOTE - An auxiliary automatic transmission oil cooler is recommended for any trailer-towing other than temporary rental cross-town towing. Vehicle Wiring Harness Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed Trailer Towing Package include a trailer wiring harness and a Trailer Towing Package wiring kit. This kit is pack­aged in a cardboard box (located in the luggage com­partment) and includes two jumper harnesses to connect your trailer wiring and also installation instructions. Hitches There are currently two types of hitches in common use - the simple load-carrying for light trailers and the load-equalizing (weight-distributing) for medium and heavy trailers. Choose a proper hitch and ball and make sure its location is compatible with that of the trailer. Slots have been provided for accom­modating a universal multi-clamp trailer hitch. Each slot is located on the upper surfaces of the rear bumper. Both are designed to accommodate a hitch capable of handling CLASS I trailer loads. 131
  • 61.
    TRAILER TOWING NOTE- An anti-sway device, built into the hitch or installed separately, is recommended for trailers heavier than 2000 pounds (907 kg). LOAD CARRYING HITCH - This type of hitch places the entire tongue load of the trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle and therefore is limited for use with CLASS I trailers (up to 2000 lbs., 907 kg gross loaded weight and 200 lbs., 91 kg maximum tongue load). LOAD-EQUALIZING HITCH - This type of hitch dis­tributes the tongue load to all . four wheels of your vehicle and a portion of this weight back to the trailer wheels. These hitches are designed for tow­ing CLASS Ill trailers (up to 5000 lbs., 2270 kg gross loaded trailer weight and 750 lbs., 341 kg tongue load). CAUTION - Do not use single clamp bumper hitch­es or hitches which attach to the vehicle's axle. However, multi-clamp bumper hitches for occasional use of a rental trailer are acceptable, if properly attached. Follow towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. Never attach safety chains to the bumper. To avoid vehicle damage and handling difficulty, distribute the trailer load with 10 to 15% of the gross trailer weight on the hitch. Always tie the load down securely. Safety Chains Always use safety chains between your vehicle and trailer. This will avoid danger to road users if the hitch fails. Cross chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack fo r turn ing corners. Connect safety chains to the vehicle frame or hook retainers. Never attach safety chains to the bumper. For rental t railers, fol low rental agency instructions for proper hookup of safety chains. 132 TRAILER TOWING VehiclefTrailer Load WARNING - Never exceed either the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR front and rear) or the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). This is shown on the Safety Compliance Certifica­tion Label. Overloading can cause vehicle breakdown and damage and possible personal injury. CLASS I TRAILERS - To figure your vehicle load with a light duty trailer, add the actual weight of the driver, passengers, luggage, any extra equipment and the tongue load of your trailer. If additional equipment has been added to your vehicle since de­livery, include this weight in figuring your load. If you don't know the individual weights of the driver, passengers, luggage, extra equipment, and tongue load, use this method for calculating your total vehi­cle load. First, weigh your vehicle without the driver, passengers, and luggage. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, passengers, luggage and trailer at­tached. Subtract the two weights to find out the ve­hicle load. If the vehicle load is greater than the rated load capacity shown on the tire decal, remove enough weight from the vehicle to bring the load down to the rated load capacity. CLASS II and Ill TRAILERS - To figure the vehicle load for CLASS II and Ill trailer towing, first weigh your vehicle without the driver, passengers, and lug­gage. Record this information. Now hook up the trailer to your vehicle and adjust the hitch spring bars until the vehicle and trailer are level. For load leveler equipped vehicles, see Hook-up instructions. With the trailer hooked to the vehicle, weigh the vehicle with the driver, passengers, and luggage. Record this figure. Now, subtract the weight of the vehicle without the trailer from the weight of the vehicle with the trailer. Compare this load to the allowable load for your vehicle which is shown on the tire decal. 133
  • 62.
    TRAILER TOWING Hook-Upand Adjustment Procedure - Load Equalizing Hitch with Automatic Load Leveling Suspension System For vehicles equipped with the optional load leveling suspension system, always use the following pro­cedure to hook up a trailer with a load equalizing hitch: 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. With the ig­nition on, allow the vehicle to level automatically (approximately one to two minutes). 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 3. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 4. Attach trailer tq vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizer(s) so that the front bumper height is 0 to 1/2 inch below the unloaded height. After ad­justment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in step 3. CAUTION - Adjusting an equalizing hitch on vehi­cles equipped with the optional load leveling system so that the rear bumper is at the same height or higher than it was unloaded could result in venting of air from the leveling system. This could cause premature wear in the load leveling shock absorbers. High Altitude Towing High altitudes reduce vehicle performance and tow­ing ability. For improved vehicle and braking performance reduce maximum gross trailer weight. 134 TRAILER TOWING Trailer Brakes WARNING - Separate trailer brakes of ade­quate size are required on trailers weighing over 1000 lbs. (454 kg) loaded weight. Do not couple a trailer hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle brake system. Failure to heed these precautions may result in inadequate braking and possibly personal injury. Electric brakes, either manual or automatic, or surge type hydraulic trailer brakes are considered safe sys­tems if properly installed and adjusted as recom­mended by their manufacturer. Be sure your brakes conform to local and Federal regulations. Trailer Lights CAUTION - Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to the lighting system of the vehicle. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental trailer agency for correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer and heavy-duty flashers. Speed Control Operation Towing a trailer may affect the operation of your ve­hicle's speed control, if so equipped. For additional information, refer to the Speed Control section of this guide. Maintenance Towing a trailer for long distances is considered to be "severe service" and your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance. Consult the Mainte­nance Schedule and Record Log booklet for addi­tional information. WARNING - Improper leveling of the vehicle or weight in excess of the amount shown on the tire decal can cause rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control and possible injury to vehicle occupants. 135
  • 63.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES Maintenance Information . · .......... .... . . 138 Emlsslons Control Systems .... . .. ....... 138 Refill Capacities ....... ............. ..... 140 Motorcraft Service Pa:rts ................. 141 Lubricant §peclflcatlons .......•. ...•.. · .. . 141 Electrical Clrcult Protection ........•.... . 144 FUSeS .•••. ' .• .• -~ ......•......••••..... ·144 Circuit Breakers .......•..... ·.: .... : ... 14 7 Light Bu.lb Description .... ; ......... ·•~ ... 149 137
  • 64.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES MAINTENANCE INFORMATION All maintenance information for your vehicle is pro­vided in a separate publication entitled 1988 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND RECORD LOG. The Scheduled Maintenance Services listed in the publication are required because they are consid­ered essential to the life and performance of your vehicle. Ford Motor Company recommends that you also per­form the Owner Maintenance Checks also listed in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND RECORD LOG. These services are matters of day-to-day care that are important to the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition to the conditions described in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration or other indication that your vehicle may need service and attend to it promptly. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built for best per­formance in your vehicle. Using these parts for re­placement is your assurance that Ford-Built quality stays in your vehicle. Emissions Control Systems The catalytic converter in your vehicle changes most exhaust emissions into water vapor and carbon diox­ide and allows Ford Motor Company to develop set­tings which may result in better fuel economy and improve overall operation. To assure that the con­verter, as well as other emissions control devices and systems, operates effectively, you should use only unleaded fuel, and have the services listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record Log booklet per­formed at the specified time and mileage/km inter­vals. You should also avoid running out of gasoline or turning off the ignition while the vehicle is in mo­tion especially at high speeds. 138 SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES WARNING - Because of high engine compart­ment and exhaust system temperatures resulting from emissions equipment, do not park idle or operate your vehicle in dry grass or oiher dry ground cover where the possibility of ground fires exists. CAUTION - Do not make unauthorized modifi~a­tions to the engine or vehicle. Modifications causmg increased amounts of unburned fuel to reach the ex· haust system (including the catalytic converter) ~an significantly increase the temperature of the engme compartment and/or the exhaust system. Avoid driving your vehicle if it does not ~perate properly. If the engine diesels (more th~n .f1ve sec· onds of engine run-on after shut-off), m1sf1res, sur· ges stalls or backfires, see your dealer. Be alert for fluid leakage, odor, smoke, loss of oil pre~sure, or charge indicator or over temperature warmng. Emissions Control System Laws Federal law prohibits vehicle manufacturers, deale.rs and other persons engaged in the bu~iness of repal~­ing, servicing, selling, leasing, or tradmg motor .vehl· I cles, as well as fleet operators, from know1n~ly removing or rendering an emission~ .con.trol dev1ce or system inoperative. Further, mod1f1cat1ons of the emissions control system could create liability on the part of individual owners under the la~s .of some states. In Canada, modification of the em1ss1on~ con· trol system could create liability under applicable Federal or Provincial laws. Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) Emissions information appears on the VEer. deca.l .lo­cated on or near the engine. This decal. 1dent1f1es engine displacement and provides certam tune-up specifications. 139
  • 65.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES REFILL CAPACITIES (APPROXIMATE) ENGINE DISPLACEMENT IN METRIC LITERS AND CUBIC INCHES u.s. IMP. LITERS Cooling System-Quarts 5.0l (302 CID) Engines 14.1 11.7 13.3 Engine Oil (1) (2)-Quarts 4.0 3.3 3.8 5.0l (302 CID) Engine -Quarts With Filter Change 5.0 4.2 4.7 Fuel Tank Gallons 5.0l (302 CID) Engine 18.0 15.0 66.1 Power Steering (1)-Pints C-11 2.5 2.1 1.2 Rear Axle-Pints (Conventional and Traction·lok) 8.8" Ring Gear Axle 3.75 3.3 1.8 Transmission (1)-Quarts · 12.3 10.2 11.6 Windshield Washer Reservoir -Quarts 2.0 1.7 1.9 (1)D1pst1ck Used To Determine Exact Fill Requirements. (2)5.0l Engmes Have Two Oil Drain Plugs. Both Must Be Removed To Insure Proper Oil Drain. SPECIFICATIONS Radiator Filler Cap Pounds Per Square Inch (psi) 16.0 Kilopascals (kPa) 110.3 140 SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES MOTORCRAFT SERVICE PARTS ENGINE 5.0L EFI SPARK PLUG' AWSF·44C AIR FILTER FA·1032 FUEL FILTER FG-800 OIL FILTER FL·1A CRANKCASE EMISSION FILTER FA-678 BATIERY BX-64A (1)Refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug and gap specifications. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS The transmission and steering system in your vehicle are filled at the factory with high-quality, long-lasting lubricants or fluids that do not require periodic drain­ing and refilling except under severe duty conditions. However, the lubricant or fluid should be checked pe­riodically and refilled with the proper lubricant or fluid, meeting Ford technical specifications. See the Scheduled Maintenance Services section for instruc­tions on maintaining proper fluid levels. 141
  • 66.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIESSPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES FORO FORD ITEM PART NO. PART NAME SPECIFICATION FORD FORD ITEM PART NO. PART NAME SPECIFICATION Hinges, Hood D?AZ-19584-A Polyethylene ESR-M1C159-A Latch and Grease Auxiliary Automatic XT-2-QDX Motorcraft Dexron"' -II Overdrive Dexron"' -II Catch Transmission Auto. Trans. Fluid Brake Master CGAZ-19542-A Ford Heavy ESA-M1C75-B Cylinder CGAZ-19542-B Duty Brake Auto. Trans. C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose ESA-M1C75-B Shift Linkage Long Life Fluid Front Suspen- C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose E5A-M1C75-B sion Lower Long Life Ball Joints Lubricant Front Wheel Bearing & Throttle Lubricant Valve (TV) Linkage Engine Oil (D9AZ-6731-A) Motorcraft Oil ES-E1ZE-6714-AA Filter FL-1A Filter Long- Steering C1AZ-19590-B Multi-Purpose ESA-M1C75-B linkage Long life Life Type Engine Oil X0-5W30-QSP 5W30and ESE-M2C153-C Lubricant and 10W40Super and API SF o r Lock Cylinder DBAZ-19587-A Ford Lock ESB-M2C20-A X0-10W40-QSP Premium SF/CC or SF/CD X0-10W30-QP 10W30 and Lubricant and 20W40 Premium Rear Axle (Conv.) EOAZ-19580-A (Tractlon-Lok) Ford Hypoid (1) ESP-M2C154-A Gear Lube X0-20W40-QP SAE30 and X0-30-QSD 15W40Super and Duty X0-15W40-QSD Power Steer- XT-1-QF Motorcraft Auto ESW-M2C33-F ing (Pump Trans. Fluid Reservoir) Type F Engine E2FZ-19549-A Ford Cooling ESE-M97B44-A Coolant System Fluid Door Weathers trips COAZ-19553-A Silicone Lube ESR·M13P4-A (1) For Traction-Lok Add 4 oz. of C8AZ-19B546-A Friction Modifier 142 143
  • 67.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION Your vehicle's electrical system is protected from overload damage by three types of circuit disconnect devices: fuses, fuse links and circuit breakers. Should an el~ctric~J co.mponent fail to operate, check the ap­propnate CirCUit protector. WARNING - Always replace a blown fuse or fuse link with the same rating as specified. Never replace with a higher amperage rating because severe wiring damage and possibly fire can result. Fuses The fuse panel is located to the left of the steering column in the instrument panel. To expose the fuse panel, remove the lower steering column finish pan­el by removing the four retaining screws. Fuses that open (blow) may be replaced, but will continue to open until the cause of the overload condition is corrected. Fuse Panel 11 144 15 NUM8ERS REFER TO FOLLOWING CHARTS 6 SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES Fuses and Circuit Breakers OESCRIP· POSITION TION COLOR CIRCUIT PROTECTED 1 15 AMP Light Stoplamps, Hazard Warnin? Fuse Blue Lamps, Speed Control Module, Cornering Lamp Relays 2 8.25 AMP Windshield Wiper, Windshield C.B. Washer Pump, Interval · Wiper, Washer Fluid Level Warning 3 Not Usable 4 15 AMP Light Tail Lamps, Parking Lamps, Fuse Blue Side Marker, License Lamps, Instrument Cluster, Radio Illumination 5 15 AMP Light Turn Signal Lamps, Backup Fuse Blue Lamps, Keyless Entry Module, Illuminated Entry Module, Electronic Day/Night Mirror 6 20AMP Yellow AJC Clutch, Heated Fuse Backlite Switch, Decklid Release, Cornering Lamps, Electronic Chime Module, Speed Control Module, Electronic Compass, Overhead Console Mod., "C" Pillar Lites, Anti·Theft Mod. 7 10 AMP Fuse Red Electric Heater Mirror 8 15 AMP Light Courtesy Lamps, Key Warning Fuse Blue Buzzer, Illuminated Entry Module, Keyless Entry Module, Visor Mirror Lights, Remote Electric Mirrors, Truck Lamp, Hood Lamp, Electronic Radio Memory, Tripminder, Illumination Module, Glove 8ox Lamp 145
  • 68.
    PECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIE -POSIT ION DESCRIPT ION CO LORI CIRCUIT PROTECTED 9 30 Amp. Light A TC Blower Motor Fuse Gre en 10 Not Used 11 20 Amp. Fuse Yellow Radio, Power Antenna Tape Player, Premium, Sound System 12 20 Amp. C. B. Power Seats, Door Locks Keyless Entry System , Rear Cigar Lighters , I- 13 5Amp. Tan ln~trument Cluster, Radio Fuse Climate Control and-Ash ' Tray Illumination Lamps Illuminated Outside The;- ~ometer, Message Center .. eyboard 14 20 Amp. C.B. Power Window Rei a . Moon Roof Relay, Fr~sh-to- Pass Relay 15 10 Amp. Red Tail Lamps, Side Fuse Marker/Coach Lamp License Lamp, Lam~ Out I-Module, Trailer Tow Relay 16 20 Amp. Yellow Horn, Front Cigar Lighter Fuse - - 17 15 Amp. Light Electronic Cluster Fuse Blue Message Center Module - 18 10 Amp Fuse Red Warning Indicator Lamps ~~w Fuel Module, Auto , ~P System, Electronic Chimes, Electronic I Mes_sage Center, Elec-tron1c Day/Night Mir Low 0"1 ror, For lhe Anii-Thell s I Level Relay the glove boll und!'~: ther• are three lnllne fuses located headlamp, tall tamps and crash pad: A 20 amp. ru ov.r I ~~tel hofn circuit and teed mark ... tamps wiring, • 20am" ,to PfOt.c:t protect mar1utr and Iaiita:!:~~~,: module, and a lOP~,:;e,~O.:'~ NOTE- The turn sl . . 46 fuse panel· the h gnat ll .. her Is located on panel beh.' u.rd rl .. her It located on the hont skle of the lnd tha turn signal fleshef. the back side of the fuse -~ ! I ~ E#49'ili4MI"ii!i·R'i9Ui¥. 1'1 . ' . I . Fuse Links Fuse links are circuit protection devices incorporated into the wiring harness for some electrical equip­ment. These links, like fuses, open when the circuit load exceeds their amperage rating. Fuse links maY be purchased from your Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers open when a circuit overload ex­ceeds their rated current amperage. Once open, the cycling type used for windshield wipers and head­lights will automatically reset after a certain length of time. If the overload which caused them to open is still present in the circuit, they will continue to open and reset until the overload is cleared. The non-cy­cling type used for power windows and power door locks, will stay open once it has been tripped until the overload is removed. Circuit Breaker and Fuse Link Chart CIRCUIT PROTECTION CIRCUIT RATING LOCATION INTEGRAL HEADLAMPS AND HIGH 22 AMP WITH BEAM CIRCUIT HEADLAMP INDICATOR LIGHT BREAKER SWITCH POWER 20 AMP ATTACHED TO WINDOWS AND CIRCUIT STARTER POWER MOON BREAKER RELAY ROOF POWER 20 AMP FUSE PANEL WINDOW RELAY CIRCUIT BREAKER ~-~! <: k I 147
  • 69.
    SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection Circuit Rating Location Trailer Towing No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly Brakes Fuse Link at Starter Lights No. 16 Gauge Motor Relay Fuse Link Load Circuit No. 16 Gauge Fuse Link Battery No. 12 Gauge Wiring Assembly Charge Load Fuse Link at Starter Ci rcuit No. 16 Gauge Motor Relay Fuse Link EEC/EFI Module No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly Fuse Link at Starter No. 20 Gauge Motor Relay Fuse Link EFI Fuel Pump No. 18 Gauge Wiring Assembly Fuse Link at Starter Motor Relay Windshield 8.25 Amp Fuse Panel Wipers Circuit Breaker Power Seats 20 Amp Fuse Panel and Power Circuit Door Locks Breaker Electric No. 16 Gauge Engine Compt. Defroster Fuse Link Wiring at (Backlite) Feed Starter Relay Circuit Load Circuit Two No. 16 Engine Compt. Gauge Fuse Wiring at Link Starter Relay Load Leveling No. 16 Gauge Wiring Assembly Fuse Link at Starter Motor Relay Hood Lamp No. 20 Gauge Wiring Assembly Message Fuse Link at Starter Center Motor Relay lgnit1on Two No. 20 Wiring Assembly Circuit Gauge Fuse at Left Hand Links Fender Apron 148 SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES LIGHT BULB DESCRIPTION Trade Number Headlamps-Hi & Lo .... .... .......................... H4656 • Headlamps-High Beam .............. . .. ••..... . ....... H4651 Front Park & Turn Signals ........ . •................ .... 1157NA StopfTurn Signal and Tail Lamps ... ..•...................... 1157 High Mount Stoplamp (2) ..........• • ......• •.............. 912 Rear Side Marker ....... . .. . . .•.. •• ..........• • ..... ..... 194 License Plate Lamp ... . ... . ............. ........ .... • ..... 168 Door Courtesy Lights .. . ............... ... ......... ... .. 212.2 Glove Box Light .. .. . ... .. .•. . •• .. ......... •• •............ 194 Back-up Lights ..... . .. .. . . ..• ... . .. . ......... . .... . .... 1156 Front Cornering Lamp ........ . • . . ........................ 1156 Front Side Marker Lamp ........ .... . .. ..................... 194 Ashtray Light (Armrest) .. .. ..... .. ..... . ....... . ....... .. 1893 Ashtray Light (Instrument Panel) ... ... .. ...... .. ....... ... 1815 Headlight Nomenclature ............. ..... .....•......... 1816 Brake Warning Light .. . .................... . .. . . •... . . .... . 37 Low Fuel Warning Light ..... ... ... .. ........... ... ......... 37 Alternator Warning Light .. ............ . ..• •.......• •. ...... 37 High Beam Indicator Light ....... . •• •. • ... . • .•...•.• •. ..... 194 Turn Signals Indicator Light ...... •• • • •• • • •••••.....•...... 194 ACC Control Panel Lights .. ......•.. ... • ........•.. •. ..... 161 Seat belt Warning Light .. .. ...... •••.... .... ......... . ..... 37 Fuel Gauge ..... ...... .. ........... ..................... 194 Electric Defroster Light ..... . ... .. ....................... 2162 Dome Light .................. • •. . ....................... 912 Map Lights (2) .... .... . ........... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 105·2 I Visor Vanity Mirror ..... . ...................... . ......... 4·168 Radio Pilot Lights .... ............... ..................... . • • Electronic Radio Graphics Illumination ......... . ............ N/A Stereo Indicator Light ............ .......... .. ....... ... .. . Premium Sound System Indicator Light . .......... EOVF18C622AA Premium Sound System Graphics Bulb .... .. ....... B9FM 18843A Speedometer and PRN @ D1 Illumination ................. 194 Coach Lamp Bulb .................. ..........•......... . . 161 Clock Illumination ..... .... .. ..... . .. . • .................. 194 Engine Warning Light .................... .... ............. 194 Reading Light and Courtesy Lights ............... . ......... 912 Luggage Compartment Light ......... ............ .......... 89 Dual Floorwell Lights .............. . . ............... .... 906·4 Instrument Panel Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 89 Autolamp Nomenclature ............................ ..... 1816 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • • • • . .... 1445 Engine Compartment Lamps.................... . . . . . .... 912 ·Substitution of low beam headlamp bulbs other than same as original equipment may result in a false warning, or no Headlamp Burnout warning from the message center. • • Replaceable at Ford authorized radio service centers. 149
  • 70.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Fueling .................................. 152 Notice About Mlsfuellng ........... ....... 153 Fuel .. .... ............ ......... .... ...... 153 Quality ...... ........................... 1 54 Anti-Knock Index (Octane Rating) ...... .. . 155 Gasohol and Alcohol/Gasoline Blends ..... 1 56 Checking Under the Hood .......... .. .... 1 57 Opening the Hood ... .... ..... ... ....... 1 57 Engine Compartment Service Points ...... 158 Engine 011 ............................... 1 59 Checking Oil Level ...................... 1 59 Performance Designation . .......... .. ... 1 60 Oil Identification Symbol ................. 1 60 Viscosity (Thickness) .................... 1 61 Changing Oil and Filter ............. . .... 1 63 Engine Cooling System .................. 1 6 3 Checking Coolant Level ............ . .... 163 Coolant ......... .. ................ .. ... 165 Freezing Protection .. .............. .. ... 165 Coolant Drain and Flush ............. . ... 1 66 Coolant Refill Procedure ................. 1 66 Checking Hoses ........................ 1 6 71 'D'ansmlsslon Fluid Level Check .......... 167 Brake Fluid .......................... . ... 169 Power Steering Fluid ..................... 170 Suspension and Steering ................. 1 71 High Mount Brake Lamp (Rear Window and Lens Cleaning, Bulb Replacement) ...... 1 71 Appearance Protection ................... 1 7 2 Exterior Cleaning and Care ........ . .... . 1 7 2 Interior Cleaning and Care ..... .... ...... 1 7 5 151
  • 71.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE FUELING Fuel Tank Filler Opening and Cap The fuel tank filler opening is located on the left quarter panel. To remove the cap, turn counterclock­wise until cap is free. Swing tether-retained cap asi­de for fuel filling. To install cap, place it into the fuel filler opening and turn clockwise. A clicking sound indicates the cap is ratcheting and completely installed. WARNING - Use of an aftermarket fuel filler cap other than an authorized Motorcraft ser­vice part or the equivalent is not recommended and could result in damage to the fuel system or cause improper system operation due to pressure or vacuum buildup, and may compro­mise the performance of the fuel system in the event of a collision. The fuel filler pipe opening is designed smaller to prevent accidental filling with other than unleaded fuel: Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehi­cle. Any type of fuel, if spilled on painted surfaces, may dull or soften the paint. WARNING - Fuel may be under pressure. Always remove fuel cap carefully and slowly. tf fuel is leaking from the cap, or if a hissing sound is heard, do not attempt to remove the cap. tf these precautions are not followed, fuel may spray and cause personal injury. 152 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE NOTICE TO VEHICLE OWNERS ON MISFUELING THE RIGHT FUEL ADDS TO YOUR DRIVING ECONOMY Vehicles equipped with catalytic converters must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY (as specified on the instru­ment cluster and inside the fuel filler door). Using the right fuel can save you money because: • Use of leaded fuel shortens the life of spark plugs, exhaust systems and EGR valves and will damage the catalytic converter on your vehicle. • Independent studies have estimated that use of un­leaded fuel can actually SAVE you money in the long run by reducing frequent maintenance and parts replacement. • Your warranties may be invalidated if malfunction or damage to your vehicle is due to use of the wrong fuel. • Current and future state inspection programs, using more sophisticated testing methods, will make detection of misfueling easier. Under these circumstances, you may be required by law to make costly repairs at your own expense. 153
  • 72.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Therefore, fuel your vehicle in accordance with Ford's recommended specifications to help reduce long-term operating costs. • Federal law prohibits gasoline retailers and certain others, and their employees, from dispensing lead­ed gasoline into any motor vehicle which is labeled "Unleaded Fuel Only" or which is equipped with a gasoline tank filler inlet restrictor. • G~soline pum~s which dispense unleaded gas­olrne are requrred by Federal regulations to be labeled with the words "Unleaded Gasoline." Such pumps are also equipped with specially sized nozzles to fit the gasoline tank filler inlet on your vehicle. Fuel Quality Usi.ng ~ high quality unleaded gasoline will help ~arntarn the driveability, fuel economy and emis­srons performance of your vehicle. A properly formu­lated gasoline will be comprised of well refined hydrocarbons and chemical additives and will per­form the following functions: • Minimize varnish, lacquer, and other induction sys­tem deposits. • Prevent gum formation or other deterioration dur­ing storage. • Protect fuel tank and other fuel system compo­nents from corrosion or degradation. • Pr~vide the correct seasonally and geographically ~d)usted_ volatility. This will provide easy starting rn the wrnter and avoid vapor lock in the summer. In addition, the fuel will be free of water, debris and other impurities. ' 154 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Some driveability deterioration on multi-port elec­tronically fuel injected vehicles can be traced to continuous use of certain gasolines which may have insufficient amounts of detergent additives to pro­vide adequate deposit control protection. We recom­mend that you select a gasoline with detergents when you purchase your fuel. While not all mar­keters of desirable gasolines choose to advertise their cleaning capabilities or adequacy for use in fuel injected vehicles, some do; the presence of such ad­vertising may assist you in locating such a desirable gasoline. If you are unsure of the qualities of the gasoline you are purchasing, ask your service station attendant. If the performance of your vehicle deterio­rates, consult your dealer or other qualified technician. Anti-Knock Index (Octane Rating) Your vehicle has been designed to operate using un­leaded gasoline with an (R + M)/2 minimum anti­knock index rating of 87. Federal regulations require that each retail gasoline dispensing pump must dis­play a label bearing the minimum anti-knock index rating. Use of unleaded gasoline with anti-knock index rat­ings lower than 87 can cause persistent, heavy spark knock, which can lead to engine damage. If your en­gine knocks heavily when you use gasoline with an anti-knock index rating of 87 or higher, or if you hear continuous spark knock while maintaining cruising speeds on level roads, consult your dealer or other qualified technician. You may notice occasional, light spark knock when accelerating or driving up hills. This should not cause concern because the maximum fuel economy is obtained under conditions of occasional light spark knock. Gasoline with an anti-knock index rating high­er than 87 may be used, but is not necessary for proper operation. 155
  • 73.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Gasohol and Alcohol/Gasoline Blends Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (grain al­cohol), is available in some areas. Ford vehicles should operate satisfactorily on gasohol blends con­taining no more than 10% ethanol by volume and having an anti-knock index of 87 or higher. In some cases, methanol (wood alcohol) or other al­cohols may be added to gasoline. Ford vehicles should operate satisfactorily on blends containing up to 5% methanol by volume when cosolvents and other necessary additives are used. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corro­sion inhibitors, such blends may cause driveability problems or damage emissions and fuel system ma­terials. Insufficient data are available to insure the suitability of all methanol/gasoline blends at this time. To avoid jeopardizing your vehicle warranty or incurring unnecessary repair costs, DO NOT USE blends containing more than 5% methanol by vol­ume, or blends that do not contain cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If you are uncertain as to the presence of alcohols in the gasoline 'you are purchasing, check the label on the pump or ask the station attendant. CAUTION - Discontinue use of any gasohol or alco­hol/ gasoline blend if driveability or fuel system problems occur. Do not use such fuels unless they are UNLEADED. 156 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE CHECKING UNDER THE HOOD Opening the Hood Release the hood latch from inside your vehicle by pulling the HOOD release handle under the left end of the instrument panel. Then, to raise the hood, step to the front of the vehicle. Release the auxiliary catch between the hood and the center of the adja­cent panel, and lift the hood until the counter bal­anced hinges hold it open. When you close the hood, make sure the hood latches securely. WARNING - To avoid the possibility of per­sonal injury, do not release the hood latch until the gearshift selector lever has been securely latched in P (PARK), the parking brake has been fully set, the engine has been turned off, and the key has been removed from the igni­tion lock cylinder. H it is necessary to work under the hood with the engine running, be sure that the gearshift selector lever is securely latched in P (PARK) and the parking brake is fully set. Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. Do not permit any clothing, such as neckties or handkerchiefs, near the engine or radiator fan. They can become entangled in moving parts and result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Also remove watches, bracelets, and rings. 157
  • 74.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE To avoid the risk of fire and personal injury, do not start the engine with the air cleaner removed. ENGINE COMPARTMENT SERVICE POINTS 3 ''9 1. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ' 2. POWER STEERING DIPSTICK/FILL 3. BATTERY 4. WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR 5, RADIATOR CAP ... .. . ' 6. COOLANT RECOVERY RESERVOIR " . 7. AIR CLEANER S. DISTRIBUTOR lt ENGINE OIL FILLER CAP ,. ·10. BRAKE MASTER CYUNOtfi--FLUID RESERVOIR 11. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK 12. ENGINE OIL FILTER . 158 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE SELF SERVICE POINTERS If you choose to do your own fueling, you should also perform the following simple maintenance rou­tines. This extra effort will save you additional mon­ey and will contribute to the driving efficiency of your vehicle. • Check the engine oil level at every refueling stop. • Clean windshield, outside mirrors and headlights. • Check windshield washer fluid. • Check tires for excessive or worn edges. • Check the tire pressure at least monthly. These procedures require only a tire gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield washer fluid. ENGINE OIL Checking Oil Level It is normal to add some oil between oil changes. Have your engine oil level checked or check it your­self at every refueling stop. The amount of oil an engine may use will vary with the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal variation from one engine to another of the same or different size, especially during the first 7,500 miles. Heavy duty operation (such as t rai ler towing, short trips and severe loading and usage) may use more oil. 159
  • 75.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE To check the engine oil level, park your vehicle on level ground and turn engine off. Protecting yourself from engine heat, pull out the dipstick. Wipe it clean and reinsert fully. Pull the dipstick out and check level. Keep the oil level above the ADD mark on the dipstick by adding oil as required. Do not overfill. Performance Designation To help achieve proper engine performance and du­rability, use only engine lubricating oils of the proper quality. These oils also help promote engine efficien­cy which results in improved fuel economy. Ford recommends that you use Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil that meets Ford Specification ESE­M2C153- C. Use API (American Petroleum Institute) Categories SF, or SF/CC, or SF/CD only. Engine oils with improved fuel economy properties (energy conserving) are currently available. They of­fer the potential for small improvements in vehicle fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel burned to overcome engine friction. Often these improve­ments are difficult to measure in your everyday driv­ing, but over the course of a year can offer significant cost and energy savings. These oils are recom­mended to be used in conjunction with the recom­mended API Category. Oil Identification Symbol 160 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE A symbol has been developed by the API to help you select the proper engine oil. It should be included on the oil container you purchase. The top section of the symbol shows the oil performance by the API designation. This should match the Maintenance Guide recommendation. The center section will show the SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) vis­cosity grade. The lower section will show "Energy Conserving" only if the oil has proven fuel saving capabilities. Oil Viscosity (Thickness) The engine in your new vehicle has been factory filled with SAE 10W-30 oil. Ford recommends that you use SAE 10W-30 or SAE 10W-40 oil when outside temperatures remain above 0°F ( - 18°C). If tem­peratures consistently remain below 0°F ( - 18°C), Ford recommends that you use SAE 5W-30 oil. 161
  • 76.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Oil Viscosity Recommendations (SAE Grades) 162 r~ T -- --· r6 +6r-- - +5 +40_- - .... I I SAE30 0 +3r- t----f r--- -7 +20 I ,-- - 12 +10 _ - -iAe 20~·40 SAE20W·50 I ------S-AE .1..5 W-40 -10 0 I -29 -20 I t!!i. ,--~ , :::..; SAE 5W·30 Outside Temperature SAE 10W·30 SAE 10W·40 (Recommended) SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Changing Oil and Filter Change engine oil and filter according to the Sched­uled Maintenance Charts. Use a Motorcraft FL-1A Long-Life Oil Filter or equiv­alent which meets Ford Specification ES-E1ZE-6714- AA. This filter protects your engine by filtering harmful, abrasive, or sludgy particles without clog­ging up or blocking the flow of oil to vital engine parts. NOTE- Your vehicle is equipped with two oil drain plugs. When changing the on, both plugs must be removed to completely drain the old oil. Otherwise, the crankcase may be overfilled when new oil is added. WARNING - Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The cooling system is of the coolant recovery type. Coolant in the system expands with heat and over­flows into the coolant recovery reservoir. When the system cools down, coolant is drawn back into the radiator. Walter C. Avrea, the owner of patents 3,601,181 and RE 27,965 has granted Ford Motor Company rights with respect to cooling systems covered by these patents. Checking Coolant Level Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reser­voir at least once a month using the following guidelines: 163
  • 77.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not remove the radiator cap to perform a rou­tine coolant level check. Instead, inspect the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir as follows: • hot engine - maintain coolant at or above the "FULL HOT" mark. • cold engine - maintain coolant at or above the "FULL COLD" mark. If level is low, add a 50/50 mixture of specified cool­ing system fluid and water to the coolant recovery reservoir. Recheck the coolant level after one or two occasions of vehicle use. If you have to add coolant more than once a month, or if you have to add more than one quart at a time, have your dealer check the cooling system for leaks. WARNING - Never remove the radiator cap under any circumstances while the engine is operating. Switch off the engine and wait until it has cooled. Even then, use extreme care when removing the cap from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap - still with a cloth - turn and remove it. Stand clear of the radiator opening. Hot coolant may splash out. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious personal injury from hot coolant or steam blow out and/or damage to the cooling system or engine. WARNING - Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the windshield washer reservoir. Radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer reservoir can severely affect visibility when sprayed on the windshield. 164 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Whenever radiator coolant level checks are made, check condition of radiator cap rubber seal. Make sure it is clean and free of any dirt particles. Rinse off with water, if necessary. When replacing cap on radiator, also make sure radiator filler neck seat is clean. Check that overflow hose is not kinked or cut. WARNING - Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. Coolant Whenever you add coolant use equal parts of water and Ford Cooling System Fluid E2FZ-19549-A (in Can­ada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or equivalent that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97844-A. Do not use alco­hol or methanol antifreeze, or mix them with the specified coolant. Since the coolant increases boil protection in sum­mer and contains rust/corrosion inhibitors, you should leave it in year around. Plain water may be used in an emergency, but replace it with the spec­ified coolant as quickly as possible to avoid damage to the system. NOTE- This vehicle is equipped with an aluminum radiator and use of the proper coolant is essential for corrosion protection. Only coolants which meet Ford Specification ESE-M97844-A should be used. CAUTION - Use of concentrations less than 30% (approximately two liters) coolant concentrate (4°F/ - 16°C freezing point) may cause radiator and/or engine damage. Freezing Protection The factory-installed solution of Ford Cooling System Fluid and water will protect your vehicle to - 35°F (- 37°C). 165
  • 78.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Check the freezing protection rating of the coolant at least once a year, just before winter. Maintain a pro­tection rating consistent with minimum expected am­bient temperatures in your driving area or, at least - 20°F ( - 29°C) to prevent engine damage as a result of freezing and to assure proper engine operating temperature. Coolant Drain and Flush Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain and flush of the coolant system can be found in the Car Shop Manual. Following these recommended pro­cedures will insure that the specified coolant level and 50/50 mixture of cooling system fluid and water is maintained. Coolant Refill Procedure When the entire cooling system is drained and re­filled, the following procedure should be used to insure a complete fill: • Remove radiator cap. • With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50 mixture of recommended cooling system fluid and water until the radiator is full. • Reinstall the radiator cap to the pressure relief position by installing the cap to the fully installed position, and then backing off to the first stop. • Start and idle engine until the radiator upper hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). • Immediately shut off engine. Cover cap com­pletely with a thick cloth and cautiously remove radiator cap and add a 50/50 mixture of recom­mended cooling system fluid and water until radi­ator is full. • Reinstall the radiator cap securely. 166 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE • Fill the coolant recovery reservoir, through the small opening at top, with a 50/50 mixture of spec­ified cooling system fluid and water to the FULL­HOT mark written on the coolant reservoir. Check that reservoir hose is not kinked. • Check for leaks at the draincock and block plug. • Recheck the coolant level, using the recommended procedure, after one or two occasions of vehicle use. Checking Hoses Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and loose hose clamps as specified in the maintenance schedule. Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary. TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL CHECK CAUTION - Vehicle should not be driven if fluid is below the "DO NOT DRIVE" hole with the outside temperature above 50°F (10°C). (See ADDING FLUID.) Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to check your automatic transmission fluid. However, in the unlikely event that transmission slippage oc­curs, the fluid level should be checked and filled to the proper level. Overfilling can cause foaming or loss of fluid from fill tube or vent. 167
  • 79.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Checking Fluid Level Transmission fluid expands as its temperature rises. Therefore, it is preferable to check the fluid level at normal operating temperature (after approximately 20 miles (32 km) vehicle operation). However, if nec­essary, the fluid level can be checked at room temperature. 00 NOT FLUID LEVEL AT DMRAIVER K OPERA liNG TEMPt;'RATURE 66"C TO we,,,.., TO,,..~ ct... ,<0 b;,;1 DONT ADD ~ "'7 FLUID LEVEL AT ROOM TEMPERATURE 21 'C TO 35"C (70•F TO 95.F) To check the fluid level, first park on a level surface and set the parking brake fully. Start engine, apply foot service brake and move the gearshift selector lever through all of the gear selections allowing suffi­cient time in each position to engage. Then make sure you engage the gearshift selector lever in the P (PARK) latch position and reset the parking brake fully. Keep the engine running. Secure loose clothing and remove jewelry. Protecting yourself against en­gine heat, wipe off the dipstick cap. Pull the dipstick out. wipe it clean and push it all the way back into the tube, making sure it is fully seated. Pull the dip­stick out and check the level. At normal operating temperature (approximately 20 miles (32 km) of vehicle operation). the fluid level on the dipstick should be within the crosshatched area. At room temperature, the level should be between the holes on the stick. If the vehicle has not been op­erated for some time and outside temperature is be­low 50°F (10°C), the fluid must be warmed by running the engine. 168 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Fluid NOTE - If the vehicle has been operated for an ex­tended period at high speed or in city traffic in hot weather, or the vehicle is being used to pull a trailer, to obtain an accurate reading the fluid has to cool, usually about 30 minutes after engine has been turned off. Before adding fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used. The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. If it is necessary to add fluid, add in half pint (.25 I) increments through the filler tube to bring the level to the correct point indicated on the dipstick. If over­fill occurs, excess fluid must be removed. IMPORTANT: The fluid level indication on the dip­stick will be different at operating temperature and room temperature. For the correct fluid level reading on the dipstick, follow the appropriate instructions stated previously. When dipstick is installed, make sure it is fully seated. CAUTION - If vehicle has been operated for an ex­tended period at high speed, or in city traffic in hot weather, or the vehicle is being used to pull a trailer, to obtain an accurate reading, the fluid has to cool, usually about 30 minutes after engine has been turned off. BRAKE FLUID To check the fluid level, carefully clean and remove master cylinder reservoir cap. The fluid level should be within 1/4 inch (6.4mm) of the top of the reservoir. If the level is low, top off. Add only a DOT 3 brake fluid meeting Ford Specifications ESA-M6C25-A such as Ford Heavy Duty Brake Fluid. 169
  • 80.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR The level will decrease with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with wear of disc brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system inspected. WARNING- To avoid the possibility of brake failure which could result in property damage or personal injury, do not allow the master cyl­inder to run dry. Never reuse brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system or fluid that has been allowed to stand in an open container for an extended period of time. POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level Before checking the fluid level, let the engine run un­til it has reached normal operating temperature. With the engine at idle, turn the wheel back and forth several times to get any air out of the steering sys­tem. Then turn off the engine and check the fluid level on the dipstick. The level must be in the FULL HOT range on the dipstick. Use proper temperature range on dipstick when checking fluid level. Do not overfill. Use only a fluid that meets Ford Specifica­tion ESW-M2C33-F (Type F) such as Motorcraft Auto­matic Transmission and Power Steering Fluid Type F or equivalent. Whenever the dipstick is inserted, al­ways make sure it is properly seated and locked. 170 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION - Do not operate the vehicle for pro­longed periods with a low power steering pump fluid level to avoid damage to the power steering pump. SUSPENSION AND STEERING Inspecting for Road Damage The suspension and steering linkage in your vehicle should be inspected periodically for abnormal looseness and damaged seals. Also be alert for any changes in steering action. Hard steering, excessive free play or unusual sounds when turning or parking indicate a need for inspection or servicing. Rear Shock Absorber Load Leveling Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic load leveling rear shock absorber system. This sys­tem maintains the vehicle height at a constant level by automatically adding air to or releasing air from the shock absorbers in response to changes in vehi­cle loads. HIGH MOUNT STOPLAMP (REAR WINDOW AND LENS CLEANING, BULB REPLACEMENT) Your vehicle is equipped with an interior high mount stoplamp which is mounted on the trim panel at the centerline of the rear window. The stoplamp must be removed using the following procedure in order to clean the rear window, clean the stoplamp lens, or service the stoplamp bulb. Removal: 1. Remove the stoplamp button with a thin blade tool. 2. Remove retaining screw with a Phillips screwdriver. 3. Slide stoplamp assembly away from the rear win­dow to disengage hold-down tabs and then lift assembly up and over retainer bracket. 171
  • 81.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE HIGH MOUNT STOPLAMP STOPLAMP COVER BUITON"' RETAINING ~ SCREW~ ~--~~ / HOLD-DOWN TABS ON RETAINER BRACKET / / / Installation: 1. P~sition stoplamp assembly over retainer bracket With h~ld-down tabs lined up with mating tabs on retamer bracket. 2. Push downward and toward rear window glass to engage tabs. 3. Install retaining screw securely. 4. Press stoplamp cover button in place. APPEARANCE PROTECTION Washing and Polishing Protect_ the exterior with frequent washing, including unders1de areas. Use Ford Wash and Wax Concen­t~ ate, or equivalent, diluted to the proper concentra­tion follo~ed by a rinse with clear cold water. Do not wash veh1c_le with hot water, in the direct rays of the sun, or wh1le sheet metal is hot. 172 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Polish paint and bright metal with Ford Custom Sil­icone Gloss, Ford Custom Auto Wax, Ford Custom Cream Auto Wax, or equivalent to remove harmful deposits and provide added protection to body sur­faces, body hardware, and chrome and aluminum parts. Touch up nicks and scratches with proper paint. Do not use steel wool, abrasive type cleaner, gasoline or strong detergents containing highly al­kaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated materials, aluminum wheels, head lamps, bumpers or anodized aluminum parts because you may damage the pro­tective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration. Vehicles subjected to airborne pollen, insect drop­pings, bird droppings and other organic matter, especially those vehicles subjected to this matter that are exposed to high temperatures and sunshine, should be washed as often as necessary to keep them free of this organic matter. Similar precautions should be taken where a vehicle may be exposed to chemical industrial fallout. Failure to do so may re­sult in damage to the exterior surfaces. Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and there­fore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, be­lieves that that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles of purchase, whichever comes first. Vinyl Top and Padded Moulding Care Rinse the vinyl to remove loose dirt and grime. Exceptionally dirty areas should be pre-cleaned with Ford Triple Clean, Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner, or mild soap solution. Next, apply Ford Vinyl Hardtop Cleaner and Reconditioner, or equivalent, following label directions. 173
  • 82.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE To avoid damage to the vinyl top and mouldings, use only an approved Ford cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive material or cleaners. Hot waxes applied by automatic car washes can af­fect the cleanability of vinyl material. Cambria Cloth Care and Cleaning Procedure The Cambria cloth cover material used on some of the optional carriage roof treatment tops is a durable material that will, with proper care, retain its ap­pearance characteristics for a long period of time. This cover can be subjected to commercial car wash­ing without adversely affecting the appearance. The cover should be washed frequently with a mild soap solution and cold or lukewarm water and a soft­bristled brush. Rinse the top with clean water mak­ing sure to remove all traces of soap. If the c~ver is severely soiled, a mild cleaning agent such as Ford Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent may be used. Use only an approved Ford Cleaner, or equivalent. Rinse the entire top with water, then apply the clean­er on a small area (approximately two square feet). Scrub the area lightly with a soft-bristled brush adding water as necessary. Remove the cleaner and water with sponge and then rinse the balance of the cleaner off with water. Use a liberal amount of water to prevent the cleaner from running down onto the body finish and drying. This could cause streaks in the paint finish. ~o waxes, polishes, sealers or "dressing-type" mate­nals should be applied to the top material. Under no circumstances should grease and wax removers, thinners 'or solvents be used. Underbody Flush the complete underside of vehicle frequently. Keep body drain holes unplugged. Inspect for road damage. 174 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Rustproofing Compounds The flexible plastic and/or rubberlike parts and rigid plastic bumper components may be damaged by af­termarket rustproofing compounds. If rustproofing overspray, drips, or runs are allowed to remain, these parts may exhibit surface swelling, distortion or deterioration. If the car has been aftermarket rust­proofed, inspect and clean with a hi-flash naphtha­wetted cloth. Wipe completely dry. Re-inspect fre­quently as rustproofing may run or drip for some time after installation, especially in hot weather. Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean the vinyl surfaces with Ford Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, or equivalent. Ford Vinyl Protectant may then be applied for enhanced appearance. Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Leather Genuine leather is not uniform. It may have healed scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean the surface with Ford Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent, or with a mild soap solution. Wipe clean with a damp soft cloth. Dry and buff surfaces with a dry, soft cloth. Cleaning Upholstery and Interior Trim - Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh sp9ts immediately. Care should be taken not to stain the fabric or affect its color or fire resistance properties. General Cleaning Procedure: 1. Remove excess staining material from fabric by scraping or wiping with a clean cloth. .• 2. Identify the staining material if possible.
  • 83.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Clean the fabric as outlined in the following Methods "A", "8", or "C". Test all cleaners in a small hidden area of the fabric prior to use. If fab­ric color or texture is adversely affected by a par­ticular cleaner, do not use. Method "Aw Stains such as grease, oil, tar, water spots, crayon and lipstick: CAUTION - Using other than recommended clean­ers or procedures may ·adversely affect fabric flammability, appearance or durability. 1. Spray stain with "Ford Automotive Fabric Spot Lifter" or equivalent from a distance of 8-10" as directed on the instructions furnished with the can. 2. Allow the Spot Lifter to dry completely forming a white powder on the surface of the fabric. 3. Brush and vacuum the white powder from the surface of the fabric. 4. If the soiled spot is not removed from the fabric, repeat Steps No. 1, 2 and 3 or use Method "8". Method "8'" Stains such as grease, oil, tar, water spots, crayon and lipstick: 1. If the stain is still visible after the spot cleaning procedure (Method "A") blot the soiled area with a clean white cotton cloth saturated with Ford Spot Lifter or equivalent. 2. Rub in a circular motion while continuously ex­posing clean portion of cloth. 3. Gradually widen area of application onto edges of design, pleat, or biscuit. 176 SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Repeat Steps No. 1, 2 and 3 as necessary. 5. Wipe cleaned area with clean damp cloth to re­move any remaining cleaner. Method "C" Stains such as dirt, dry soil, food, pop, and coffee: 1. Apply "Rosenthal's Multi-Purpose Rug and Up­holstery Cleaner" with a clean brush or sponge as directed on the instructions furnished with the container. 2. Rub in a circular motion until stain is removed. 3. Gradually widen area of application to edges of design, pleat, or biscuit. 4. Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 as necessary. 5. Rub cleaned area with a damp cloth to absorb re-sidual cleaner. 6. Allow material to dry completely. To maintain a uniform appearance of the seat mate­rial in the event of severe soil and stain, the entire seat or insert will have to be cleaned to prevent a "ring" condition. Cleaning Lap-Shoulder Belt Webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets; follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing as this may weaken it.
  • 84.
    SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning Interior Window Glass If the int~rior glass surfaces on your new car become f?gged (I.e. covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film): the residue should be removed with an am­mon~ a/alcohol glass cleaner, following the directions on the container. Cleaning Woodtone Interior Trim Clean soiled or stained surfaces with Ford Multi-Pur­pose Clea.ner diluted per label instructions (3 oz./gal.) or any m1ld household detergent and a soft cloth. 178 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Dealer Assistance ........ . .............. 1 80 District Office Assistance ................ 1 80 District Office Addresses ................. 1 8 1 Ford Consumer Appeals Board ........... 1 8 3 What Cases Qualify ..................... 184 How the Board Operates ................ 1 8 6 Office Phone Numbers and Addresses .... 1 8 8 Canadian Regional Offices ............... 1 90 Assistance Outside U.S. and Canada ..... 1 91 Additional Service Information ............ 193 Accessory Equipment .................... 1 9 5 Infant Carrier and Tot-Guard Order Form .. 1 9 7 Service Literature Order Forms ........... 201 I 179
  • 85.
    CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE DEALERASSISTANCE Your dealer is vitally interested in your complete sat­isfaction with the vehicle you purchased from him. He is ready to help you with all of your maintenance and service needs - and he has the support and as­sistance of the Ford Motor Company with District and Regional Offices in 36 locations in the United States and Canada. If, for any reason you are not satisfied witti the ser­vice received, the following actions are suggested: • First, discuss the matter with your dealership Ser­vice Manager - make sure he is aware of any problems you may have and that he has had the opportunity to assist you. • If you are still not satisfied, seek out the Owner or General Manager of the dealership, explain the problem and request assistance. DISTRICT OFFICE ASSISTANCE For further assistance beyond that provided by your dealer, or if you are driving in an unfamiliar area and are in need of service, you may contact the nearest Ford Parts and Service Division District (U.S.) or Re­gional office (Canada). The addresses and telephone numbers of these offices are listed below and on the following pages. 180 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Ford Parts and Service Division ATLANTA DISTRICT OFFICE Northern Georgia, Eastern Alabama P .0. Box 105003 Atlanta, GA 30348·5003 (404) 763·6440 BOSTON DISTRICT OFFICE Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusells, Rhode Island, Connecticut P.O. Box 587 Waltham, MA 02254·0587 (617) 895·1 000 BUFFALO DISTRICT OFFICE Upper and Western New York, Northern Pennsylvania P.O. Box 244 Buffalo, NY 14225·0244 (716) 631-4430 CHARLOTIE DISTRICT OFFICE North Carolina, South Carolina P.O. Box 220307 Charlotte, NC 28222·0307 (704) 554·4501 CHICAGO DISTRICT OFFICE Northeastern Illinois, Northwestern Indiana 2225 W. North Avenue Melrose Park, IL 60160·1191 (312) 681-6500 CINCINNATI DISTRICT OFFICE Southern Ohio, Southern West VIrginia, Eastern Kentucky, Southeastern Indiana P.O. Box 6308 Cincinnati, OH 45215-6308 (513) 563-3120 CLEVELAND DISTRICT OFFICE Eastern and Northwestern Ohio, Northwestern Pennsylvania P.O. Box 41035 Brecksville, OH 44141 ·0035 (216) 526·6900 DALLAS DISTRICT OFFICE Northern Texas, Oklahoma P.O. Box 110037 Carrollton, TX 75011-0037 (214) 323·6299 DENVER DISTRICT OFFICE Colorado, Wyoming, Western Nebraska, Southwestern South Dakota, Utah, Southern Idaho, Northeastern Nevada, Southeastern Oregon, Montana P.O. Box 5568, Terminal Annex Denver, CO 80217·5568 (303) 893·3673 DETROIT DISTRICT OFFICE All Michigan (Exc. Upper Peninsula) P.O. Box 775 Wixom, Ml 48096.(1775 (313) 337·9900 HOUSTON DISTRICT OFFICE Southern Texas P.O. Box 827 Houston, TX 77001-0827 (713) 680·4260 INDIANAPOLIS DISTRICT OFFICE Central and Western Indiana, Southeastern Illinois P.O. Box 19448 Indianapolis, IN 46219·0448 (317) 353·8251 JACKSONVILLE DISTRICT OFFICE Florida, Southern Georgia P.O. BoxY Jacksonville, Fl 32203·0576 (904) 783-7777 KANSAS CITY DISTRICT OFFICE Western Missouri, Kansas P.O. Box 501 Shawnee Mission, KS 66201.(1501 (913) 888·0141 LOS ANGELES DISTRICT OFFICE Southern California, Southeastern Nevada 2200 West Sequoia P.O. Box 4680·P Anaheim, CA 92803-4680 (714) 520-8300 LOUISVILLE DISTRICT OFFICE Western Kentucky, Central Tennessee, South Central Indiana P.O. Box 32080 Louisville, KY 40232·2080 (502) 456-3700 181
  • 86.
    CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE MEMPHISDISTRICT OFFICE Arkansas, Western Tennessee, Northam Mississippi, Northwestern Alabama P.O. Box 83-47, Hollywood Station, Memphis, TN 38108·8347 (901) 454-7270 MILWAUKEE DISTRICT OFFICE Wisconsin (Exc. Northwestern Corner), Upper Pennlnsula Michigan P.O. Box 267 Brookfield, WI 53005·0267 (414) 785·3100 NEW ORLEANS DISTRICT OFFICE Southern Mississippi, Louisiana, Southwestern Alabama P.O. Box 8630 Metairie, LA 70011·8630 (504) 454·6764 NEW YORK DISTRICT OFFICE Northern New Jersey, Eastern Now York, Southeastern New York, Long Island U.S. Highway 46 Teterboro, NJ 07608·1177 (201) 288·9421 OMAHA DISTRICT OFFICE Western Iowa, Central and Eastern Nebraska, Southeastern South Dakota P.O. Box 37433 Millard Station Omaha, NE 68137·7433 (402) 592·8850 PHILADELPHIA DISTRICT OFFICE Northeastern Pennsylvania, Southeastern Pennsylvania, Southern New Jersey, Delaware P.O. Box 816 Pennsauken, NJ 08110·0816 (609) 662·8021 PHOENIX DISTRICT OFFICE Arizona, New Mexico, Western Texas P.O. Box 844 Phoenix, AZ 85001·0844 (602) 266-8500 182 PITTSBURGH DISTRICT OFFICE Southwestern Pennsylvania, Northern West Virginia, Southeastern Ohio Suite 910 Manor Oak Twp. 1910 Cochran Road Pittsburgh, PA 15220·1254 (412) 928·2939 ST. LOUIS DISTRICT OFFICE Southern Illinois, Eastern Missouri P.O. Box 24576 St. Louis, MO 63141·0575 (314) 569·4455 SAN JOSE DISTRICT OFFICE Northern California, Southern Oregon, Western Nevada, Hawaii P.O. Box 4002 Milpitas, CA 95035·4002 (408) 262·911 0 SEATTLE DISTRICT OFFICE Alaska, Washington, Northern Oregon, Northern Idaho Suite 215 10604 N.E. 38th Place Kirkland, WA 98033·7995 (206) 244·5800 TWIN CITIES DISTRICT OFFICE Northwestern Wisconsin, Minnesota, North Dakota, Northern South Dakota P.O. Box 9303 Minneapolis, MN 55440·9303 (612) 887·4290 WASHINGTON DISTRICT OFFICE Mainland Maryland, Northern Virginia, Southern Virginia, Eastern West VIrginia, Peninsular Maryland 8051 Gatehouse Road Fails Church, VA 22046·1503 (703) 698·1900 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE If a problem arises that the dealer or one of the above offices cannot answer or correct, Ford Motor Company has established a priority customer as­sistance system for our luxury car owners. In the U.S. you can reach your Luxury Car Coordinator by dialing our toll-free number 1-800-521-4140 (all states except Michigan) . In Michigan, call toll-free 1-800-482-5308. These phone numbers are opera­tional during regular business hours (Eastern Time) Monday through Friday. In Canada, call the nearest Ford of Canada Regional Office. Questions in the U.S. that cannot be answered by one of the above offices may be directed to: Ford Parts and Service Division P.O. Box 1805 Dearborn, Michigan 48121-1805 THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARD NOTE - The footnotes for the following section are contained at the section's end. The Ford Consumer Appeals Board reviews service complaints on Ford and Lincoln-Mercury products that haven't already been resolved by your dealer or the Ford Parts and Service Division District Office. The Ford Consumer Appeals Board is a cost-free, in­dependent, third-party, dispute settlement mecha­nism available to Ford Motor Company product owners whose complaints involve either: • A vehicle covered by the new vehicle warranty pro­vi dad by Ford or by a state vehicle repair/ replacement statute. 183
  • 87.
    CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE •A vehicle and/or component that is no longer cov­ered by the new vehicle warranty and/or a state repair/replacement statute, but is within 48 months and 50,000 miles of service.(!) WHICH CASES QUALIFY FOR BOARD REVIEW? T.he Board reviews all service complaints except those involving: • A non-Ford product • A non-Ford dealership • A Ford Motor Company vehicle in excess of 48 months or 50,000 miles of service except for com­ponents covered by a longer term warranty • A vehicle sales transaction • A request for reimbursement of consequential ex­penses unless incidental to a service or product complaint being reviewed • Alleged personal injury or property damage • Cases currently in litigation If your vehicle qualifies under the new vehicle war­ranty or a state vehicle repair/replacement statute, the following five-step procedure is suggested, al­though Steps 1 and 2 are NOT required for Ford Con­sumer Appeals Board review. 1. Review your complaint with your dealer or his representative. If the dealer is unable to resolve your complaint to your satisfaction, proceed to Step 2. 2. Contact a District Office of the Ford Parts and Ser­vice Division - addresses and phone numbers are listed in the Owner's Guide. If your complaint still remains unresolved, proceed to Step 3. 184 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 3. Request a Ford Consumer Appeals Board Cus­tomer Statement form by calling toll-free 1-800-241-8450 or the Ford Parts and Service Dis­trict Office. Be sure to complete the information at the top of the statement concerning your name, address, dealer's name and city, and the information about your vehicle. 4. Briefly describe what your unresolved complaint is about and what you want done to resolve your complaint. 5. Attach all documents and maintenance or repair orders which you believe are important to the un­resolved complaint(s) and your vehicle's service history. Forward to the Executive Secretary of the Ford Consumer Appeals Board. WHAT IF MY VEHICLE IS OUT OF WARRANTY AND BEYOND STATE REPAIR/REPLACEMENT STATUTE? If your vehicle is beyond warranty and/or a state re­pair/ replacement statute but qu~lifies wi_t~in the 48 months and 50,000 miles of serv1ce cond1t1on above, it is a REQUIREMENT that you follow the five step procedure.(!) If you have not previously been in c_on­tact with Ford Motor Company and you submit a . Ford Consumer Appeals Board Customer Statement, it will be referred to the appropriate Ford Parts and Service Division District Office for resolution. If you then remain dissatisfied, your complaint may be­come eligible for Board review. 185
  • 88.
    CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE HOWDOES THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARD WORK? The Board consists of five members: three consum­er representatives, a Ford dealer and a Lincoln­Mercury dealer. The Owner Relations Manager from the Ford Parts and Service Division (FPSD) District Office serves as a non-voting Executive Secretary. Dealer Board members act as non-voting advisors to the Board on all cases involving vehicles within the stated terms of the applicable warranty or a state re­pair/ replacement statute.@ If you contact the Ford Consumer Appeals Board with a case that appears to qualify for review, you will be sent a one-page Customer Statement form. To begin the Board review process, the form should be completed and mailed to the special Board P.O. Box number. It is important that legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders related to your case be included with the completed form. When the Customer Statement form is accepted for review by the Board, an acknowledgment postcard will be sent advising you of the number assigned to your case. At the same time, your dealer is sent a form to get his comments on the problem. A Ford Motor Company representative is also asked to sub­mit a Company Statement. At monthly meetings, Board members review each case and arrive at a decision by a simple majority vote. Decisions are based only on the written state­ments submitted by each of the involved parties. Personal presentations by customers, dealers and Ford Motor Company representatives are made only if requested by the Board.@ 186 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE You will be notified in writing of the Board's decision shortly after your case has been reviewed. Decisions by the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but not on customers who are free to seek remedies that may be available under state or federal law. The de­cisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into evidence by Ford or its dealer in legal proceed­ings that you may initiate. HOW LONG WILL IT TAKE TO HAVE A CASE REVIEWED? Since the Boards generally meet once a month, some cases will take more than 30 days before going to the Board. Every effort will be made to resolve each case within 40 days of the date the Customer State­ment form is received by the Board (47 days if you did not contact your dealer or Ford Motor Company before submitting your case to the Board). INFORMATION YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE FOR CASE CONSIDERATION • Vehicle year, make, model and I.D. number • Date purchased • Date of repair and repair mileage • Current mileage • Selling and/or servicing dealer • Description of unresolved service complaint • Summary of actions taken with dealer and Ford Motor Company • Names (if known) of individuals contacted at the dealership and at Ford Motor Company • Copies of maintenance and repair orders and other relevant explanation of problem(s) • Action required to resolve complaint 187
  • 89.
    CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE HOWIS THE FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARD CONTACTED? You may contact the Ford Consumer Appeals Board by calling toll-free 1-800-241-8450 or writing to the Board in your geographic area. Board addresses follow: FORD CONSUMER APPEALS BOARDS* ATLANTA LOUISVILLE P.O. Box 91069 P.O. Box 35186 East Point, GA 30364-1069 Louisville, KY 40233-5186 BOSTON P.O. Box 667 MEMPHIS Waltham, MA 02154-0667 P.O Box 381611 BUFFALO Germantown, TN 38183-1611 P.O. Box 187 MILWAUKEE Williamsville, NY 14221.0187 P.O. Box 788 CHARLOTTE Brookfield, WI 53005-0788 P.O. Box 220822 NEW ORLEANS Charlotte, NC 28222.0822 P.O. Box 6491 CHICAGO Metairie, LA 70010-6491 P.O. Box 1662 Melrose Park, IL 60161·1662 NEW YORK CINCINNATI P.O. Box 2368 P.O. Box 41508 °South Hackensack, NJ 760 2368 Sharonville, OH 45241.0508 6- OMAHA CLEVELAND P.O. Box 3n56 P.O. Box 234 Millard Station Richfield, OH 4428&-o234 omaha, NE 68137-n56 DALLAS PHILADELPHIA P.O. Box 110147 P.O. Box 618 Carrollton, TX 75011.0147 Pennsauken, NJ 08110.0618 DENVER PHOENIX P.O. Box 16082 P.O. Box 34865 Denver, CO 80216.0082 Phoenix, AZ 85067·4865 DETROIT PITTSBURGH P.O. Box 900 P.O. Box 13457 Wixom, Mi 48096-0900 Pittsburgh, PA 15243-o289 HOUSTON ST. LOUIS P.O. Box 1519 P.O. Box 27375 Houston, TX n251-1519 St. Louis, MO 63141·0575 INDIANAPOLIS SAN JOSE P.O. Box 39226 P.O. Box 360909 lndtanapolls, IN 46239-o226 Milpitas, CA 95035-0909 JACKSONVILLE SEATTLE P.O. Box 955 P.O. Box 1886 Orange Park, FL 32067-<1955 Bellevue, WA 98009-1886 188 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE KANSAS CITY P.O. Box 2918 Shawnee Mission, KS 66201·1318 LOS ANGELES P.O. Box 4630-P 2200 West Sequoia Anaheim, CA 92803-4630 TWIN CITIES P.O. Box 1502 Minneapolis, MN 55440-1502 WASHINGTON, D.C. P.O. Box 696 Merrifield, VA 22116-o696 'For geographiC area and states covered, please refer to listong of Ford Parts and Service Dostrict Office locations under "Customer Assostance". FOOTNOTES: 1. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change Ford Consumer Appeals Board program eligibility parameters involving vehicles not covered by either warranty or applicable state vehicle repair/replacement statutes without notice and without incurring obligation. 2. The operation of the Ford Consumer Appeals Board may be affected by state vehicle repair/re­placement statutes. Therefore, Board composi­tion, location, and the number of Boards may be subject to change. 3. In Kentucky and Montana customers have the op­tion under their respective states repair/replace­ment laws of making persona l presentations before the Board. 189